może trochę późno ale mam na temat DK800 coś takiego, instrukcja i pełna dokumentacja po angielsku. djas
Instruction manual
DK 800
Version
01.01
Part 1 : User manual
Part 2 : Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
Siemensstr. 36
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
Tel. (0)7151 / 94902-0
Fax (0)7151 / 43946
Copyright © 1994 - 2001
by
Mesomatic GmbH
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
Table of contents
Preface ....................................................... 1-1
1. Switching on ............................................... 1-1
2. Measuring mode ............................................. 1-2
3. Data entry .................................................
3.1. Searching for a function number ........................
3.2. Summary of functions (01...49) .........................
3.3. Entering Data ..........................................
3.4. Explanation of individual parameters ...................
3.4.1. Clear zero point memory ............................
3.4.2. Setting zero facility ..............................
3.4.3. Zero continuation facility .........................
3.4.4. Empty signal (hysteresis and delay time) ...........
3.4.5. Limit switch .......................................
3.4.6. Dosing parameter ...................................
3.4.7. Auxiliary functions for testing unit ...............
3.4.8. Printer ............................................
3.5. Data protection ........................................
3.6. Control outputs and Watch-dog ..........................
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
4. Error messages ............................................. 1-10
5. Dosing cycle ............................................... 1-12
6. Techn. Data ................................................ 1-14
7. Options and Type Descriptions .............................. 1-15
Index ......................................................... 1-16
Preface ....................................................... 2-1
1. Data entry .................................................
1.1. Searching for a function number. .......................
1.2. Summary of functions(01...149) .........................
1.3. Entering Data ..........................................
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-7
2. Line up ....................................................
2.1. Explanation of individual parameters ...................
2.1.1. Basic adjustment and calibration ...................
2.1.1.1. Selection of the input voltage range...........
2.1.1.2. Functional test prior to calibration...........
2.1.1.3. Approval number display upon activation........
2.1.1.4. Auto-Zero and Auto-Calibration.................
2.1.1.5. Polarity of the input voltage..................
2.1.1.6. Display division, no. of digits, decimal pt....
2.1.1.7. Average cycles.................................
2.1.1.8. Calibration weight and calibration.............
2.1.1.9. Read-out / input of internal adjust values.....
2.1.1.10. Negative weigher..............................
2.1.1.11. Empty / Overload output.......................
2.1.1.12. Release setting zero facility.................
2.1.1.13. Release zero continuation facility............
2.1.1.14. Measuring transmitter monitoring..............
2.1.1.15. Keyboard locking..............................
2.1.1.16. Brightness adjustment.........................
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-15
- I -
2.1.1.17. Linearity-correction..........................
2.1.2. Functions of analogue output .......................
2.1.2.1. Analogue output................................
2.1.2.2. Number of average cycles for analogue output...
2.1.2.3. Analogue output mode...........................
2.1.2.4. Adjustment of the analogue output..............
2.1.2.5. Range-switching for the analogue output........
2.1.3. Functions for dosing mode ..........................
2.1.3.1. Dosing (mode of operation).....................
2.1.3.2. Tolerance check................................
2.1.3.3. Actual value registration......................
2.1.3.4. Afterflow correction...........................
2.1.3.5. Mode to start dosing and acknowledge tol. .....
2.1.3.6. Taring prior to dosing.........................
2.1.3.7. Source of nominal value........................
2.1.3.8. Test stop (during dosing)......................
2.1.3.9. Adjust the analogue input......................
2.1.3.10. Delayed dosing-end output disable.............
2.1.4. Functions of data transfer .........................
2.1.4.1. Parallel interface.............................
2.1.4.1.1. BCD interface .............................
2.1.4.1.2. Binary interface ..........................
2.1.4.1.3. Control output ............................
2.1.4.2. Serial interface...............................
2.1.4.2.1. Type of serial interface ..................
2.1.4.2.2. Serial identification address .............
2.1.4.2.3. Parity bit and data frame length ..........
2.1.4.2.4. Baud-rate .................................
2.1.4.2.5. Actual value transfer mode ................
2.1.4.2.6. Actual value format .......................
2.1.4.3. Printer interface..............................
2.1.5. Other functions ....................................
2.1.5.1. Overload / Underload...........................
2.1.5.2. Standstill monitoring..........................
2.1.5.3. Minimum load...................................
2.1.5.4. Zero setting range.............................
2.1.5.5. Negative display range.........................
2.1.5.6. External Taring................................
2.1.5.7. External Zeroing...............................
2.1.5.8. Operation mode for " limit switch " ..............
2.1.5.9. Arithmetic sign for " net " operation............
2.1.5.10. Clear all memory..............................
2.1.5.11. Switch on reset...............................
2-16
2-17
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-22
2-22
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-30
2-30
2-31
3. Service ....................................................
3.1. Explanation of individual parameters ...................
3.1.1. Check inputs .......................................
3.1.2. Check outputs ......................................
3.1.3. Check A/D and D/A converter ........................
3.1.4. Revision no. and revision date .....................
3.1.5. Transferring configuration data to the PC ..........
3.1.6. Reading in configuration data from the PC ..........
2-32
2-32
2-32
2-32
2-33
2-33
2-33
2-34
4. Data protection ............................................ 2-34
5. Error messages ............................................. 2-35
6. Dosing cycle ............................................... 2-37
Appendix ......................................................
A.1. Connectors and plug arrangement ........................
A.1.1. Power supply (X1) ..................................
A.1.2. Measurement transmitter and analogue inputs (X2) ...
A.1.3. Digital inputs /outputs (X3) .......................
- II -
2-39
2-39
2-39
2-39
2-41
A.1.3.1. Arrangement of inputs..........................
A.1.3.2. Arrangement of outputs.........................
A.1.4. Serial interface and analogue output (X4) ..........
A.1.5. Block diagram ......................................
A.2. Dimensions .............................................
A.3. Techn. Data ............................................
A.4. Configuration table (german) ...........................
A.5. Configuration table (engl.) ............................
A.6. Table of settings (Hardware) ...........................
2-41
2-42
2-44
2-44
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-51
2-54
Index ......................................................... 2-55
- III -
Index
Fig. 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Fig.10
Fig.11
Fig.12
Fig.13
Fig.14
Tab. 1
Tab. 1
Tab. 2
Tab. 3
Tab. 4
Tab. 5
Tab. 7
Tab. 8
Tab. 9
Tab.10
Tab.11
Keyboard ......................................... 1-1
Switch block ..................................... 2-1
Input voltage range (Jumper) ..................... 2-8
Ramp function .................................... 1-7
Analogue output (Jumper) ......................... 2-17
Data output (timing) ............................. 2-23
2-Step data output (timing) ...................... 2-24
Connector X2 ..................................... 2-39
Connector X2 ..................................... 2-40
Connector X2 ..................................... 2-40
Connector X3 ..................................... 2-41
Connector X4 ..................................... 2-44
Block diagram .................................... 2-45
Front view ....................................... 2-46
Cut-out .......................................... 2-46
Rear view ........................................ 2-46
Summary of functions (fct.01-49) ................. 1-4
Summary of functions(Fct.01-49) .................. 2-3
Summary of functions(Fct.50-149) ................. 2-6
Input ranges ..................................... 2-8
Cycle-times of the display ....................... 2-11
Cycle times of the analogue output ............... 2-18
Arrangement of inputs ............................ 2-42
Arrangement of outputs ........................... 2-43
Configuration table (german) ..................... 2-50
Configuration table (engl.) ...................... 2-53
Table of settings (Hardware) ..................... 2-54
acknowledgement of error messages ........................ 1-11 2-36
Actual value format, serial .............................. 2-26
Actual value, registration ............................... 2-20
Actual value, stored ..................................... 1-12 2-37
Actual-value transfer mode ............................... 2-26
Adjust the analogue input ................................ 2-22
Adjustment of the analogue output ........................ 2-18
Afterflow correction ..................................... 1-12 2-20 2-37
afterflow correction ..................................... 1-6 1-13 2-38
analogue auxiliary input ................................. 1-6
Analogue output .......................................... 2-17 2-23
Analogue output (X4) ..................................... 2-44
Analogue output mode ..................................... 2-18
Analogue output, calculation of averages ................. 2-24
Analogue output, range-switching ......................... 2-19
analogue output, switching range ......................... 1-6
Approval number display upon activation .................. 2-9
Arithmetical sign for " net " operation .................... 2-30
Arrangement of analogue inputs ........................... 2-41
Auto-Calibration ......................................... 2-8 2-9
Auto-Zero ................................................ 2-9
Automatic Zeroing ........................................ 2-14
Auxiliary analogue input connection ...................... 2-39
auxiliary device, calibration ............................ 2-11 2-16
Auxiliary functions for testing unit ..................... 1-8
Average cycle (display) .................................. 2-28
Average cycles (display) ................................. 2-11
Average-value cycle ...................................... 2-26
Battery for data protection .............................. 1-9
battery, charge .......................................... 1-9 2-34
battery, protection from deep discharge .................. 1-9 2-34
Baud rate ................................................ 2-25
BCD interface ............................................ 2-23
BCD output ............................................... 2-23
Binary interface ......................................... 2-23
bipolar operation mode ................................... 2-10
Block diagram ............................................ 2-44
block of switches ........................................ 2-34
Brightness adjustment .................................... 2-15
cable shield ............................................. 2-39
- 1 -
calculation of averages .................................. 2-23
calculation of averages (analogue output) ................ 2-24
Calibration .............................................. 2-11 2-16
Calibration data read off ................................ 2-13
Calibration Negative Weigher ............................. 2-13 2-14
Calibration weight ....................................... 2-11
Calibration, functional test prior to C. ............... 2-9
charge battery ........................................... 1-9 2-34
Check A/D converter ...................................... 1-8 2-33
Check D/A converter ...................................... 1-8 2-33
Check inputs ............................................. 2-32
Check outputs ............................................ 2-32
Clear all memory ......................................... 2-30
Clear zero point memory .................................. 1-5
coarse dosing ............................................ 1-13 2-38
Coarse weighers .......................................... 2-29
coarse/fine reserve ...................................... 1-13 2-38
Coarse/fine Switching Point .............................. 1-12 2-37
communication mode ....................................... 2-25
configuration ............................................ 2-13 2-33
configuration data ....................................... 1-10 2-34
Configuration table (engl.) .............................. 2-51
Configuration table (german) ............................. 2-48
Connectors and plug arrangement .......................... 2-39
Control output ........................................... 2-24
Control outputs and Watch-dog ............................ 1-9
Current output ........................................... 2-17
Cycle-times of the analogue output ....................... 2-18
Cycle-times of the display ............................... 2-11
Data
data
Data
Data
entry ............................................... 1-3
frame length ........................................ 2-25
Outp., Average Cycl. ................................ 2-17
Output .............................................. 1-12
2-23
Data Output (BCD) ........................................ 2-23
Data Output (binary) ..................................... 2-23
Data overrun ............................................. 2-13
Data protection .......................................... 1-9
Decimal point ............................................ 2-10
Delayed dosing-end output disable ........................ 2-22
Digital inputs (X3) ...................................... 2-41
Digital outputs (X3) ..................................... 2-41
Dimensions ............................................... 2-46
Display division ......................................... 2-10
display range ............................................ 2-28
Dosing ................................................... 2-21
Dosing (mode of operation) ............................... 2-19
Dosing Coarse ............................................ 1-7
Dosing cycle ............................................. 1-12
Dosing Fine .............................................. 1-7
Dosing parameter ......................................... 1-6
Dosing Speed Control Output .............................. 2-18
Dosing time monitoring ................................... 1-6
Empty output ............................................. 2-14
Empty signal (hysteresis and delay time) ................. 1-6
empty-message ............................................ 2-26
Entering Data ............................................ 1-5
Error .................................................... 1-3
Error Message ............................................ 1-3
2-35
Error message during calibration ......................... 2-12
EU - Approval ............................................ 2-10
Explanation of individual parameters ..................... 1-5
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
2-35
2-1
2-17
2-30
2-19
2-37
2-34
2-31
1-12 2-37
2-37
1-12 2-37
1-12
2-19
2-7
1-10
1-10
2-2
2-2
2-8
2-32
.................................................... 2-9 2-22
" _E/OL-O " ........................................... 2-14
" 0-SHFT " ............................................ 2-11
" A.-CAL. " ........................................... 2-9
" A.0.RNG.2 " ......................................... 2-19 2-21
" A.ADJ.0 " ........................................... 2-18
" A.ADJ.MX " .......................................... 2-18
" A.AV.CYC " .......................................... 2-18
- 2 -
2-20
2-37
2-16
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
" A.I.ADJ.0 " ......................................... 2-22
" A.I.ADJ.M " ......................................... 2-22
" A.O.RNG.2 " ......................................... 1-6
" A/D-C.T " ........................................... 1-8
" A/D-I.R " ........................................... 2-10
" ADJ.0 " ............................................. 2-11
" ADJ.C.1 " ........................................... 2-16
" ADJ.C.2 " ........................................... 2-16
" ADJ.C.3 " ........................................... 2-16
" ADJ.C.4 " ........................................... 2-16
" ADJ.C.5 " ........................................... 2-16
" ADJ.MX " ............................................ 2-11
" ADJ.WGT. " .......................................... 2-11
" AF " ................................................ 1-6
" AF.CORR " ........................................... 2-20
" AN.AUSG " ........................................... 2-17
" AN.MODE " ........................................... 2-18
" AN.OUTP " ........................................... 2-17
" AV.CYCL " ........................................... 2-11
" BAUD-R " ............................................ 2-25
" BCD.CLK " ........................................... 2-23
" BRIGHT " ............................................ 2-15
" C.DTA.RD " .......................................... 2-34
" C.DTA.WR " .......................................... 2-33
" C.S.ENAB " .......................................... 2-16
" C/F " ............................................... 1-6
" COM.MOD " ........................................... 2-25
" COM.NO. " ........................................... 2-25
" COM.TYP " ........................................... 2-25
" CORR.P.2 " .......................................... 2-16
" CORR.P.3 " .......................................... 2-16
" CORR.P.4 " .......................................... 2-16
" CORR.P.5 " .......................................... 2-16
" CORR.S.1 " .......................................... 2-16
" D.QUITT " ........................................... 2-27
" D.SPERR " ........................................... 2-27
" D.START " ........................................... 2-21
" DATA-O " ............................................ 2-23
" DEC.PT. " ........................................... 2-10
" DEL.ALL " ........................................... 2-30
" DLY.REG " ........................................... 1-6
" DLY.TAR " ........................................... 1-7
" DOS.TM.C " .......................................... 1-6
" DOSING " ............................................ 2-9
" DS.COAR " ........................................... 1-7
" DS.FINE " ........................................... 1-7
" EMPTY " ............................................. 1-6
" EMPTY.D " ........................................... 1-6
" EMPTY.H " ........................................... 1-6
" EX.Z.SET " .......................................... 2-29
" EXT.TAR " ........................................... 2-29
" I.DIM.Z " ........................................... 2-27
" IAPV.0.H " .......................................... 2-13
" IAPV.0.L " .......................................... 2-13
" IAPV.M.H " .......................................... 2-13
" IAPV.M.L " .......................................... 2-13
" ITEM.NO. " .......................................... 1-8
" KB.LOCK " ........................................... 2-15
" L-CORR " ............................................ 2-16
" LF.B.PRI " .......................................... 1-8
" LIM.SP.M " .......................................... 1-6
" LIM.SWP " ........................................... 1-6
" MA.ISTW " ........................................... 2-15
" MAX.AF " ............................................ 1-6
" N.V.SRC " ........................................... 2-21
" NEG.RNG " ........................................... 2-29
" NEG.WG. " ........................................... 2-13
" NET.SGN " ........................................... 2-30
" NO.O.DIG " .......................................... 2-10
" NOM.VAL " ........................................... 1-6
" NUL.CLR " ........................................... 1-5
" O-TEST " ............................................ 1-8
" OVERLD " ............................................ 2-28
" P.ACKN. " ........................................... 1-6
- 3 -
2-9
2-33
2-13
2-20
2-19
2-19
2-18
2-18
2-30
2-20
2-32
2-19
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
fine
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
" PR.MODE " ........................................... 2-27
" PRINTR " ............................................ 1-8
" PU.ACT.V " .......................................... 2-15
" PU.LIM. " ........................................... 2-15
" PWR.RST " ........................................... 2-31
" RAMPE " ............................................. 1-7
" REG.MOD " ........................................... 2-20
" RESOLU " ............................................ 2-10
" REV.DAT " ........................................... 1-8
" REV.NO. " ........................................... 1-8
" SS.D./A.C " ......................................... 2-28
" SS.DIGT " ........................................... 2-28
" SS.TIME " ........................................... 2-28
" T.QUIT " ............................................ 2-21
" TAR.DOS " ........................................... 2-21
" TOL. " .............................................. 1-6
" TOL.CHK " ........................................... 2-20
" TR.FORMT " .......................................... 2-26
" TR.MODE " ........................................... 2-26
" ULD.ERR " ........................................... 2-28
" Z.ALG.EN " .......................................... 2-14
" Z.ALIGN " ........................................... 1-5
" Z.RANGE " ........................................... 2-29
" Z.SET " ............................................. 1-5
" Z.SET.EN " .......................................... 2-14
dosing .............................................. 1-13
.................................................... 2-9
" 0-VERS " ............................................ 2-11
" A-TEST " ............................................ 1-8
" A.-CAL. " ........................................... 2-9
" A.A.2.BER " ......................................... 1-6
" A.E.JUS.0 " ......................................... 2-22
" A.E.JUS.M " ......................................... 2-22
" A.JUST.0 " .......................................... 2-18
" A.JUST.M " .......................................... 2-18
" A.MITT.W " .......................................... 2-18
" A/D-E.B " ........................................... 2-10
" A/D-W.T " ........................................... 1-8
" AN.MODE " ........................................... 2-18
" BAUD-R " ............................................ 2-25
" BCD.CLK " ........................................... 2-23
" COM.MOD " ........................................... 2-25
" COM.NR. " ........................................... 2-25
" COM.TYP " ........................................... 2-25
" D.QUITT " ........................................... 1-6
" D.START " ........................................... 2-21
" DATEN.A " ........................................... 2-23
" DG.FEIN " ........................................... 1-7
" DG.GROB " ........................................... 1-7
" DOS.ZT.U " .......................................... 1-6
" DOSIER " ............................................ 2-9
" DR.MODE " ........................................... 2-27
" DRUCK " ............................................. 1-8
" E.RESET " ........................................... 2-31
" EXT.NST " ........................................... 2-29
" EXT.TAR " ........................................... 2-29
" G/F " ............................................... 1-6
" GRENZW " ............................................ 1-6
" GRNZW.H " ........................................... 1-6
" GRNZW.M " ........................................... 2-30
" HELL " .............................................. 2-15
" I.FORMT " ........................................... 2-26
" I.U.MODE " .......................................... 2-26
" IJKW.0.H " .......................................... 2-13
" IJKW.0.L " .......................................... 2-13
" IJKW.M.H " .......................................... 2-13
" IJKW.M.L " .......................................... 2-13
" J.-GEW. " ........................................... 2-11
" JUST.0 " ............................................ 2-11
" JUST.K.1 " .......................................... 2-16
" JUST.K.2 " .......................................... 2-16
" JUST.K.3 " .......................................... 2-16
" JUST.K.4 " .......................................... 2-16
" JUST.K.5 " .......................................... 2-16
- 4 -
2-33
2-33
2-14
2-14
2-38
2-22
2-32
2-19
2-9
2-21
2-33
2-19
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-13
Fkt. " JUST.MX " ........................................... 2-11
Fkt. " K.DAT.L " ........................................... 2-34
Fkt. " K.DAT.S " ........................................... 2-33
Fkt. " K.P.FRGB " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " KOMMA " ............................................. 2-10
Fkt. " KORR.P.1 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " KORR.P.2 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " KORR.P.3 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " KORR.P.4 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " KORR.P.5 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " L-KORR " ............................................ 2-16
Fkt. " L/UE-A " ............................................ 2-14
Fkt. " LEERM. " ............................................ 1-6
Fkt. " LEERM.H " ........................................... 1-6
Fkt. " LEERM.V " ........................................... 1-6
Fkt. " LFD.NR. " ........................................... 1-8
Fkt. " LOESCH " ............................................ 2-30
Fkt. " LZ.N.DRU " .......................................... 1-8
Fkt. " MA.GRW. " ........................................... 2-15
Fkt. " MAX.NL " ............................................ 1-6
Fkt. " MITT.-W " ........................................... 2-11
Fkt. " N.NACHF " ........................................... 1-5
Fkt. " N.NF.FGB " .......................................... 2-14
Fkt. " N.ST.BER " .......................................... 2-29
Fkt. " N.ST.FGB " .......................................... 2-14
Fkt. " N.STELL " ........................................... 1-5
Fkt. " NEG.BER " ........................................... 2-29
Fkt. " NEG.WG. " ........................................... 2-13
Fkt. " NET.VZ. " ........................................... 2-30
Fkt. " NL " ................................................ 1-6
Fkt. " NL.KORR " ........................................... 2-20
Fkt. " NUL.CLR " ........................................... 1-5
Fkt. " REG.MOD " ........................................... 2-20
Fkt. " REV.DAT " ........................................... 1-8
Fkt. " REV.NR. " ........................................... 1-8
Fkt. " SOLL " .............................................. 1-6
Fkt. " SOLLW.Q " ........................................... 2-21
Fkt. " SS.T./M.Z " ......................................... 2-28
Fkt. " SS.TEIL " ........................................... 2-28
Fkt. " SS.ZEIT " ........................................... 2-28
Fkt. " T.QUITT " ........................................... 2-21
Fkt. " T.SPERR " ........................................... 2-15
Fkt. " TAR.DOS " ........................................... 2-21
Fkt. " TEILEZ " ............................................ 2-10
Fkt. " TOL.PFG " ........................................... 2-20
Fkt. " UEBERL " ............................................ 2-28
Fkt. " ULA.ERR " ........................................... 2-28
Fkt. " WZ.V.REG " .......................................... 1-6
Fkt. " WZ.V.TAR " .......................................... 1-7
Fkt. " ZIF.SPR " ........................................... 2-10
Function Input, leaving .................................. 2-1
Function leaving ......................................... 2-16
Functional test prior to calibration ..................... 2-9
Functions, not allocated Fct. .......................... 1-5
2-20
2-14
2-14
2-20
2-33
2-33
2-7
ground loop .............................................. 2-39
Hysteresis ............................................... 2-30
identification address ................................... 2-25
indicating range ......................................... 2-10
Initial load ............................................. 2-12
Input .................................................... 1-12 2-15
2-29 2-37
Input filter ............................................. 2-11
Input voltage ............................................ 1-8 2-33
input voltage range ...................................... 2-8
interface, Profibus-DP ................................... 2-17 2-25
interface, serial ........................................ 2-25
interference ............................................. 2-39
intervals ................................................ 2-24
Keyboard ................................................. 1-1
Keyboard locking ......................................... 2-15
- 5 -
2-19
2-41
2-26
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
Keyboard,
+ key, Data input .............................. 1-5
+ key, data transfer ........................... 2-26
+ Key, Fct. seek ............................... 1-3
+ key, Measuring mode .......................... 1-2
- key, Data input .............................. 1-5
- Key, Fct. seek ............................... 1-3
- key, Measuring mode .......................... 1-2
0 key, Calibration ............................. 2-12
0 key, Data input .............................. 1-5
0 Key, Fct. seek ............................... 1-3
0 key, Measuring mode .......................... 1-2
0 key, Negative Weigher ........................ 2-14
F key, Data input .............................. 1-5
F Key, Fct. seek ............................... 1-3
F Key, Measuring mode .......................... 1-3
Net key, Data input ............................ 1-5
Net Key, Fct. seek ............................. 1-3
Net key, Measuring mode ........................ 1-2
o key, zero setting ............................ 2-29
Leave a Function ......................................... 2-16
Limit frequency .......................................... 2-11
Limit switch ............................................. 1-6
Line up .................................................. 2-8
Linearity-correction ..................................... 2-12
Linearization Negative Weigher ........................... 2-13
Load cell connection ..................................... 2-39
load-cell ................................................ 2-39
2-7
2-2
2-7
2-2
2-7
2-2
2-7
2-2
2-7
2-2
2-16
malfunction-warning ...................................... 2-14
Measurement transmitter and analogue inputs (X2) ......... 2-39
Measuring Amplifier ...................................... 2-8
Measuring mode ........................................... 1-2
Measuring transmitter monitoring ......................... 2-15
Minimum load ............................................. 2-29
Mode to acknowledge tolerance ............................ 2-21
Mode to start dosing ..................................... 2-21
motion ................................................... 2-28
negative display-range ................................... 2-29
Negative weigher ......................................... 2-13
Net ...................................................... 2-23 2-24
NiCd rechargeable battery ................................ 1-9 2-34
Number of average cycles for analogue output ............. 2-18
Number of digits ......................................... 2-10
Operation mode for " limit switch " ........................ 2-30
Option " Di " .............................................. 2-24
Options .................................................. 1-15
Output ................................................... 1-8
2-19
Output current ........................................... 1-8
Output voltage ........................................... 1-8
Overload ................................................. 2-28
Overload-output .......................................... 2-1
overload-output .......................................... 2-28
1-12 2-1 2-14
2-32 2-37 2-42
2-33
2-33
2-14
Parallel interface ....................................... 2-23
parity bit ............................................... 2-24 2-25
Payload .................................................. 2-12
Plug arrangement ......................................... 2-39
Plug X1 .................................................. 2-39
Polarity of the input voltage ............................ 2-10
Power supply (X1) ........................................ 2-39
print-out acknowledgement ................................ 1-6 2-19 2-27
Printer .................................................. 1-8
printer cut-out .......................................... 2-27
Printer interface ........................................ 2-27
printer, actual value format ............................. 2-26
printer, actual value, units of measurement .............. 2-27
Printer, printout-image .................................. 2-27
printout-image ........................................... 2-27
PTB ...................................................... 2-9
- 6 -
Ramp ..................................................... 1-7
Range-switching for the analogue output .................. 1-6 2-19
Read-out / input of internal adjust values ............... 2-13
Reading in configuration data from the PC) ............... 2-34
redosing ................................................. 1-13 2-38
Release setting zero facility ............................ 2-14
Release zero continuation facility ....................... 2-14
remote printer ........................................... 2-27
Reset .................................................... 1-2 1-3 2-2 2-9 210 2-15 2-31 2-34
Reset the display to zero ................................ 1-2
Reset, switch on-r. .................................... 2-31
Resistance thermometer connection ........................ 2-39
Resolution ............................................... 2-10
Resolution, 1/10 d Res. ................................ 1-2
Restart Dosing ........................................... 1-12 2-37
Revision date ............................................ 2-33
Revision no. ............................................. 2-33
RS485 interface .......................................... 2-25
Searching for a function number .......................... 1-3
Selection of the input voltage range ..................... 2-8
Sensors .................................................. 2-10
Serial connection cable .................................. 2-33
Serial identification address ............................ 2-25
Serial interface ......................................... 2-13
Serial interface (X4) .................................... 2-44
Serial interface, actual value format .................... 2-26
Serial interface, actual value transfer mode ............. 2-26
Serial Interface, Baud-rate .............................. 2-25
Serial interface, printer connection ..................... 2-27
Service .................................................. 2-32
Setting zero facility .................................... 1-5
Settling Time ............................................ 1-12
Source of nominal value .................................. 2-21
standstill ............................................... 2-26
Standstill monitoring .................................... 2-28
starting up .............................................. 1-9
storing of the DK800 ..................................... 1-9
strip printer ............................................ 2-27
Summary of functions (01...149) .......................... 2-3
Summary of functions (01...49) ........................... 1-4
Switch battery ........................................... 2-13
Switch Block ............................................. 2-30
switch field ............................................. 1-9
Switch on reset .......................................... 2-31
Switching on ............................................. 1-1
2-2
2-25
2-33
2-34
1-13
2-37
2-38
2-28
2-34
2-34
2-3
2-34
1-11
2-36
Table of settings (Hardware) ............................. 2-54
Tare ..................................................... 2-12
tare measurement ......................................... 1-7 1-13 2-38
Taring ................................................... 1-2 1-12 2-29 2-31
2-37
Taring cycle ............................................. 2-21
Taring prior to dosing ................................... 2-21
Techn. Data .............................................. 1-14 2-47
Test stop (during dosing) ................................ 2-21
test-stop at end of dosing ............................... 1-13 2-38
Tolerance check .......................................... 1-12 2-20 2-37
Tolerance limit .......................................... 1-6
tolerance report ......................................... 1-13 2-38
Trade weighers ........................................... 2-29
Transferring configuration data to the PC) ............... 2-33
Type Descriptions ........................................ 1-15
Type of serial interface ................................. 2-25
Underload ................................................ 2-28
unipolar operation mode .................................. 2-10
units of measurement ..................................... 2-27
Voltage output ........................................... 2-17
waiting time prior to tare measurement ................... 1-7
Watch-dog ................................................ 1-9
- 7 -
zero afterflow equipment ................................. 2-28
Zero Carry-Over .......................................... 2-14
Zero continuation facility ............................... 1-5
zero setting equipment ................................... 2-28
Zero setting range ....................................... 2-29
Zero shift ............................................... 2-11
Zero-shift Negative Weigher .............................. 2-14
Zeroing .................................................. 2-29
- 8 -
Instruction manual
DK 800
Version
01.01
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
Siemensstr. 36
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
Tel. (0)7151 / 94902-0
Fax (0)7151 / 43946
Copyright © 1994 - 2001
by
Mesomatic GmbH
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
date of issue 15.02.2001
Table of contents
Preface ............................................................. 1
1. Data entry .......................................................
1.1. Searching for a function number. .............................
1.2. Summary of functions(01...149) ...............................
1.3. Entering Data ................................................
1
2
3
7
2. Line up .......................................................... 8
2.1. Explanation of individual parameters ......................... 8
2.1.1. Basic adjustment and calibration ......................... 8
2.1.1.1. Selection of the input voltage range................. 8
2.1.1.2. Functional test prior to calibration................. 9
2.1.1.3. Approval number display upon activation.............. 9
2.1.1.4. Auto-Zero and Auto-Calibration....................... 9
2.1.1.5. Polarity of the input voltage....................... 10
2.1.1.6. Display division, no. of digits, decimal pt......... 10
2.1.1.7. Average cycles...................................... 11
2.1.1.8. Calibration weight and calibration.................. 11
2.1.1.9. Read-out / input of internal adjust values.......... 13
2.1.1.10. Negative weigher................................... 13
2.1.1.11. Empty / Overload output............................ 14
2.1.1.12. Release setting zero facility...................... 14
2.1.1.13. Release zero continuation facility................. 14
2.1.1.14. Measuring transmitter monitoring................... 15
2.1.1.15. Keyboard locking................................... 15
2.1.1.16. Brightness adjustment.............................. 15
2.1.1.17. Linearity-correction............................... 16
2.1.2. Functions of analogue output ............................ 17
2.1.2.1. Analogue output..................................... 17
2.1.2.2. Number of average cycles for analogue output........ 18
2.1.2.3. Analogue output mode................................ 18
2.1.2.4. Adjustment of the analogue output................... 18
2.1.2.5. Range-switching for the analogue output............. 19
2.1.3. Functions for dosing mode ............................... 19
2.1.3.1. Dosing (mode of operation).......................... 19
2.1.3.2. Tolerance check..................................... 20
2.1.3.3. Actual value registration........................... 20
2.1.3.4. Afterflow correction................................ 20
2.1.3.5. Mode to start dosing and acknowledge tol. .......... 21
2.1.3.6. Taring prior to dosing.............................. 21
2.1.3.7. Source of nominal value............................. 21
2.1.3.8. Test stop (during dosing)........................... 21
2.1.3.9. Adjust the analogue input........................... 22
2.1.3.10. Delayed dosing-end output disable.................. 22
2.1.4. Functions of data transfer .............................. 23
2.1.4.1. Parallel interface.................................. 23
2.1.4.1.1. BCD interface .................................. 23
2.1.4.1.2. Binary interface ............................... 23
2.1.4.1.3. Control output ................................. 24
2.1.4.2. Serial interface.................................... 25
2.1.4.2.1. Type of serial interface ....................... 25
2.1.4.2.2. Serial identification address .................. 25
2.1.4.2.3. Parity bit and data frame length ............... 25
2.1.4.2.4. Baud-rate ...................................... 25
2.1.4.2.5. Actual value transfer mode ..................... 26
2.1.4.2.6. Actual value format ............................ 26
2.1.4.3. Printer interface................................... 27
2.1.5. Other functions ......................................... 28
- I -
2.1.5.1. Overload / Underload................................
2.1.5.2. Standstill monitoring...............................
2.1.5.3. Minimum load........................................
2.1.5.4. Zero setting range..................................
2.1.5.5. Negative display range..............................
2.1.5.6. External Taring.....................................
2.1.5.7. External Zeroing....................................
2.1.5.8. Operation mode for " limit switch " ...................
2.1.5.9. Arithmetic sign for " net " operation.................
2.1.5.10. Clear all memory...................................
2.1.5.11. Switch on reset....................................
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
31
3. Service .........................................................
3.1. Explanation of individual parameters ........................
3.1.1. Check inputs ............................................
3.1.2. Check outputs ...........................................
3.1.3. Check A/D and D/A converter .............................
3.1.4. Revision no. and revision date ..........................
3.1.5. Transferring configuration data to the PC ...............
3.1.6. Reading in configuration data from the PC ...............
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
34
4. Data protection ................................................. 34
5. Error messages .................................................. 35
6. Dosing cycle .................................................... 37
Appendix ...........................................................
A.1. Connectors and plug arrangement .............................
A.1.1. Power supply (X1) .......................................
A.1.2. Measurement transmitter and analogue inputs (X2) ........
A.1.3. Digital inputs /outputs (X3) ............................
A.1.3.1. Arrangement of inputs...............................
A.1.3.2. Arrangement of outputs..............................
A.1.4. Serial interface and analogue output (X4) ...............
A.1.5. Block diagram ...........................................
A.2. Dimensions ..................................................
A.3. Techn. Data .................................................
A.4. Configuration table (german) ................................
A.5. Configuration table (engl.) .................................
A.6. Table of settings (Hardware) ................................
39
39
39
39
41
41
42
44
44
46
47
48
51
54
Index .............................................................. 55
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Preface
This part of the instruction manual is a guide for maintenance staff. For basic
information's see part 1 user manual and part 3 programmer manual.
General note: If two function-names are separated by a " / " , the name in front of
the " / " is used in the german unit-version, the name after the " / " is used in the
english unit-version.
1. Data entry
The keyboard on the front contains 5 keys with integrated LED's. The keys are
labelled:
" 0 "
" Net "
" F "
" + "
" - "
Pressing the " F " key puts the unit into the " Enter data " mode. According to the
software implemented, up to 149 different parameters can be entered. The
parameters (functions) with the numbers 1...49 are accessible by the operator at
all times and are described in part 1 (user manual) of the instruction manual.
For the purpose of entering sensitive data (configuration and calibration
functions 50...149), switch 1 of the 4-position switch battery on the rear side
of the unit (see fig. 1) must be pointing downwards. If this is not the case,
there will be no access to these functions. In order to avoid accidental writing
in functions 140....149, these are additionally guarded by switch 2.
1 2 3 4
Fct. 01...49
read + write
1 2 3 4
Fkt. 01...139
read + write
Fkt.140...149
read only
1 2 3 4
Fkt. 01...149
read + write
Fig.1
If the input function is left with switch 1 still in the lower position, " S1 "
(flashing) will be displayed and the overload-output activated. The fault is
acknowledged by returning switch 1 to the upper position.
If Switch 1 is in normal display mode and in the downward position, the weight
display will flash and the overload output will be activated.
Line up and service manual
2-1
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
1.1. Searching for a function number
When the " F " key is pressed, either " FKT.xxx " / " FCN.xxx " will be displayed or, if
the function is allocated, the text as shown in tab.1 and tab.2. However the text
" WARTEN " / " WAIT " is indicated, a serial communication takes place. After the
communication is completed " FKT.xxx " / " FCN.xxx " or the function text is displayed.
During the parameter input the LED in the " F " key will light up and the LED's
arranged vertically on the front panel will keep flashing. Also, the " empty " report output will be deactivated for the whole of the time during which
parameters are being entered in order to be able to prevent dosing being started
by the release of any external mechanisms.
The keys have the following functions now:
" + "
⇒ Increases the function number in steps of 1.
If this key is held down, the function number is displayed.
ton is not pressed the text appears.
" 0 "
⇒ Increases the function number in steps of 10.
If this key is held down, the function number is displayed.
ton is not pressed the text appears.
" - "
⇒ Decreases the function number in steps of 1.
If this key is held down, the function number is displayed.
ton is not pressed the text appears.
" + " and " - " simultaneously
⇒ Reset the function number to 0.
" F "
⇒ Exit from the data-entry mode
" Net " ⇒ Displays the contents of the function selected.
" 0 " , " + " and " - " simultaneously ⇒ Reset the unit (identical effect
power is switched on).
C a u t i o n !
If the but-
If the but-
If the but-
as when the
I m p o r t a n t !
It is only possible to leave the data-entry mode by means of the
" F " -key (and S1)!
If any combination of the keys " 0 " & " + " & " - " (reset) is pressed
while functions are being entered, or if the power supply is cut off
from the unit, the new data will be stored in the unit but the DK800
will not have been able to calculate the check-number. The next time
it is switched on, the data will therefore not tally with the checknumber and the DK800 will report the error " ERR.03 " . If this error
report is acknowledged, all data will be erased and the DK800 will
be back in its basic setting.
2-2
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
1.2. Summary of functions
The functions (1...49) are allocated as follows in the version described here:
Fct displayed
Description
DimenSection
no. text
sion
N U L.C L R
05 N U L.C L R Clear zero point memory
1-3.4.1
N.S T E L L
06 Z.S E T
Setting zero facility
1-3.4.2 & 2.1.1.11
N.N A C H F
07 Z.A L I G N Zero continuation facility
1-3.4.3 & 2.1.1.12
L E E R M.
10 E M P T Y
Empty, threshold
kg
1-3.4.4
L E E R M.H
11 E M P T Y.H Empty, hysteresis
kg
1-3.4.4
L E E R M.V
12 E M P T Y.D Empty, delay time
s
1-3.4.4
G R E N Z W
13 L I M.D W P Limit value for limit switch
kg
1-3.4.5
G R N Z W.H
14 L I M.S P.H Limit switch, hysteresis
kg
1-3.4.5
S O L L
17 N O M.V A L Nominal value
kg
1-3.4.6
G / F
18 C / F
Coarse / fine
kg
1-3.4.6
N L
19 A F
Afterflow
kg
1-3.4.6 & 2.1.3.4
T O L. +
20 T O L. +
Positive tolerance
kg
1-3.4.6
T O L. 21 T O L. Negative tolerance
kg
1-3.4.6
M A X.N L
22 M A X.A F
Max. afterflow
kg
1-3.4.6 & 2.1.3.4
W Z.V.T A R
23 D L Y.T A R Wait time before taring
s
1-3.4.6
D O S.Z T.U
25 D O S.T M.C Dosing time monitoring
s
1-3.4.6
W Z.V.R E G
26 D L Y.R E G Wait time before registration
s
1-3.4.6
D G.G R O B
27 D S.C O A R Dosing speed coarse
%
1-3.4.6 & 2.1.2.3
D G.F E I N
28 D S.F I N E Dosing speed fine
%
1-3.4.6 & 2.1.2.3
R A M P E
29 R A M P
Ramp / percental share
%
1-3.4.6
L F D.N R.
39 I T E M.N O Item no. (protocol-printer)
1-3.4.8 & 2.1.4.3
L Z.N.D R U
40 L F.B.P R I Empty lines after printing
1-3.4.8 & 2.1.4.3
D R U C K
41 P R I N T R Printing on/off
1-3.4.8 & 2.1.4.3
R E V.N R.
44 R E V.N O.
Software revision no.
3.1.4
R E V.D A T
45 R E V.D A T Software revision date
3.1.4
E - T E S T
47 I - T E S T Test of input circuits
3.1.1
A - T E S T
48 O - T E S R Test of output circuits
3.1.2
A / D - W.T
49 A / D - C.T Test of A/D- and D/A-converters
2.1.1.2 & 3.1.3
Tab.1 Summary of functions
Line up and service manual
2-3
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
The functions (50...149) are allocated as follows in the version described here:
Fct.
no.
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
2-4
Display
text
Z U L.N R.
A P P R.N O
A.-C A L.
A.-C A L.
A / D - E.B
A / D - I.R
Z I F.S P R
R E S O L U
T E I L E Z
N O.O.D I G
K O M M A
D E C.P T.
M I T T.- W
A V.C Y C L
J.- G E W.
A D J.W G T
J U S T. 0
A D J. 0
J U S T.M X
A D J.M A X
0 - V E R S
0 - S H F T
A N.A U S G
A N.O U T P
A.M I T T.W
A.A V.C Y C
A N.M O D E
A N.M O D E
A.J U S T.0
A.A D J. 0
A.J U S T.M
A.A D J.M X
U E B E R L
O V E R L D
M I N.
M I N.
N.S T.B E R
Z.R A N G E
S S.Z E I T
S S.T I M E
S S.T E I L
S S.D I G T
S S.T./ M.Z
S S.D./ A.C
N E T.V Z.
N E T.S G N
N E G.W G.
N E G.W G.
E.R E S E T
P W R.R S T
G R N Z W.M
L I M.S P.M
L / U E - A
E / O L - O
D A T E N.A
D A T A - O
B C D.C L K
B C D.C L K
E X T.T A R
E X T.T A R
D O S I E R
D O S I N G
T O L.P F G
T O L.C H K
Description
Dimension
Section
Approval no. display
2.1.1.3.
Auto calibration mode
2.1.1.4.
A/D-Converter input range
2.1.1.5.
Display division
Digit
2.1.1.6.
Number of digits
Digit
2.1.1.6.
Decimal point
2.1.1.6.
no. of average cycles
2n
2.1.1.7.
Calibration weight
kg
2.1.1.8.
Calibrate Zero
2.1.1.8.
Calibrate maximum
2.1.1.8.
Zero shift
2.1.1.8.
Analogue output
2.1.2.1.
no. of aver.cyc.(analogue outp.)
2.1.2.2.
Analogue output mode
2.1.2.3.
Zero adj. of analogue output
2.1.2.4.
Range adj. of analogue output
2.1.2.4.
Overload alarm
kg
2.1.5.1.
minimum charge
kg
2.1.5.3.
Zero set range
%
2.1.5.4.
Standstill monit., timebase
d
2.1.5.2.
Standstill monit., digits
d
2.1.5.2.
d/a.c.
2.1.5.2.
St.st. monit., dig./av.cycl.
sign in " net " operation
2.1.5.9.
negative weigher
2.1.1.10.
power on reset mode
2.1.5.11.
mode for " limit switch "
2.1.5.8.
Outputs " empty " and " overload "
2.1.1.11.
Data output
2.1.4.1.
BCD-clock-time
ms
2.1.4.1.1.
Taring from ext. (via input)
2.1.5.6.
Dosing mode
2.1.3.1.
Tolerance-check
2.1.3.2.
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
120
121
122
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
R E G.M O D
R E G.M O D
N L.K O R R
A F.C O R R
D.S T A R T
D.S T A R T
T.Q U I T T
T.Q U I T
T A R.D O S
T A R.D O S
D.E N D.V Z
D.E N D.D L
N.S T.F G B
Z.S E T.E N
N.N F.F G B
Z.A L G.E N
E X T.N S T
E X.Z.S E T
M A.I S T W
P U.A C T.V
M A.G R W.↓
P U.L I M.↓
M A.G R W.↑
P U.L I M.↑
H E L L
B R I G H T
T.S P E R R
K B.L O C K
C O M.T Y P
C O M.T Y P
C O M.N R.
C O M.N o.
C O M.M O D
C O M.M O D
B A U D - R
B A U D - R
I.U.M O D E
T R.M O D E
I.F O R M T
T R.F O M T
I.D I M.Z.
D I M.S G N
D.S P E R R
P.I N T L K
D.Q U I T T
P.A C K N.
D R.M O D E
P R.M O D E
L - K O R R
L.- C O R R
K O R R.P.1
C O R R.S.1
K O R R.P.2
C O R R.S.2
K O R R.P.3
C O R R.S.3
K O R R.P.4
C O R R.S.4
K O R R.P.5
C O R R.S.5
K.P.F R G B
C.S.E N A B
J U S T.K.1
A D J.C.S.1
J U S T.K.2
A D J.C.S.2
D-71394 Kernen
Registration mode
2.1.3.3.
Afterflow correction
2.1.3.4.
mode for " dosing start "
2.1.3.5.
mode for " tolerance quit "
2.1.3.5.
Taring before dosing
2.1.3.6.
Dos.end (outp.) delay
2.1.3.10.
Release zero point
2.1.1.12.
Release zero continuation
2.1.1.13.
External zero setting enable
2.1.5.7.
Measuring transm., act. value
60/V
2.1.1.14.
Measuring transm., low. limit
60/V
2.1.1.14.
Measuring transm., upper lim.
60/V
2.1.1.14.
Brightness variation of display
2.1.1.16.
Keyboard lock mode
2.1.1.15.
Serial interface
2.1.4.2.1.
Device communication address
2.1.4.2.2.
Parity bit / data length
2.1.4.2.3.
Baud-rate
Bd
2.1.4.2.4.
Data transmission mode
2.1.4.2.5.
Data transmission format
2.1.4.2.6.
Printer, dimension character
2.1.4.3.
Printer, output interlock
2.1.4.3.
Printer, outp. acknowl. signal
2.1.4.3.
Printer, printout-image
2.1.4.3.
Linearity correction of weigher
2.1.1.17.
Correction point 1
kg
2.1.1.17.
Correction point 2
kg
2.1.1.17.
Correction point 3
kg
2.1.1.17.
Correction point 4
kg
2.1.1.17.
Correction point 5
kg
2.1.1.17.
Correction point input enable
2.1.1.17.
Adjust correction point 1
2.1.1.17.
Adjust correction point 2
2.1.1.17.
Line up and service manual
2-5
MESOMATIC
123
124
125
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
143
144
145
146
148
J U S T.K.3
A D J.C.S.3
J U S T.K.4
A D J.C.S.4
J U S T.K.5
A D J.C.S.5
S O L L W.Q
N.V.S R C
A.E.J U S.0
A.I.A D J.0
A.E.J U S.M
A.I.A D J.M
A.A.2.B E R
A.O.R N G.2
N E G.B E R
N E G.R N G
U L A.E R R
U L D.E R R
K.D A T.S
C.D T A.W R
K.D A T.L
C.D T A.R D
I J K W.0.L
I A P V.0.L
I J K W.0.H
I A P V.0.H
I J K W.M.L
I A P V.M.L
I J K W.M.H
I A P V.M.H
L O E S C H
D E L.A L L
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Adjust correction point 3
2.1.1.17.
Adjust correction point 4
2.1.1.17.
Adjust correction point 5
2.1.1.17.
Nominal value source
2.1.3.7.
Zero adjust of analogue input
2.1.3.9.
Range adjust of analogue input
2.1.3.9.
2nd range of analogue output
2.1.2.5.
negative display range
2.1.5.5.
Mode on underload condition
2.1.5.1.
Write configuration data
3.1.5.
Read configuration data
3.1.6.
Int. zero adjust value, low
2.1.1.9.
Int. zero adjust value, high
2.1.1.9.
Int. full-scale adj. val., low
2.1.1.9.
Int. full-scale adj. val., high
2.1.1.9.
Clear all memory
2.1.5.10.
The function 50 is only available in units based on
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
The functions 69 and 137 are not available in units based on
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
Tab.2 Summary of functions
2-6
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
1.3. Entering Data
After the required parameter number has been found, the " Net " key should now be
pressed. If the selected parameter contains a figure value, it will be displayed
with the last digit flashing. Otherwise, a text will be displayed (e.g.
" OHNE " / " NONE " , or " MIT " / " WITH " ), which can be changed by means of the " + " or the
" - " key.
Is the function not allocated, " = ?? = " will be displayed. Is the function locked
or temporarily unavailable, " = N.V. = " / " = N.A. = " will be displayed.
The keys
" 0 "
⇒
⇒
" + "
" - "
⇒
" F "
⇒
" Net " ⇒
have the following functions now:
sets the flashing digit to 0.
increases the value of the flashing digit by 1 or shows the next text.
decreases the value of the flashing digit by 1 or shows the last text.
moves the flashing digit one position to the left.
stores the indicated parameter value and returns to the parameter
selection.
Line up and service manual
2-7
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2. Line up
If the unit has to be configured, it is best to start with fct.49. After fct.149
has been reached, the data in fct.1...48 should be entered. Also the prescribed
sequence of functions should be adhered to.
2.1. Explanation of individual parameters
2.1.1. Basic adjustment and calibration
2.1.1.1. Selection of the input voltage range
The input range of the measuring amplifier has to be defined by positioning of
some jumpers on the analogue board (see table 3)
J110
J28
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
J110 Limit frequency of the input filter
open
= 4 Hz
closed
= 1 Hz
(see
chapter
2.1.1.7., page 10)
J28 Input voltage range
see table 3
Jumpers on J28 at positions 2-4, 4-6 or
6-8 have no function and serve only as
storage for reserve jumpers.
Fig.2
Closed
jumper
J28
none
7-8
5-6
1-2
1-2 & 5-6
3-4
3-4 & 5-6
1-2 & 3-4
1-2 & 3-4 & 5-6
Input
range
10
1
100
50
33,3
20
16,6
14,3
12,5
Input voltage range
V
V
mV
mV
mV
mV
mV
mV
mV
unipolar
+0,3 ... +10,5 V
+0,03 ...
+1,05 V
+3
... +105
mV
+1,5 ... +52,5 mV
+1
... +35
mV
+0,6 ... +21
mV
+0,5 ... +17,5 mV
+0,43 ... +15
mV
+0,38 ... +13,1 mV
bipolar
-10,2 ... +10,5 V
-1,02 ... +1,05 V
-102
...+105
mV
-51
... +52,5 mV
-34
... +35
mV
-20,4 ... +21
mV
-17
... +17,5 mV
-14,5 ... +15
mV
-12,7 ... +13,1 mV
Tab.3 Input ranges
Important: As mentioned below the auto-calibration mode " Z.+GAIN " (calibration of
ZERO and GAIN) is only allowed in combination with an input range of
20 mV.
2-8
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.1.2. Functional test prior to calibration
Before calibration starts, a brief functional test should be carried out by means
of the Function " A/D-W.T " / " A/D-C.T " When this Function starts, the input voltage
is shown as a percentage of the measurement range. If 0.0 is displayed, this
means there is no load on the measurement socket / weigher (0mV = 0%). If 100.0
is displayed, this means the measurement socket / weigher is fully loaded. At
110.0%, the end of the measurement range of the A/D converter has been reached.
The following minimum and maximum values apply:
Weigher empty: min. 3%, unipolar
or
min. -102%, bipolar
Weigher full:
max. 105%, unipolar
or
max. +105%, bipolar
If the minimum and maximum values are not adhered to, it will not be possible to
calibrate the unit.
Also, this function should be used to check the correct direction of operation of
the measurement sensor. This is done by weighing it down with any known weight.
The value shown must then be correspondingly greater. Otherwise the connection or
the direction of installation of the measurement sensor must be changed.
2.1.1.3. Approval number display upon activation
The DK800 unit may be used as a:
Non-automatic electromechanical weighing instrument (NAW) (nichtselbsttätige
Waage, NSW) in accordance with the D94-09-020 EU Construction Type Approval,
or
Automatic balance for weighing (selbsttätige Waage zum Abwägen, SWA) in
accordance with the national (german) Construction
10.16
Type Approval
99.04
or
Automatic balance for individual weighing (selbsttätige Waage für
Einzelwägungen, SWE) in accordance with the national
10.26
(german) Construction Type Approval
99.08
of the German Federal Institute of Weights and Measures (Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt, PTB).
The " ZUL.NR. " / " APPR.NO " function allows to chose between " NSW " / " NAW " , " SWA " and
" SWE " so that the DK800 displays the correct approval number upon activation.
2.1.1.4. Auto-Zero and Auto-Calibration
The internal A/D converter is recalibrated every 100 seconds (tCalInterval) by the
automatic calibration. The internal automatic recalibration function can be
switched off by means of the Fct. " A.-CAL. " . However , this is only permitted for
test purposes, and not on units subject to official calibration, as a stable
internal zero-point can no longer be guaranteed if the automatic auto calibration
function is switched off. Therefore the normal setting has to be " Z.+GAIN " (ZERO
and GAIN got calibrated) or " ZERO " (ZERO got calibrated).
The following settings can be selected:
OHNE/NONE = The auto calibration is disconnected.
ZERO
= Only the internal zero-point of the A/D converter got calibrated/correct.
Z.+GAIN
= The internal zero-point and the end-point of the A/D converter
got calibrated/correct.
Important:
The auto-calibration mode " Z+GAIN " is only allowed in combination
with the input range 20 mV.
If the automatic calibration mode of operation has been changed, the DK800 will
carry out a reset cycle when the user leaves the Function " A.-CAL " .
If the dosing functions of the DK800 are switched off (Fct. " DOSIER " / " DOSING " =
" OHNE " / " NONE " ), the point of time of the auto-calibration can be influenced
Line up and service manual
2-9
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
externally. The input E3 then works as a auto-cal. control-input, which works as
follows:
When E3 is activated (rising edge) Zero- and Gain-Cal. is initiated and tCalIntervall is set to 300s. After tCalIntervall is over, Zero- and Gain-Cal. is
initiated again. While falling under the empty output (falling weights,
emptying the weigher) Zero- and Gain-Cal. are initiated, too and
tCalIntervall is set to 300s.
If E3 is deactivated Zero-Cal. will be initiated and tCalIntervall will be set back
to 100s.
The timing of the auto-calibration can also be affected by serial commands (see
part 3, programmers manual).
2.1.1.5. Polarity of the input voltage
In order to permit sensors to be connected, which issue only a very small or even
negative voltage, the input on the A/D-Converter can be switched over from the
unipolar operating mode ( " UNIPOL " ) to the bipolar ( " BIPOL " ) by means of the " A/DE.B " / " A/D-I.R " function.
As the internal resolution of the A/D-converter is
reduced by this switch-over to the bipolar range from approx. 1 000 000 to
approx. 500 000 parts, this mode of operation is only permitted up to a maximum
resolution of 1500 parts for weighing systems with approval.
If the polarity setting has been changed, the DK800 will carry out a reset cycle
when the user leaves the Function " A/D-E.B " / " A/D-I.R " .
2.1.1.6. Display division, number of digits and decimal point
The indicating range is defined with the functions " ZIF.SPR " / " RESOLU " (display
division), " TEILEZ " / " NO.O.DIG " (number of digits) and " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " (decimal
point).
Example:
Input:
Weigher 50,00 kg, display division 0,02 kg
ZIF.SPR = 2
TEILEZ = 50,00 kg / 0,02 kg = 2500
The decimal point can be moved to the left or to the right with the
" + " or " - " key.
The following are the conditions for making entries:
TEILEZ./NO.O.DIG * ZIF.SPR/RESOLU = measurement range ≤ 99 999.
TEILEZ./NO.O.DIG 10
1 ≤ ZIF.SPR/RESOLU ≤ 250
If no entry is possible with the Function " ZIF.SPR " / " RESOLU " , the number of
digits should be reduced.
2 - 10
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.1.7.Average cycles
The function " MITT.-W " / " AV.CYCL " defines how many individual measurement cycles
are brought together to form an average. This makes the display more static and
easier to read.
The figure to be entered has to lie between 6...11, and has to be regarded as an
exponential function. For instance, if 10 is to be entered, 210 = 1024 measurement cycles taken in sequence from the A/D converter will be added together and
the total divided by 1024..
The cycle-times of the display are described in Tab.4. The exact cycle-time
depends on the switched-on options and can vary between the min. and max.-values.
Input
6
7
8
9
10
11
Average
cycles
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
Cycle time
min.
max.
20 ms
27 ms
35 ms
40 ms
65 ms
70 ms
130 ms
135 ms
260 ms
265 ms
520 ms
530 ms
Tab.4 Cycle-times of the display
The standard unit has an input filter with a limit frequency of about 4 Hz.,
which can be set to 1 Hz by opening the unit an closing the jumper J110 (see
fig. 2 chapter 2.1.1.1., page 8).
For difficult applications (e.g. weighers that take a long time to settle),
special units are available on request with other limit frequencies (down to 0.25
Hz).
2.1.1.8. Calibration weight and calibration
Before the calibration you should run a short function-control by means of the
function
" A/D-W.T " / " A/D-C.T " .
The
functions
" J.-GEW. " / " ADJ.WGT " ,
" JUST.0 " / " ADJ.0 " , " JUST.MX " / " ADJ.MX " and " 0-VERS " / " 0-SHFT " are relevant to calibration. In the function " J.-GEW " / " ADJ.WGT " is to input the value of calibration
weight. Calibration weight must not be identical to the maximum weight of the
weigher, but it should not be to much below it. An auxiliary device, whenever
necessary, must be installed before the beginning of the calibration.
The next steps are as follows:
Goto Function " JUST.O " / " ADJ.0 " and enter it.
" Net " key
→
The request " WG.ENTL " / " UNLD.WG " (empty weigher) appears, the
" + " and " - " -keys are flashing. The auxiliary device remains on
the weigher. Then wait for standstill of the weigher.
" + " and " - " simultaneously
→ " WARTEN " / " WAIT " appears in the display. During
the waiting period up to 64 mean values are measured. At the
end of the period the average value is formed and stored as
zero point of the weigher.
Goto Function " JUST.MX " / " ADJ.MX " (with " + " -key) and enter the function.
" Net " key
→
The text " WG.BELA " / " LOAD.WG " (load weigher) appears alternating
with the calibration weight entered in Fct. " J.-GEW. " / " ADJ.WG " ,
the " + " and " - " -keys are flashing. The calibration weight must
be brought onto the weigher/auxiliary device now, and wait for
stabilisation of the weigher.
" + " and " - " simultaneously
→ " WARTEN " / " WAIT " appears in the display, During
the waiting period up to 64 mean values are measured. At the
end of the period the average value is formed and stored as
second point of the weigher-characteristic.
Line up and service manual
2 - 11
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
If no auxiliary device is used, calibration procedure already is finished. Otherwise continue as follows:
Goto Function " 0-VERS " / " 0-SHFT " =zero shift (with " + " -key) and enter the function.
" Net " key
→
The request " WGENTL " / " UNLD.WG " (empty
auxiliary device has to be finished.
weigher)
appears.
The
" + " and " - " simultaneously
→ " WARTEN " / " WAIT " appears in the display, the " + "
and " - " -keys are flashing. During the waiting period up to 64
mean values are measured. At the end of the period the average
value is formed and stored as zero point of the weigher.
Note:
a.) The length of time during which " WARTEN " / " WAIT " appears depends on the
number of cycles on which the average is based. Is this 211 (i.e. the figure
11 was entered), the process of measuring, calculating the average, and
storing the figure in the memory will take about 36 seconds, and
proportionately less for small figures. however, it can be guaranteed that
even very long internal oscillations of the weigher do not affect
calibration.
b.) The following faults can be reported during calibration:
During the data input of the calibration-weight:
• " JG & lt; MIN " / " AW & lt; MIN " = the value of the calibration-weight is too small.
• " JG & gt; MAX " / " AW & gt; MAX " = the value of the calibration-weight is too large.
During calibration of the zero point:
• " VL & lt; MIN " / " PL & lt; MIN " = the initial load (tare) is & lt; 3% from the selected
input voltage range according to tab.3.
• " VL & gt; MAX " / " PL & gt; MAX " = the initial load (tare) is & gt; 90% from the selected
input voltage range according to tab.3.
During calibration of the end-point:
• " ML & lt; MIN "
= the load measured (= tare + payload) is equal or
less than the tare. This situation can occur if the
weigher has been accidentally emptied when the
maximum level is being set, or if someone has forgotten to place the calibration load on the
weigher.
It can also be that the payload is less than 1% of
the load cell's nominal load.
• " ML & gt; MAX "
= the load measured (not the calibration weight!) result in a value & gt; 105 % from selected input voltage
range according to Tab.3.
c.) If the zero-point or the end-of-scale-point will be calibrated, the data of
linearity-correction will be erased automatically.
d.)
The Functions " JUST.0 " / " ADJ.0 " and " 0-VERS " / " 0-SHFT " are not identical!
The Function " JUST.0 " / " ADJ.0 " merely shifts the zero point, whilst the endvalue remains the same. This means that the measurement range is increased
or decreased.
With the Function " 0-VERS " / " 0-SHFT " , the zero point and the end-value are
shifted by the same amount and in the same direction, so that the usable
measurement range is not changed.
Note: If the functions " JUST.0 " / " ADJ.0 " , " JUST.MX " / " ADJ.MX " or " 0-VERS " / " 0-SHFT "
have been activated by mistake they can be left by means of key " 0 " .
2 - 12
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.1.9. Read-out / input of internal adjust values
The functions
- " IJKW.0.L " / " IAPV.0.L " (internal calibration code word, zero-point, low)
- " IJKW.0.H " / " IAPV.0.H " (internal calibration code word, zero-point, high)
- " IJKW.M.L " / " IAPV.M.L " (internal calibration code word, maximum, low)
- " IJKW.M.H " / " IAPV.M.H " (internal calibration code word, maximum, high)
can be used to read out the data of the calibration. If these ,together with the
calibration weight, are read out and noted after calibration, the calibration of
the unit can be reproduced without weights having to be attached in the event of
data being accidentally deleted or otherwise lost.
" ZIF.SPR " * " TEILEZ "
" RESOLU " * " NO.O.DIG "
" J. GEW. "
" IJKW.0.L "
+ " IJKW.0.H "
" IJKW.M.L "
+ " IJKW.M.H "
" IAPV.0.L "
+ " IAPV.0.H "
The
contents
of
the
" IJKW.0.L " / " IAPV.0.L " ,
" IJKW.0.H " / " IAPV.0.H " ,
" IJKW.M.L " / " IAPV.M.L " ,
" IJKW.M.H " / " IAPV.M.H " ,
" J.-GEW. " / " ADJ.WGT " ,
" ZIF.SPR " / " RESOLU "
and
" TEILEZ " / " NO.O.DIG "
functions
are the key parameters of the
DK800 calibration curve. These
functions
contain
pairs
of
related values. If only one of
these values is altered, the
entire calibration curve will
change!
" IAPV.M.L "
+ " IAPV.M.H "
For inputting data, not only switch 1 but also switch 2 in the rear battery of
switches must be in the lower position. If this switch is in the upper position,
values can be read out but none can be entered.
If the DK800 is fitted with a serial interface, and if an MS-DOS compatible PC is
available, the whole configuration can be transferred to the PC or read back off
it (see sections on " Transferring configuration data to the PC " and " Reading
configuration data from the PC " ).
2.1.1.10. Negative weigher
The " NEG.WG " function can be used for negative weighing (weighing by subtraction).
" OHNE " / " NONE " must first be entered in the " NEG.WG " function. The weigher is now
calibrated just like a normal weigher. I.e. the empty weigher is calibrated with
the function " JUST.0 " / " ADJ.0 " , then the calibration weight attached according to
function " J-GEW " / " ADJ.WGT " , and then the maximum weight is calibrated with the
" JUST.MX " / " ADJ.MX " function. If necessary, it is now possible to re-set the zero
by using the " 0-VERS " / " 0-SHFT " function, or to linearize with the " L-KORR " / " LCORR " to " JUST.K.x " / " ADJ.C.S.x " functions. Once all the calibration work has been
completed, the function " NEG.WG " " MIT " / " WITH " can now be entered. The operating
direction of the weigher is now inverted, i.e. the maximum weight is indicated
when it is empty and 0 is displayed when it is full. The analogue output reacts
accordingly. Apart from this, the following differences will apply:
•
•
The calibration functions are now locked out and cannot be used. If any
calibration does have to be carried out , the " OHNE " / " NONE " part of the
function " NEG.WG " must be entered again. The calibration can be carried
out then, and the re-set again with " MIT " / " WITH " .
The linearization functions are locked out (but still in effect),
cannot be used. If any linearization does have to be carried out
" OHNE " / " NONE " part of the function " NEG.WG " must be entered again.
linearisation
function
can
then
be
used,
and
reset
again
" MIT " / " WITH " .
Line up and service manual
and
the
The
with
2 - 13
MESOMATIC
•
•
•
The zero carry-over function
compulsorily deactivated.
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
and
the
automatic
zeroing
D-71394 Kernen
function
are
The 0 key sets the empty weigher to maximum.
The direction of the overload limit value is inverted, if e.g. 5 kg are
entered into the overload limit, then the overload contact is activated in
the display range from -5 kg to -max, as -5 kilos (in the display)
corresponds to a weight of maximum + 5 kg.
Important!
The " Negative weigher " mode inverts the entire calibration curve of
the DK800. If only a discharged quantity (e. g. from a silo) is to be
weighed, which allows to display also the total volume, only the net
operation sign should be inverted (refer to Section " Arithmetic sign
for " net " operation " ).
2.1.1.11. Empty / Overload output
The function " L/UE-A " / " E/OL-O " defines whether the outputs A14/A15 are to work as
empty / overload outputs, and what actual effect overfill output is to have.
The following settings are possible:
OHNE/NONE
= No empty / overfill output.
+L +UE/+E +OL = With empty / overfill output.
The overfill output (A15) is switched on with overload or
underload.
+L -UE/+E -OL = With empty / overfill output.
The overfill output (A15) opens with overload or underload.
The overload or under-load output is activated under the following conditions:
•
if the weighing range is exceeded by more than 9d
•
if the weight entered in the Function " UERBERL " is exceeded
•
if the lower end of the weight range is not reached (less than -4% of the
scale end-value)
•
if the configuration release Switch 1 on the back of the unit is in the
downward position.
If the over-full output is configured as an inverted output, it will also serve
as a malfunction-warning output as the outputs are switched off when errors are
reported or if the Watch-dog monitoring circuit is set off and the over-full
output thus signals an error.
2.1.1.12. Release setting zero facility
In order to be able to use the automatic setting zero facility in
Fct. " N.STELL " / " Z.SET " ,
this
must
always
be
released
with
Fct.
" N.ST.FGB " / " Z.SET.EN " , and it can only be released if the standstill monitoring
is activated with Fct. " STILLS " / " STND.ST " . The automatic setting zero function is
described in part 1 (user manual), section " Setting zero facility " .
2.1.1.13. Release zero continuation facility
In order to be able to use the automatic zero continuation facility in
Fct. " N.NACHF " / " Z.ALIGN " ,
this
must
always
be
released
with
Fct. " N.NF.FGB " / " Z.ALG.EN " , and it can only be released if the standstill monitoring is activated with Fct. " STILLS " / " STND.ST " . The automatic setting zero
function is described in part 1 (user manual), section " Setting zero facility " .
2 - 14
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.1.14. Measuring transmitter monitoring
The maximum limits of bridge asymmetry are entered with functions " MA.GRW.↓
" / " PU.LIM.↓ " and " MA.GRW.↑ " / " PU.LIM.↑ " . With the aid of these two values, the unit
can calculate whether:
the load cell has been connected the wrong way round, or
the load cell is defective within limits.
The unit will in both cases report the flashing text " ERR.MA " / " ERR.PU " . The
bridge diagonal voltage in a load cell on DMS basis is normally 0V when the load
cell is not bearing any load. The two bridge diagonal points thus both lie on the
same potential, which will for instance be around +5V against 0V on a bridge of
perfectly symmetrical construction supplied with 10V. The lower limit value
" MA.GRW.↓ " / " PU.LIM.↓ " and upper limit value " MA.GRW.↑ " / " PU.LIM.↑ " indicate the
extent to which a point on the bridge diagonal is allowed to deviate from the
ideal value (e.g. + 5 V). The two values are entered with a resolution of 60
parts per volt.
Example:
4,5 V is defined as the lower limit and 5,5 Volt as the upper, i.e.
MA.GRW.↓/PU.LIM.↓ = 4,5
60 = 270 and for
MA.GRW.↑/PU.LIM.↑ = 5,5
60 = 330.
The actual value of the measurement sensor monitor calculated by the DK800 can be
displayed with the aid of the Function " MA.ISTW " / " PU.ACT.V " . This display
likewise works with a resolution of 60 parts per volt.
2.1.1.15. Keyboard locking
The front key-pad on the DK800 can be locked by means of the function
" T.SPERR " / " KB.LOCK " . This does not lock the key combination for re-setting the
unit. The following settings are possible:
NUR S/ONLY S = the keyboard can only be locked via the serial interface,
input E1 is considered for other tasks
E1+S/INP.1+S = the keyboard can be locked either by means of Input E1 or
via the serial interface.
Locking the keyboard (by means of serial command) is always cancelled after the
unit has been reset.
2.1.1.16. Brightness adjustment
The brightness of the display can be adjusted with Fct. " HELL " / " BRIGHT " , by using
" + " and " - " keys to suit the surrounding light conditions.
Line up and service manual
2 - 15
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.1.17. Linearity-correction
All
functions
of
linearity
correction,
from
" L.KORR " / " L.CORR "
to
" JUST.K.x " / " ADJ.C.x " , are deactivated (but not deleted) by entering " OHNE " / " NONE "
in the " L-KORR " / " L-CORR " function. The linearisation-correction points are
likewise deactivated by calibration.
The coordinates of the weigher-characteristic, that have to be corrected, are
entered in the " KORR.P.1 " / " CORR.S.1 " to " KORR.P.5 " / " CORR.S.5 " functions. The
entries are automatically sorted within the functions into ascending order (the
highest value goes into memory no. 5) The range of entries runs from 0 to the
calibration weight (see function " J.-GEW " / " ADJ.WG " ). The distance between the
correction points must be at least 1% of the DMS nominal load.
The next stage is to calibrate the correction points as entered by means of the
" JUST.K.1 " / " ADJ.C.1 "
to
" JUST.K.5 " / " ADJ.C.5 "
functions.
Therefore
" JUST.K.x " / " ADJ.C.x " has to be activated. The display will show the text
" WG.BELA " / " LOAD.WG " (= load weigher) and the weight in the " KORR.P.x " / " CORR.S.x "
function. The weight must be brought onto the weigher / auxiliary mounting now,
and you must wait for the stabilisation of the weigher. Press the " + " and " - "
keys simultaneously. The display shows " WARTEN " / " WAIT " (=wait), and the unit
stores the reading into memory, which it has calculated from a maximum of 64
individual averages. The same procedure has to be repeated for the other
correction points. If any auxiliary mounting is being used, it can be removed now
and the new zero point is stored into memory by means of the " 0-VERS " / " 0-SHFT "
function.
The " K.P.FRGB " / " C.S.ENAB " function serves as a check to see which correction
point has been entered or calibrated. A 5-figure number appears in the display.
The symbols shown have the following meanings:
" = "
= The
correction-point
does
not
exist
(no
entry
in
" KORR.P.x " / " CORR.S.x " )
" _ "
" 1 " ... " 5 "
= A
correction
coordinate
has
been
entered
in
" KORR.P.x " / " CORR.S.x " but not yet calibrated by means of
" JUST.K.x " / " ADJ.C.x "
= Correction coordinate 1...5 has been entered and calibrated
and is therefore operational.
Any individual correction point
" KORR.P.x " / " CORR.S.x " function.
can
be
deleted
by
entering
0
in
the
If any attempt is made to leave the entering function without all the correction
points that have been entered also being calibrated, the error report
" K.P.ERR " / " C.S.ERR " will appear and it will not be possible to leave the data
input mode.
2 - 16
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.2. Functions of analogue output
The analogue output can be used as a weight proportional gross or net output or
dosing speed value. The starting-value can be chosen from a range of 0...10V or
0/4...20mA.
With a weight-proportional output, it is also possible to have an output with a
switchover from one measurement range to the other.
2.1.2.1. Analogue output
The Fct. " AN.AUSG " / " AN.OUTP. " defines, whether and which type of analogue output
is used.
When a data-output of the type " 2-STP.1 " or " PROFI.B " is used, the number of
average cycles of the analogue output is also used for this data-outputs. In this
case the analogue output must be activated also.
The following configuration can be selected:
• 0...10 volt
The output voltage given is 0 V at the zero point. If the load on the
weigher increases, the voltage rises to positive values, and to
negative values, when the load on it is reduced. The limit values lie
between -10 V and +10 V.
• 0...20 mA
The burden can lie anywhere between 0...500Ω. The current given is
0 mA at the zero point. If the load on the weigher increases, the
voltage rises to positive values, and, when the load on it is
reduced, to values & lt; 4mA, after that to negative values. The limit
values lie between -20 mA and +20 mA.
• 4...20 mA
The burden can lie anywhere between 0...500Ω. The current given is
4 mA at the zero point.
If the load on the weigher increases, the
voltage rises to positive values, and to negative values, when the
load on it is reduced. The limit values lie between -12 mA and
+20 mA.
The selection of the required output is made by means of the keyboard on the
front panel in conjunction with a jumper configuration inside the unit which is
set in the factory. The latter can also be carried out by the customer after
opening the unit.(see Fig.3)
Fig.3
Line up and service manual
2 - 17
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.2.2. Number of average cycles for analogue output
The number of cycles on which the average for the analogue value output is based
can be individually set with Fct. " A.MITT.W " / " A.AV.CYC " , independently of the
average value for the digital display. This makes it possible to combine a very
slow-acting display with a rapid transmission of the signal at the same time.
The input value can lie anywhere in the range 4...11.
The cycle-times of the analogue output are described in Tab.5.
Input
value
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Number of
cycles
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
Cycle
time
5 ms
9 ms
17 ms
35 ms
65 ms
130 ms
260 ms
515 ms
Tab.5 Cycle times of the analogue output
2.1.2.3. Analogue output mode
The following settings can be selected with Fct. " AN.MODE " :
BRUTTO/GROSS = The analogue output will always be based on the total
weight on the weigher. Pressing the " Net " key will have
no effect on the analogue output.
NET/B. / NET/G. = The voltage at the analogue output will be proportional
to the display, i.e. if it is tared by means of the " Net "
key, then 0V(0/4mA) will also be transmitted at the
analogue output. If the display shows the gross weight,
the analogue output voltage/current is equivalent to the
display.
NET/0
= The net weight corresponding to the tension is sent to
the analogue output only in net operating mode. If the
gross weight is shown, 0V or 0/4mA will be shown all the
time on the analogue output.
DOSIER/DOSING = The analogue output can be used for revolution- or dosing
speed control.. The characteristic of the analogue output
is displayed in Part 1 (User Manual) ), Fig.2, curve
.
D.RAMPE/D.RAMP = The analogue output can be used for revolution- or dosing
speed-control with ramp-function. The characteristic of
the analogue output is displayed in Part 1 (User Manual),
Fig. 2, , curve ,
¡
2.1.2.4. Adjustment of the analogue output
The analogue output is adjusted with the functions " A.JUST.0 " / " A.ADJ.0 " and
" A.JUST.M " / " A.ADJ.MX " .
The zero point is displaced with Fct. " A.JUST.0 " / " A.ADJ.0 " . Figures are entered
in the range from -999 to +999, corresponding to a zero point displacement of
about ±1,5V (3/4,8mA). If this function occurs (with a figure value of 0), 0V
(0/4mA) will be issued and the low-order decimal digit will flash. Every time
that the figure value changes, the output voltage (output current) will also be
amended and re-issued, i.e. the figure value will keep on changing until the
externally connected display unit shows zero. The flashing digit can be changed
by means of the " F " key. The figures themselves can be changed with the " + " and
" - " keys.
The amplification factor can be entered in the range from 0,5000 to 1,3000 with
Fct. " A.JUST.M " / " A.ADJ.MX " . This makes it possible to calibrate the output within
the range of 5V (10/16mA) up to a (theoretical) maximum of 13V (26mA). If this
function occurs (with a figure value of 1000), 10V (20mA) will be issued and the
low-order decimal digit will flash. Every time that the figure value changes, the
2 - 18
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
output voltage (output current) will also be amended and re-issued, i.e. the
figure value will keep on changing until the externally connected display unit
shows the expected value. The keyboard functions are identical with the abovementioned Fct. " A.JUST.0 " / " A.ADJ.0 " . It may be necessary to repeat the zero point
adjustment if large changes occur in the amplification factor.
2.1.2.5. Range-switching for the analogue output
If the unit has the facility for switching over from one measurement range to the
other, this can be done with the Function " A.A.2.BER " / " A.0.RNG.2 " (analogue
output, 2nd range). For this purpose, any value other than 0 is entered in the
Function " A.A.2.BER " . If this value is greater than 1 it will represent an
amplification factor for the analogue output. This amplification can be cancelled
by putting current into control input E2. The reverse report on the status comes
to output A8. If there is current in E2, A8 is activated.
The amplification factor can also be used for weakening the output signal. If,
for instance, the weigher is assumed to be 100 kg and the value of " 00.25 " is
entered in Function " A.A.2.BER " / " A.0.RNG.2 " , this means that at a weight of 100
kg the voltage put out will be 2.5V. If, on the other hand, the value of " 05.00 "
is entered, a voltage of 10V will be put out as soon as 20 kg is reached.
To de-activate the Function " A.A.2.BER " , enter the value " 00.00 " . Entering
" 01.00 " may appear to lead to the same result but it will block input E2 and
output A8 for other functions.
To ensure the perfect functioning of A8 in sending return messages, the Functions
" DOS.ZT.U " / " DOS.TM.C " (dosing time monitoring) must be de-activated by entering
" 0.0 " , and " D.QUITT " / " P.ACKN. " (printer, print-out acknowledgement) by entering
" OHNE " / " NONE " , as these functions will otherwise also change the status of A8.
2.1.3. Functions for dosing mode
2.1.3.1. Dosing (mode of operation)
The following settings are possible in Fct. " DOSIER " / " DOSING " (Dosing mode):
OHNE/NONE
= No dosing, the functions " SOLL " / " NOM.VAL " , " G/F " / " C/F " ,
" NL " / " AF " ,
" TOL.+ " ,
" TOL.- " ,
" MAX.NL " / " MAX.AF " ,
" DOS.ZT.U " / " DOS.TM.C "
and
" WZ.V.REG " / " DLY.REG "
are
locked.
G/F / C/F
= with dosing.
In the " coarse " mode, only the coarse output A13 is
switched in, and in the " fine " mode only the fine output
A12.
D+G/D+C
= with dosing.
In the " coarse " mode, the dosing output A12 and the
coarse output A13 is switched in, and in the " fine " mode
only the dosing output A12.
1 D/1 D
= with dosing.
The unit works with only one dosing speed (on output
A13). Output A12 then has no function. The parameters for
the G/F / C/F (coarse / fine) option are not evaluated
separately.
If the " 2-STP " or " 2-STP.1 " mode has been selected with Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " ,
the dosing mode " OHNE " / " NONE " must also be selected as otherwise the data output
and the dosing output will not function properly.
Line up and service manual
2 - 19
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.3.2. Tolerance check
The following settings can be selected with Fct. " TOL.PFG " / " TOL.CHK " :
OHNE/NONE
= No tolerance check is carried out.
+/= If the permissible upper tolerance limit is exceeded,
" + TOL! " will appear in the display and output A10 will
be switched in. If the permissible lower limit is passed,
" - TOL! " will appear in the display and the output A10
will be switched in.
NUR +/ONLY + = The mode of operation is only practicable if " MIT " / " WITH "
has been selected with Fct. " NL.KORR " / " AF.CORR " (i.e.
with automatic afterflow correction) at the same time.
If the permissible upper tolerance limit is exceeded,
" + TOL! " will appear in the display and output A10 will
be switched in. If the permissible lower limit is passed,
the afterflow switch-off point will be recalculated and
the dosing started again.
If the " 2-STP " or " 2-STP.1 " mode has been selected with Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " ,
" OHNE " / " NONE " must be selected for the tolerance check as otherwise the data
output and the tolerance output will not function properly.
2.1.3.3. Actual value registration
The following settings can be selected with Fct. " REG.MOD " :
ZEIT/TIME
= The waiting period given in Fct. " WZ.V.REG " / " DLY.REG " is
imposed, after which the tolerance check or the actual
value registration is carried out (if it has been
preselected).
STILLS/STND.ST = The unit has to wait for stabilisation, and carries a
tolerance check or the actual value registration (if preselected) out then.
ZT+STS/TM+STS = The waiting period given in Fct. " WZ.V.REG " / " DLY.REG " is
imposed, and then the unit waits for the weigher to come
to rest. Then carries out a tolerance check or the actual
value registration (if preselected)
2.1.3.4. Afterflow correction
The following settings can be selected with Fct. " NL.KORR " / " AF.CORR " :
OHNE/NONE
= No automatically afterflow correction is carried out.
NUR NL/ONLY.AF = The difference is calculated between the required dosage
value and the actual dosage value, and the afterflow
value corrected accordingly. The maximum permissible
correction range is defined by Fct. " MAX.NL " / " MAX.AF " .
NL+G/F/AF+C/F = Additional to the afterflow, the G/F / C/F-value is
corrected proportionally, too.
If the " 2-STP " or " 2-STP.1 " mode has been selected with Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " ,
" OHNE " / " NONE " must be selected for the afterflow correction as otherwise the data
output and the dosing output will not function properly.
2 - 20
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.3.5. Mode to start dosing and acknowledge tolerance
The following settings can be selected with Fct. " D.START " :
NUR S/ONLY S = Dosing can only be started via the serial interface;
Input E4 has other tasks assigned to it.
E4+ S/INP.4+ S = Dosing can start, as required, either by means of Input
E4 or via the serial interface.
The following settings can be selected with Fct. " T.QUITT " / " T.QUIT " :
NUR S/ONLY S = Tolerance can only be acknowledged via the serial interface; Input E3 has other tasks assigned to it.
E3+ S/INP.3+ S = Tolerance can be acknowledged, as required, either by
means of Input E3 or via the serial interface.
2.1.3.6. Taring prior to dosing
With the Function " TAR.DOS " , either " MIT(B) " / " WITH/G " , " MIT(N) " / " WITH/N " or
" OHNE " / " NONE " can be entered in order to select whether the DK800 is to carry out
a taring cycle prior to the start of dosing or not.
MIT(B) / WITH/G= with taring prior to dosing, after dosing is completed it
is switched to gross mode
MIT(N) / WITH/N= with taring prior to dosing, after dosing is completed,
still net mode is displayed. When weight falls under the
empty output, it is switched to gross mode.
OHNE / NONE
= no taring prior to dosing.
2.1.3.7. Source of nominal value
The
following
settings
are
possible
for
selecting
the
nominal
value
" SOLLW.Q " / " N.V.SRC " for source:
INTERN
= The
nominal
value
can
be
entered
with
Fct. " SOLL " / " NOM.VAL " , or prescribed via the serial
interface.
AN.EING/AN.INP = The nominal value is read in via the auxiliary analogue
input (X2 Pin 9).
The input voltage for a required value of 100% of the
weigher end-value should lie within the range of 3V to a
maximum of 5V.
2.1.3.8. Test stop (during dosing)
In order to be able to visually check the dosed actual value at the end of
dosing, the test stop function can be used.
The test stop function can only be used, if the range switching analogue output
(Fct. " A.A.2.BER " / " A.O.RNG.2 " = " 0,0 " ) is deactivated.
When activating input E2, instead of " FERTIG " / " READY " the text " P.STOP " / " T.-STOP "
is displayed alternately with the dosed net-weight. Output A11 (end of dosing)
will not be activated (yet), too.
If the test stop input is deactivated then, the dosing process continues as
usual.
Line up and service manual
2 - 21
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.3.9. Adjust the analogue input
The two Functions " A.E.JUS.0 " / " A.I.ADJ.O " (analogue input, calibration of zeropoint) and " A.E.JUS.M " / " A.I.ADJ.M " (analogue input, maximum calibration) serve to
adjust the analogue input to the required-value source. Reconciling differences
can be done as follows:
Select the Function " A.E.JUS.0 " / " A.I.ADJ.O " .
Request " SW=0 " / " NV=0 " (required value =0) appears and the " + "
and " - " keys flash. The required-value transmitter is to be set
at 0.
" Net " key
" + " and " - " simultaneously
" WARTEN " / " WAIT " appears in the display. The
measurement value calculated on the basis of averages is then
stored automatically to memory as the zero point.
Select the Function " A.E.JUS.M " / " A.I.ADJ.M " .
" Net " key
Request " SW=MAX " / " SW=MAX " (required value = maximum) appears
and the " + " and " - " keys flash. The required-value transmitter
is to be set at the value that corresponds to the weigher endvalue (100%).
" + " and " - " simultaneously
" WARTEN " / " WAIT " appears in the display. The
measurement value calculated on the basis of averages is then
converted into kg and stored automatically to memory as the
100% point on the weighing scale.
This brings the calibration process to an end. When the analogue input is being
calibrated, the following errors can be displayed:
During the calibration of the zero point:
• " SW & lt; MIN " / " NV & lt; MIN " = the required value for voltage is negative.
During the calibration of the end-value:
• " SW & gt; MAX " / " NV & gt; MAX " = the required value for voltage is greater than 5V.
2.1.3.10. Delayed dosing-end output disable
If dosing was started via input E4, output All can be delayed disabled, if
required. This may be necessary in combination with an external relay control,
for example, if output All erases the signal for input E4.
The time lag is adjusted via the " D.END.VZ " / " DEND.DL " function as follows:
Input:
0,0
= no time lag
0,1 ... 9,8 = A11 will be disabled with a delay of 0.1 ... 9.8
sec.
9,9
= A11 will be disabled upon reaching the delayed empty
message A14 only.
If the function " L/UE-A " =
" OHNE " / " WITHOUT " is set, A11 will be disabled upon
reaching the undelayed internal empty message.
If dosing was started via the serial interface, output All works without delay in
any case.
2 - 22
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.4. Functions of data transfer
2.1.4.1. Parallel interface
Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " , permits the choice to made between:
OHNE/NONE
MUX
2-STP
2-STP.1
ST.AUSG/CTRL-O
This determines whether the outputs are to work a multiplexed BCD outputs, and a
high speed binary output, or as a control output (only possible with a serial
interface).
2.1.4.1.1. BCD interface
If " MUX " is selected, the multiplexed BCD output is activated. A clock period-duration has to be entered (t2=t3=t4=2...99ms) with Fct. " BCD.CLK " then. In order
to start outputting, the input E6 (X3 Pin 25) has to receive current.
The data on the main display is then transmitted as shown in Fig.4 (t1=2...25ms).
E6
start
A0...3
data
A4...6
decade
A7
strobe
10 0
101
102
sign
0
1
2
5
t1
t2
t3
t4
Fig.4
The data for " + " / " - " is transmitted in the 5th decade. The " + " sign is transmitted as 0 and the " - " as 0F(hexadecimal, 15).
If there is a permanent signal in Input E6 (X3 Pin 25), transfer will run continuously. The value shown on the main display is written into a temporary buffer
ahead of the first strobe. The transmission of the BCD value will be made out of
this buffer, then. This prevents transfer errors, e.g. at the transfer from 99 to
100.
If the higher resolution (1/10d) has been activated, the BCD output is only updated during the 1/10d display time, if there has been no shift of the decimal
point in the main display.
If a tare cycle is carried out, the net weight will likewise be shown on the BCD
output. Similarly, the net weight will always be shown on the BCD output during
dosing if the main display is showing the net value.
2.1.4.1.2. Binary interface
If " 2-STP " or " 2-STP.1 " is selected with Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " , high-speed
binary data transfer is activated.
If " 2-STP " is selected, the data will be issued with the intervals taken from the
main display. The data will be brought up to date at the same pace as the
calculation of averages in the main display.
If " 2-STP " is selected, the analogue output absolutely must be activated in the
Function " AN.AUSG " / " AN.OUTP. " . The data will then be issued automatically at
Line up and service manual
2 - 23
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
intervals of 1. The data will now be brought up to date at the same pace as the
calculation of averages at the analogue output (which is quicker).
The dosing functions must be switched off:
Fct. " DOSIER " = " OHNE " / " DOSING " = " NONE " ,
Fct. " TOL.PFG " = " OHNE " / " TOL.CHK " = " NONE " and
Fct. " NL.KORR " = " OHNE " / " AF.CORR " = " NONE " .
The limit switch
Fct. " GRNZW.M " = " OHNE " / " LIM.SP.M " = " NONE " ,
the printer acknowledge signal
Fct. " D.QUITT " = " OHNE " / " D.QUIT " = " NONE " and
the 2nd analogue output range
Fct. " A.A.2.BER " = " 00,00 " / " A.O.RNG.2 " = " 00,00 "
must likewise be de-activated. Otherwise the data output and the dosing output /
limit switch will not work properly.
The transmission is started (see Fig.5) when current flows through input E4 (X3
Pin 23). The data from main display is transferred to an intermediate memory. The
data 20 to 27, the algebraic sign, data-ready bit, parity bit and net-status signal are issued from this memory. If current is then switched to Input E6
(X3 Pin 25) in readiness for the next step, it will not be the data from the main
display but from the temporary buffer (28 to 215, data-ready bit, parity bit and
the " motion " signal)that is issued.
The reaction time of this output is in the range t1=2...8ms (typ. 4ms), i.e. the
data can be read a maximum of 8ms after current has started to flow through
E4/E6. The delay between the signals " data " and " data ready " is t2≈1.5ms.
E4
enable
(low)
E6
enable
(high)
A0...7
A10...13
data
A8
dta. ready
(low)
A9
dta. ready
(high)
t2
t1
t2
t1
Fig.5
The parity bit is formed from the data in the outputs A0 ... A10. The parity bit
is always " high " when the number of data bits is 0, 2, 4, etc., i.e. the number
of all the 1-bits including the parity is always an odd number.
If a taring cycle is run, the net weight will likewise by issued at all the
outputs.
With the " Di " option (= diode decoupling), several units can be wired up in
parallel with their data outputs. If Pin 1 of Terminal X3, for instance, is
connected to a PLC output, the PLC control unit can check a number of units one
after the other.
2.1.4.1.3. Control output
If " ST.AUSG " / " CTRL-O " is selected with Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " , an 8-bit control
output will be formed with the outputs A0...A7 in conjunction with the serial
interface, i.e. the data sent with the !O-Command (see part 3, programmers
manual) will be issued to outputs A0...A7.
2 - 24
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.4.2. Serial interface
The serial interface serves the purpose of connecting the unit to its master
computer and to officially calibrated printers, enabling it to be used together
with a PC to store and read over the configuration data of the DK800. The serial
commands / data formats are described in Part 3 (Programmer's Handbook).
2.1.4.2.1. Type of serial interface
Fct. " COM.TYP " can be used to select between the following settings:
RS232
RS485
RS422
PROFI.B
OHNE/NONE
The selection of the required output is made by means of the keyboard on the
front panel in conjunction with the mounting/demounting of the communication card
and a jumper configuration inside the unit which is set in the factory. The
jumper configuration can be modified by the customer after opening the unit.(see
part 3, programmers manual). The Profibus-DP interface is described in a
seperated manual.
2.1.4.2.2. Serial identification address
Fct. " COM.NR. " / " COM.NO. " defines the identification address of the unit for the
serial communication. For instance entering 01 generates the address " a " .
Entering the address 0 means working without exchange of identification code.
2.1.4.2.3. Parity bit and data frame length
Any of the following settings can be selected with Fct. " COM.MOD " (communication
mode):
8 N 1
⇒ 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity bit
8 M 1
⇒ 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, parity bit = Mark
8 S 1
⇒ 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity bit = Space
8 E 1
⇒ 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, parity bit = even
7 E 1
⇒ 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, parity bit = even
The length of a data frame is basically:
1
start bit
7/8
data bits
0/1
parity bit
1
stop bit
By using the RS485 interface, the transmitter remains in the " space " state after
the stop bit of the last byte of a telegram, for the duration of 1/2 bit before
it changes to high-impedance state.
2.1.4.2.4. Baud-rate
The Baud rate of the serial interface is defined with Fct. " BAUD-R " . It can be
entered as any required value the range 40...9600 Bd. Only the following levels
are practicable above 9600 Bd.: 19200, 38400, 57600 or 76800.
Line up and service manual
2 - 25
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.4.2.5. Actual value transfer mode
The Function " I.U.MODE " / " TR.MODE " (actual-value transfer mode) determines the
point in time at which the actual value is transferred, and is activated by
entering a mode identification number. The following settings are possible:
1 = Request via the serial interface
2 = Request via input E7 (plug X4 Pin 1). The way input E7 functions is
otherwise still dependent on the 8-value of the mode identification
number.
If the 2-value of the mode identification number is set and the 8value not set (e.g. Mode = 2, 3, 7, etc.), the actual value will be
transferred once with a rising flank at input E7.
If the 8-value is set in addition to the 2-value (e.g. mode = 10, 11,
15, etc.) the actual value will be transmitted during the whole of
the activation period of input E7.
4 = Automatic. When the " empty " message has been exceeded and the weigher
has then come to a standstill, the actual value is transmitted once.
8 = Continuous. The transfer is made at the end of each average-value
cycle taking into account the 2-value of the mode identification
number. It is then no longer possible to check the actual value or
the reserve.
16 = By pressing the " + " key.
32 = Automatically (without exchange of identification code). After the
dosage, when " FERTIG " / " READY " is displayed or when output A11 is
activated.
64 = Automatically (without exchange of identification code). After the
appearance of a tolerance message or when output A10 is activated.
It is possible to combine a number of modes. For instance, if the mode identification number 22 (2+4+16) is entered, this will mean that the actual value is
transferred under the following conditions:
1. (2) by activating input E7,
2. (4) automatically when the empty report has been exceeded in the standstill
position, or
3. (16) by activating the " + " key.
If there exists a second serial interface in the DK800, the modes 16, 32 and 64
are not adjustable.
2.1.4.2.6. Actual value format
Function " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " defines the format in which the actual value is
transferred. The following settings are possible:
1 = with plus or minus sign - if none is selected, negative weighings
will be shown as 000000 (zero).
2 = with input/output status - the status of inputs E0 ... E7 and outputs
A0 ... A 15 are transmitted.
4 = with check figure - a check figure is calculated from the data which
is transmitted for control purposes.
8 = special data format for an officially calibrated printer - this
format must not be combined with Formats 1 ... 4 or with 16.
16 = special format (NOVA DP), e.g. for large-sized or remote displays.
This format must not be combined with Formats 1 ... 8.
Any combination of Formats 1 ... 4 with one another is possible. For instance,
entering a 7 would mean that the actual value with plus or minus sign, with
input/output status, and with the check figure.
A more detailed description of the actual-value format can be found in Part 3
(Programmer's Handbook) in the chapter on " Reading actual value " .
If there exists a second serial interface in the DK800, the modes 8 and 16 are
not adjustable.
2 - 26
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.4.3. Printer interface
A strip printer can be connected to the serial interface as a remote printer. A
serial number and the gross-weight or net-weight and optionally the tare-weight
can be printed out.
The following settings are necessary for the operation of a printer connected to
the DK800:
Fct. " DRUCK " / " PRINTR "
= MIT/WITH
Fct. " COM.TYP "
= RS232
Fct. " COM.NR " / " COM.NO. "
= 0
Fct. " COM.MOD "
= 7 E 1
Fct. " BAUD-R "
= 9600 (can possibly be changed if the printer
permits)
Fct. " I.U.MODE " / " TR.MODE " = 2 / 4 / 16 /32 / 64 (or combinations of these
modes)
Fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " = 8
Fct. " I.DIM.Z " / " DIM.SGN " = OHNE / g / Kg / t / lb / l / N / kN (showing
units of measurement)
Fct. " D.SPERR " / " P.INTLK " = OHNE / MIN / ∼ / MIN+ (printer cut-out)
Fct. " D.QUITT " / " P.ACKN. " = OHNE / A8 (print-out acknowledgement)
Fkt. " DR.MODE " / " PR.MODE " =
B/N.1 / B+T+N.3 / B+T+N.1 (printoutimage)
The following printout-images are possible:
¢ ¦ ¢
§£¥£¡¡¡¡
¨
¨
¡ ¨ ¡¦
©
" © !
#¡ ¨ ¡¦
©
¡ §£¥£¡¡¡¡
¢ ¦ ¢
©
¡
¨
¢ ¦ ¢
§£¥£¡¡¡¡
¨
¨
¨
¡ ¡' " ¡ ¡% ¡ §£¥£¡¡¡¡
© ¦
© ! ¦
©
¢ ¦ ¢
¨
© ¢ ¤ ¢
¡ §£¦¡¥£ ¡ ¡¡ ¡
¨
©
¡ ¨ ¡¦¡¤
" © !
¡ ¨ ¡¦¡¤
© ¢ ¤ ¢
¡ §£¦¡¥£ ¡ ¡¡ ¡
¨
© ¢ ¤ ¢
¡ §£¦¡¥£ ¡ ¡¡ ¡
DR.MODE=B+T+N.1 and DK800 in net-mode
©
¡
¨
© ¤ ¢
¡ ¡¦¡¥£ ¡ ¡¡ ¡
DR.MODE=B+T+N.1 and DK800 in gross-mode
¨
¡ ¡¥£¡¡¡¡
© ¦ ¢
¨
© ¢ ¤ ¢
¡ §£¦¡¥£ ¡ ¡¡ ¡
DR.MODE=B+T+N.3 and DK800 in net-mode
¢ ¦ ¢
§£¥£¡¡¡¡
DR.MODE=B+T+N.3 and DK800 in gross-mode
¨
DR.MODE=B/N.1 and DK800 in net-mode
for not officially calibrated units
©
¡
for officially calibrated units
DR.MODE=B/N.1 and DK800 in gross-mode
¨
¨
¨
¡¡ ¡¡' & ¡ ¡¡¤%$¡ §£¦¡¥£ ¡ ¡¡ ¡
© ¦ ¤ " © ! ¦ © ¢ ¤ ¢
Both, in the fct. " DR.MODE " / " PR.MODE " and in the printout-image each " B " (Brutto)
is displayed in the german unit-version. In the english unit-version a " G "
(gross) is displayed instead.
Line up and service manual
2 - 27
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.5. Other functions
2.1.5.1.Overload / Underload
If the value entered with Fct. " UEBERL " / " OVERLD " is exceeded, the weight display
will start flashing and the overload output will be activated. If the value 0 is
entered, there will be no check carried out for overload.
Regardless of the value entered for overload, the display will likewise indicate
overload if +9d (9*display division) is exceeded beyond the end of range.
If the display falls below -4% of the scale end-value for officially calibrated
devices (or the possible display-range for not officially calibrated devices),
the status underload is achieved. The weigher-display is flashing. Dependent on
the input in fct. " ULA.ERR " / " ULD.ERR " the overload-output is activated.
UL=UEL/UL=OL = Underload activates the overload-output.
OHNE/NONE
= Underload does not change the overload-output.
2.1.5.2. Standstill monitoring
The standstill requirements / motion indicator is parameterised with the three
Functions " SS.ZEIT " / " SS.TIME " , " SS.TEIL " / " SS.DIGT " , and " SS.T./M.Z " / " SS.D./A.C " .
Standstill is defined as follows: the weight must not change by more than the
amount entered in " SS.TEIL " / " SS.DIGT " during the period of time entered in
" SS.ZEIT " / " SS.TIME " or by the amount entered in " SS.T./M.Z " / " SS.D./A.C " in one
average cycle by the display. If the change is any greater the LED " ∼ " will show
that the weigher is still in motion.
The whole standstill monitoring system can be cut out by entering 0 in the
Function " SS.ZEIT " / " SS.TIME " . As the zero setting and afterflow equipment
evaluate the standstill conditions, they are automatically de-activated when the
standstill monitoring system is switched off.
The Function " SS.ZEIT " / " SS.TIME " (standstill time) defines the length of time (in
seconds) in which the standstill weight value (SS.TEIL/SS.DIGT) is not allowed to
be exceeded. Otherwise the motion indicator " ∼ " will be shown. The unit will
similarly wait for this length of time until the motion indicator goes out. The
time that can be entered here is in the range from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds.
The Function " SS.TEIL " / " SS.DIGT " defines the maximum change in weight per unit of
time. If the change in weight is greater than the value entered, motion indicator
" ∼ " will be shown. The weight is entered in units of " d " , and the value can lie
in the range from 00.2 to 25.0 d.
The Function " SS.T./M.Z " / " SS.D./A.C " defines the maximum change in weight per
average cycle in the display. If the change in weight is greater than the value
entered, motion indicator " ∼ " will be shown. The weight is entered in units of
" d " , and the value can lie in the range from 00.2 to 25.0 d. The time value is
determined by the average cycle in the display and can be taken from Table 4 in
the section on " Average rates " .
The parameter " SS.T./M.Z " / " SS.D./A.C " is necessary so that large, rapid changes
in weight immediately set off the condition of motion, because the time given in
Function " SS.ZEIT " is mainly the time needed to recognise motion. In this time,
however, a number of display cycles (print-outs) may already have taken place.
Note: With high digital filter values (averages) or greater mechanical damping
of the weigher it will make sense to reduce the weight values for the
standstill range in order to be able to identify the deviations in
readings caused by the formation of averages / damping as still being
motion. If the automatic zero-setting or the zero-offset facility is
switched on, the standstill range should not be set too large in order to
prevent a zero setting or offset reliably when there is motion in the
weigher.
2 - 28
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.5.3. Minimum load
The minimum load is defined as in the german/european industrial standard DIN/EN
45501, namely:
The load below which the weight results could be subject to an excessive relation
deviation. The minimum level is to be set as follows:
Trade weighers
= 20d
Trade weighers
for measuring freight rates = 5d
= 10d
Coarse weighers
The input is made in fct. " MIN. "
2.1.5.4. Zero setting range
The working range of
" N.ST.BER " / " Z.RANGE " .
Important !
the
" 0 "
key
can
be
defined
with
the
Function
or
, the zero
with officially calibrated units in Class
setting range must be entered in compliance with DIN 45501 (the
German Weights-and-Measures Ordinance) as ±2%.
2.1.5.5. Negative display-range
With fct. " NEG.BER " / " NEG.RNG " the negative display-range can be defined.
Caution ! For officially calibrated devices class
or
this function is not
available, as in accordance with DIN 45501 (German Weights-andMeasures Ordinance) the negative display-range is fixed to -4% of the
scale end-value.
For not officially calibrated units, with adjustment " NORMAL " the negative
display-range is fixed to -4% of the scale end-value, too. For the adjustment
" ERWEIT " / " EXTEND " the neg. display-range ranges either to 1% of the chosen
nominal-input-voltage-range ,as in Tab.3 or to the max. displayable negative
value (e.g. -9999, for a 4-figure display).
2.1.5.6. External Taring
If the " MIT " / " WITH " setting is selected with Fct " EXT.TAR " , Input E5 ( X3 Pin 24)
can be used for taring.
If there is current in Input E5, the DK800 will carry out the taring procedure
and indicates the net weight then. The LED in the " Net " key lights up. This conditions remains in force until the current is switched off from Input E5. The
unit will then show the gross weight again.
2.1.5.7. External Zeroing
The Function " EXT.NST " / " EX.Z.SET " allows the type of external zero setting to be
selected. The following settings are possible:
NUR S/ONLY S = the zero can only be set via the serial interface, with
Input E0 earmarked for other tasks
E0 + S/INP.0 + S = the zero can be set either by means of Input E0 or via
the serial interface.
The function of the external zero setting is identical with the function of the
" 0 " key of the DK800 front keyboard (see Part 1 Section on " Measurement
operation " ).
Line up and service manual
2 - 29
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.5.8. Operation mode for " limit switch "
The following settings can be selected with Fct. " GRNZW.M " / " LIM.SP.M " :
OHNE/NONE
= No limit switch, and Output A9 has other tasks assigned
to
it.
Functions
" GRENZW " / " LIM.SWP "
and
" GRNZW.H " / " LIM.SP.H " are not available. The " 2-STP " or
" 2-STP.1 "
mode
can
be
activated
with
Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " .
BRUT.↑/GROS.↑ = Output A9 is allocated as a limit switch. The limit value
entered in Fct. " GRENZW " / " LIM.SWP " (in " gross " and " net "
operation) is compared with the gross weight. The output
is inactive below the limit value, and switched in, above
that level. The hysteresis (Fct. " GRNZW.H " / " LIM.SP.H " )
operates below the limit value. The " 2-STP " or " 2-STP.1 "
mode must not be activated in Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " .
BRUT.↓/GROS.↓ = Output A9 is allocated as a limit switch. The limit value
entered in Fct. " GRENZW " / " LIM.SWP " (in " gross " and " net "
operation) is compared with the gross weight. The output
is inactive above the limit value, and switched in, below
that level. The hysteresis (Fct. " GRNZW.H " / " LIM.SP.H " )
operates above the limit value. The " 2-STP " or " 2-STP.1 "
mode must not be activated in Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " .
= Output A9 is allocated as a limit switch. The limit value
NET.↑
entered in Fct. " GRENZW " / " LIM.SWP " in " net " operation is
compared with the net weight. In " gross " operation,
output A9 is inactive. The output is inactive below the
limit value, and switched in, above that level. The
hysteresis (Fct. " GRNZW.H " / " LIM.SP.H " ) operates below the
limit value. The " 2-STP " or " 2-STP.1 " mode must not be
activated in Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " .
= Output A9 is allocated as a limit switch. The limit value
NET.↓
entered in Fct. " GRENZW " / " LIM.SWP " in " net " operation is
compared with the net weight. In " gross " operation,
output A9 is inactive. The output is inactive above the
limit value, and switched in below that level. The
hysteresis (Fct. " GRNZW.H " / " LIM.SP.H " ) operates above the
limit value. The " 2-STP " or " 2-STP.1 " mode must not be
activated in Fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " .
2.1.5.9. Arithmetic sign for " net " operation
The Fct. " NET.VZ. " / " NET.SGN " can be used to define whether the displayed value is
shown as positive or negative. The following settings are possible:
NORMAL
= The value will be shown as positive, if the weight on the
weigher is increasing after taring (normal weighing
operation).
INVERS/REVERS = The value will be shown as positive, if the weight on the
weigher is reduced after taring. This mode of operation
can be used for so-called deduction weighing, in which
the weight taken out of the weigher has to be shown as
positive.
Alternatively to the inverted net-arithmetic sign, the weigher can be used for
negative weighing (weighing by subtraction).
2.1.5.10. Clear all memory
The " LOESCH " / " DEL.ALL " (= delete) function has to be used in order so set the
DK800 (e.g. after a change of controller) into a defined starting position.
In order to delete, not only switch 1 but also switch 2 on the rear side of the
switch block must be set in the lower position.
2 - 30
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.5.11. Switch on reset
If " MIT " / " WITH " is entered in the Function " E.RESET " / " PWR.RST " , the status of
taring / dosing will be brought back to the basic position (gross and dosing
switched off) after every reset cycle.
However, if " OHNE " / " NONE " is entered, the status of taring / dosing will be
retained after every reset cycle, but if the " F " key is press during the switchon phase after a reset the status of taring / dosing will not be stored to
memory.
Line up and service manual
2 - 31
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
3. Service
3.1. Explanation of individual parameters
The functions " E-TEST " / " I-TEST " , " A-TEST " / " O-TEST " and " A/D-W.T " / " A/D-C.T " were
implemented in order to make it possible to test the unit quickly under operating
conditions. They test the control input and output and the A/D and D/A converter
for proper function.
3.1.1. Check inputs
The
control
inputs
and
load
cell
inputs
can
be
tested
with
fct. " E-TEST " / " I-TEST " . The display shows a 4-figure value. The two right-most
digits indicating the status of 8 external optocoupler inputs, the second-most
left one the status of the internal switch block and the left-most one the status
of the serial CTS input. The arrangement is as follows:
20 * 100
→
Input E0 (X3-10)
21 * 100
→
Input E1 (X3-11)
→
Input E2 (X3-12)
22 * 100
23 * 100
→
Input E3 (X3-22)
→
Input E4 (X3-23)
20 * 101
21 * 101
→
Input E5 (X3-24)
22 * 101
→
Input E6 (X3-25)
23 * 101
→
Input E7 (X4- 1)
20 * 102
→
DIP-Switch 3 (rear side)
21 * 102
→
DIP-Switch 2 (rear side)
22 * 102
→
DIP-Switch 1 (rear side)
20 * 103
→
CTS-Input
The internal measuring transmitter inputs can be tested with the keys " 0 " , " F " ,
" + " and " - " . The keys have the following functions:
0 key
→
Zero
F key
→
DMS
+ key
→
Ref.(Hi)
- key
→
Ref.(Lo)
3.1.2. Check outputs
The control outputs can be checked with fct. " A-TEST " / " O-TEST " . The display then
shows a 2-figure value. Once this function has taken effect, all available
outputs will be switched in. The display value can then be raised by 1 at a time
by means of the " + " key, which switches through all the control outputs in turn.
The " 0 " key returns to " ** " -display. With exiting this function the unit will be
reset. The arrangement is as follows:
**
→
Output A0...A15
00
→
Output A0 (X3-2)
01
→
Output A1 (X3-3)
02
→
Output A2 (X3- 4)
03
→
Output A3 (X3- 5)
04
→
Output A4 (X3- 6)
05
→
Output A5 (X3- 7)
06
→
Output A6 (X3- 8)
07
→
Output A7 (X3- 9)
08
→
Output A8 (X3-14)
09
→
Output A9 (X3-15)
0A
→
Output A10 (X3-16)
0B
→
Output A11 (X3-17)
0C
→
Output A12 (X3-18)
2 - 32
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
Output A13 (X3-19)
Output A14 (X3-20)
Output A15 (X3-21)
Internal control function
Internal control function
Internal control function
Internal control function
Internal control function
Internal control function
Internal control function
Internal control function
D-71394 Kernen
(n.c.)
(/CAL_EN)
(AD_SC1)
(AD_SC2)
(AD_CAL)
(AD_B/U)
(MUX0)
(MUX1)
3.1.3. Check A/D and D/A converter
The A/D and D/A converter can be checked with fct. " A/D-W.T " / " A/D-C.T " The
display shows the input voltage as a percentage of the reading range. If 0 is
displayed, this shows there is no weight on the load cell (0mV = 0%). If 100
displayed, this shows there is max. weight on the load cell (20mV = 100%). If 110
is displayed, this shows that the end of the reading range has been reached for
the A/D converter.
When the function occurs, 0V or 0/4mA is shown on the D/A converter. Each time
the " + " key is pressed, the output voltage (output current) is raised by
1V(2/1,6mA) until 10V (20mA) is reached. As the next step, -10V (-20mA) will be
given. Pressing the " 0 " key will return the output voltage (output current) to
0V(0/4mA).
3.1.4. Revision no. and revision date
The Functions " REV.NR " / " REV.NO. " and " REV.DAT " can be used to determine
software revision implemented in the unit.
the
3.1.5. Transferring configuration data to the PC
If the DK800 is fitted with a serial interface and if an MS-DOS compatible PC is
available, the whole configuration can be transferred to the PC or read back off
it by means of the Function " K.DAT.S " / " C.DTA.WR " .
The PC programme runs under MS-DOS and requires a PC with:
MS-DOS, version 4.0 or higher
386 CPU or higher
serial (COM2) standard interface (RS232 or RS422/485).
A 3½ " Diskette with the write/read programme " DKCONF " and a drawing of the RS323
version of the serial connection cable needed can be supplied free of charge on
request.
After the Function " K.DAT.S " / " C.DTA.WR " has been selected, the " Net " key must be
pressed. " START? " will then appear in the display and the " + " and " - " keys will
flash. It is now possible either to break off by means of the " 0 " key or else to
press the " + " and " - " keys simultaneously. " WARTEN " / " WAIT " will appear in the
display, and the PC programme " DKCONF " will start (in " Read " mode). When the PC
programme has finished running, " K.DAT.S " / " C.DTA.WR " will appear again in the
DK800 display.
Line up and service manual
2 - 33
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
3.1.6. Reading in configuration data from the PC
If the DK800 is fitted with a serial interface and if an MS-DOS compatible PC is
available,
the
whole
configuration
data
written
with
the
Function
" K.DAT.S " / " C.DTA.WR " can be transferred from the PC to the DK800 by means of the
Function " K.DAT.L " / " C.DTA.RD " . This requires Switch 2 on the block of switches at
the back of the unit to be placed in the downwards position in addition to Switch
1.
After the Function " K.DAT.L " / " C.DTA.RD " has been selected, the " Net " key must be
pressed. " START? " will then appear in the display and the " + " and " - " keys will
flash. It is now possible either to break off by means of the " 0 " key or else to
press the " + " and " - " keys simultaneously. " WARTEN " / " WAIT " will appear in the
display, and the PC programme " DKCONF " will start (in " Write " mode). When the PC
programme has finished running, the DK800 will carry out a reset cycle in order
to adapt itself to the new configuration.
4. Data protection
If Switch 4 of the 4-position switch field on the rear of the unit is in the
downward position, the NiCd rechargeable battery located inside the unit is
switched on and the data entered will remain unchanged even if the power is cut
off. They can be held for about 4,000 hours if the battery is fully charged.
When the DK800 leaves the works its battery is about 50 percent fully charged,
but storage and despatch can add up to a considerable length of time. It is
therefore not possible to state the level of charge to be expected when the unit
reaches its final user, so the DK800 should be provided with mains power for 100
to 150 hours as soon as it has been started up in order to ensure that the
battery is recharged to its full capacity.
C a u t i o n !
When the unit is
position in order
deeply discharged.
reduce its storage
I m p o r t a n t !
being stored, Switch 4 must be in the upward
to protect the built-in battery from becoming
Deeply discharging the battery can permanently
capacity or even destroy it.
If S4 is switched off (in the upward position) the data in the
memory will no longer be stored and must be re-entered when the unit
is started up again.
2 - 34
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
5. Error messages
The following error messages are possible:
Fatal errors
ERR. 01
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
→
ROM-test error.
The contents of the internal programme memory are faulty.
02 → RAM-test error.
The internal variable memory is faulty.
03 → The contents of the configuration memory have been altered.
When this error message has been acknowledged, the configuration
memory will be in its basic conditions. The data for function
0...149 must be entered all over again, starting with Fct.50.
04 → An error has occurred during the programming of the unit via the
serial interface and the contents of the configuration memory
have been changed.
The error should be acknowledged. The configuration memory will
then be in its basic position, and Functions 0 ... 149 will have
to be entered again, starting the Function 50.
05 → The internal A/D converter of the 87C196 is not ready.
10..27 → internal interrupt error.
30 → internal data I/O error.
MA/ERR.PU →
The load cell monitor has responded. See Fct. " MA.GRW.↓
" / " PU.LIM.↓ " or " MA.GRW.↑ " / " PU.LIM.↑ "
MA/ERR.LPT →
The data transfer to the printer is out of order, or
the printer is switched off.
Warnings and other errors
JG & lt; MIN/AW & lt; MIN→ The calibration weight (Fct. " J.GEW. " / " ADJ.WGT " ) is too
small.
JG & gt; MAX/AW & gt; MAX→ The calibration weight (Fct. " J.GEW. " / " ADJ.WGT " ) is too
large.
VL & lt; MIN/PL & lt; MIN→ The initial load (tare) is too small. (see section
" calibration " )
VL & gt; MAX/PL & gt; MAX→ The initial load (tare) is too large. (see section
" calibration " )
ML & lt; MIN
→ The max. load = end of range(calibration) is too small. (see
section " calibration " )
ML & gt; MAX
→ The max. load = end of range(calibration) is too small. (see
section " calibration " )
0 & gt; MAX
→ The setting zero is not possible, The actual weight is larger
than ±2% of the range.
SW & lt; MIN/NV & lt; MIN→ The analogue nominal value(calibration of analogue input) is
too small. (see section " adjustment of the analogue input " )
SW & gt; MAX/NV & gt; MAX→ The analogue nominal value(calibration of analogue input) is
too large. (see section " adjustment of analogue input " )
K.P. & gt; J.GW/C.S. & gt; AD.W
→
The entered
linearity
correction
point
is
greater than the calibration weight.
K.P.VORH/C.S.EXST→
The entered linearity correction point is existing.
K.P.RR/C.S.ERR → One or more linearity correction point(s) are not calibrated.
-- & gt; 0!
→ The configuration memory is in its basic position, e.g. as a
result of ERR.03/04 having been acknowledged or the " Erase all "
function having been carried out. The Functions 0...149 will
have to be entered again, starting the Function 50.
S1!
→ If the input function is left with switch 1 still in the lower
position, the display will flash " S1 " , and the overload output
will be activated. Switching Switch 1 to the upward position
will acknowledge this report.
WARTEN/WAIT → After pressing the " F " key (for fct. input) either
" FKT.xxx " / " FCN.xxx " or, in case the function is allocated, the
function text is displayed. But if the text " WARTEN " / " WAIT " is
displayed, a serial communication takes place. When the
Line up and service manual
2 - 35
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
communication is completed " FKT.xxx " / " FCN.xxx " or the function
text is displayed.
These errors are shown in flashing text, and the " + " and " - " keys keep flashing.
the error signal can be acknowledged by pressing the " + " and " - " keys simultaneously.
If any change to the user configuration functions are necessary after the error
has been acknowledged as rectified, the F-key has to be pressed down and held
down during the switching process until it becomes possible to enter the data.
2 - 36
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
6. Dosing cycle
A dosing cycle can be started and controlled either via the serial interface or
via the control-inputs.
The following settings are necessary for the dosing cycle described in this
example:
User-parameters
SOLL/NOM.VAL
G/F / C/F
NL/AF
TOL. +
TOL. MAX.NL/MAX.AF
DOS.ZT.U/DOS.TM.C
WZ.V.REG/DLY.REG
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1200
200
40
20
10
100
80,0
5,0
Configuration-parameters
SS.ZEIT/SS.TIME
=
SS.TEIL/SS.DIGT
=
SS.T./M.Z / SS.D./A.C
=
DOSIER/DOSING
TOL.PFG/TOL.CHK
=
=
REG.MOD
=
NL.KORR/AF.CORR
=
SOLLW.Q/N.V.SRC
=
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
Nominal value 1200kg
coarse / fine-correction 200kg
afterflow correction 40kg
Positive tolerance threshold 20kg
Negative tolerance threshold 10kg
Max. afterflow correction 100kg
Max. dosing time 80 seconds
Waiting
time
for
tolerance
tion / registration 5 seconds
inspec-
⇒ Stand-still monitoring. The time during
which the stand-still weight value must not
be exceeded = 2 seconds.
1,0 ⇒ Stand-still
monitoring.
Maximum
weight
change
(parts
number)
per
unit
of
time = 1d.
1,0 ⇒ Stand-still monitoring. Parts number per
average cycle) = 1d/ average cycle.
G/F / C/F⇒ Operating modus: Coarse / fine correction.
NUR +/ONLY + ⇒
Operating
modus:
if
the
upper
tolerance
tolerance limit is exceeded,
report in display and if relevant activate
an output signal.
If the value falls below the lower tolerance
limit,
recalculate
afterflow
switch-off point and add topping-up dose.
ZT+STS/TM+STS⇒
Operating
modus:
waiting
time
before tolerance check/registration, then
waiting for standstill.
NUR NL/ONLY AF ⇒
Operating modus: with automatical
afterflow-correction
(note:
coarse-fine
will not be corrected)
INTERN
⇒ Operating modus: the nominal value entered
in function " SOLL " is used for dosing.
2,0
The DK800 now calculates the following values with the aid to the above-mentioned
user-parameters:
coarse-fine-point
= nominal value - coarse-fine-value
= 1200kg - 200kg
= 1000kg
afterflow-correction
= nominal value - afterflow correction
= 1200kg - 40kg
= 1160kg
lower tolerance limit
= nominal value - tolerance threshold
= 1200kg - 10kg
= 1190kg
upper tolerance limit
= nominal value + tolerance threshold
= 1200kg + 10kg
= 1210kg
The dosing cycle can now be started with the serial !D -command or via input E4
(take note of the " D.START " configuration function). Input E4 must be supplied
with a continuous signal current (until the " ready " report) because dosing is
broken off immediately
current ceases on the input (see. part 3. chapter
" Breaking off Dosing " , !C-command) and the DK800 reverts to normal monitoring
mode. Throughout the dosing cycle, the key pad on the front of the unit is locked
Line up and service manual
2 - 37
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
out, with the exception of the combination of keys for re-setting the unit (see
part 1. chapter " Monitoring function " . " Selecting a function number " ).
The DK800 will now wait for the length of time entered in " WZ.V.TAR " / " DLY.REG " in
order, for instance, for pressure fluctuations to even out which are caused by
the closing of the weigher. It then carries out a tare measurement, and during
this time the message " D.START " will appear in the display. When the tare
measurement is complete, the net weight (zero) will be displayed and the " Net "
LED will light up. Output A13 (Coarse) is then switched on, i.e. the coarse flow
will be dosed in. When the coarse / fine switchover point (1000 kg) is reached,
the coarse-output is switched off and the fine-output A12 switched on. Once the
afterflow switch-off point (1160 kg) has been reached, A12 is switched off and
the time programmed in " WZ.V.REG " / " DLY.REG " starts to run. Whilst this waiting
time is running, (e.g.) 32 kg are still in the weigher, so a total weight of 1192
kg will finally be reached.
At the end of this settling time, the unit waits for the conditions to be met
that mark the end of the weigher waiting time. Once this has been reached, the
actual weight (1192 kg) is compared with the upper tolerance limit and any excess
reported in the DK800 display and on output A10. The tolerance report / display
can now be acknowledged either with input E3 (note configuration function
" T.QUITT " / " T.QUIT " ), via the serial interface, or with the " + " or the " - " key on
the front keyboard.
The actual weight is then compared with the lower tolerance level. If it is too
low, a new (corrected) afterflow switch-off point is calculated and dosing starts
again. In the present example, the actual weight is within the permissible
tolerance limits.
The difference between actual and required weights is now calculated as 1200 1192 = 8 kg. This difference is halved, and subtracted from the afterflow reserve
(40 kg) held in the memory. At the next dosing cycle it will be switched off
earlier in order to bring the actual value closer to the required value.
If " NL+G/F " / " AF+C/F " is selected in the Function " NL.KORR " / " AF.CORR " , the
coarse/fine reserve will likewise be postponed by 4 kilos
In order to prevent excessively large discrepancies in the dosed quantities,
which could arise (e.g.) if a dosing unit does not switch off at exactly the
right point because (e.g.) of a mechanical defect, the range of the automatic
top-up correction will be automatically restricted. This restriction will be laid
down under the " MAX.NL " / " MAX.AF " function. If, for instance, 100 is laid down,
this means that the content of the memory for the top-up reserve ( " NL " / " AF " -function) cannot exceed 100 kg.
Once the calculation of the topping-up correction has been completed, the actual
weight is stored to memory in the DK800, the display shows " FERTIG " / " END " , and
output A11 (dosing end) is switched on.
If test-stop input E2 is activated (see chapter " Test-stop " ), instead of
" FERTIG " / " END " the text " P.STOP " / " T.-STOP " is displayed alternately with the netweight until the test-stop input is deactivated. Afterwards " FERTIG " / " END " is
displayed, too.
If the actual weight is now called for via the serial interface, the value is
transmitted that is stored in the memory and not the actual weight at that
moment. The data output in the " MUX " operational mode continues to show the net
weight. If the dosing cycle had been started via the serial interface, the !Icommand must now be given in order to delete the " ready " report and the actual
value stored in the memory.
If the dosing cycle had been started with input E4, this must now be switched off
in order to delete the " ready " report and the actual value stored in the memory.
The dosing cycle is now complete.
If any value deviating from zero has been entered in the " DOS.ZT.U " / " DOS.TM.C "
function, the dosing-time monitoring cycle will now be activated. The measurement
of the time for the dosing-time monitoring will be started with the start of
dosing. If the 80 seconds that have been entered are exceeded, output A8 will be
activated. The output cannot be acknowledged, and is automatically set back to
zero, when the actual-value is being registered.
2 - 38
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Appendix
A.1. Connectors and plug arrangement
A.1.1. Power supply (X1)
Terminal X1 is fitted to the DK800 as a cold-unit terminal, and serves the
purpose of bringing in mains voltage. A suitable fuse should be provided on site.
The power consumption of a 230V unit is about 28 VA (if all options are fitted)
A.1.2. Measurement transmitter and analogue inputs (X2)
The X2 connector is fitted in the DK800 as a 15-pole female plug, to which the
following are connected:
• Load cell
• Resistance thermometer
• Measurement potentiometer
• Nominal-value potentiometer
• auxiliary analogue inputs.
A load cell or a resistance thermometer must be connected as shown in Fig.6.
X2
15-pol. Min. female plug on unit
supply (-)
1
9
sense (-)
2
10
load
cell
sense (+)
3
supply
voltage
approx.
10V
11
supply (+)
4
12
5
13
6
Ui (-)
Ui (+)
PE or
open
14
7
I (-)
15
8
I (+)
ϑ
resistancethermometer
(option)
PE or open
if double-shielded cable is used, the inner
shield must be connected with pin 13 or PE
Fig.6
Take care that the shield of the cable in its complete length is
connected to only one single point with PE, in order to prevent
ground loops, which could affect measuring signals (e.g. by
HF parasitic interferences). That is especially important for
load-cells, to which the cable shield is already connected with
the housing of the load-cell.
If the loadcell is fitted with a 4-core connecting cable, one of these two
courses of action must be taken:
a) lay a 6-core extension cable to the measurement socket cabinet and bridge
connections 1-2 and 3-4 in the cabinet, or
b) use a 4-core extension cable and bridge connections 1-2 and 3-4 at
connecting terminal X2.
Alternative (a) is to be preferred whenever possible as it will give more
accurate readings.
Line up and service manual
2 - 39
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
A measurement potentiometer must be connected as shown in Fig.7.
X2
15-pol. Min. female plug on unit
supply (-)
1
9
sense (-)
2
10
sense (+)
3
Measurement
potentiometer
11
supply (+)
4
12
5
13
6
Ui (+)
14
7
15
PE or open
8
PE or open
Fig.7
If the measurement potentiometer is only connected by means of a 3-core cable,
connections 1-2 and 3-4 should be bridged at connecting terminal X2.
A potentiometer for nominal value input must be connected as shown in Fig.8.
X2
15-pol. Min. female plug on unit
supply (+)
1
Ui
9
supply (-)
2
potentiometer
for
R S nominal value
10
3
11
PE or open
PE or open
4
12
5
13
6
14
analog input 1
15
analog Gnd
7
8
PE or open
PE or open
Fig.8
The analogue inputs 0 and 1 are designed as inputs for 0..10 V (Ri & gt; 1MΩ) for the
standard device. An optional resistor may be installed after opening the device,
in order to change the two analogue inputs to 0..20 mA or 4-20 mA, respectively.
2 - 40
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Depending on the programmed functions, the analogue inputs will have various
different functions, or may have no function.
In- Pin
put
Condition
Function
An. X2- 9 F133=AN.EING
-E0
An. X2-10
-E1
analogue required-value input
Table 6: Arrangement of analogue inputs
A.1.3. Digital inputs /outputs (X3)
The X3 connector is fitted in the DK800 as a 15-pole male plug, and serves the
purpose of connecting the digital control inputs and outputs. The pins are
allocated as shown in Fig.9.
X3
DK 800
25-pol. Min. male plug on unit
fuse
+24V ext.
+24V ext.
A 8
1
A 0
+24V int.
J121
2
14
A 9
digital
outputs
A 1
A10
A 2
standard:
Imax=100mA
15
3
16
17
A11
A 3
A12
5
A 4
option Di:
Imax=50mA
22k
6
A13
A 5
0V ext.
18 Option Di
19
7
20
A14
A 6
A15
8
A 7
9
E 3
E 0
11
The internal 24V-DC
supply is not electrically
separated and not protected
from short-circuits.
It mus not bear any load
greater than 100mA!
10
E 4
E 1
digital
inputs
24V/3mA
(1 output of 16)
4
21
22
23
24
E 5
E 2
12
E 6
0V ext.
13
(1 input of 7)
25
0V int.
0V ext.
J120
Fig.9
For the +24V power-supply and the inputs is recommended that:
max. input-voltage
= 30 Vpp
max. residual ripple = 10 Vpp
A.1.3.1. Arrangement of inputs
Line up and service manual
2 - 41
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Depending on the functions that have been programmed, the inputs will have various different functions or none at all.
In- Pin
put
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
Condition
X3-10 F94=E0+S
X3-11 F99=E1+S
X3-12 F136≠0
F136=0
X3-22 F89=E3+S &
F89=E3+S &
F84=OHNE
X3-23 F88=E4+S &
F88=E4+S &
F88=E4+S &
F81=2-STP
X3-24 F83=MIT
X3-25 F81=MUX
F81=2-STP
X4- 1 F104 21=1
Function
F85=+/F85=NUR+
F84=G/F
F84=D+G
F84=1D
Zero setting
Keyboard interlock
Select 2nd analogue outp. range
test stop (at end of dosing)
Tolerance acknowledgement
Tolerance acknowledgement
auto-calibration control
Start dosing cycle (permanent signal)
Start dosing cycle (permanent signal)
Start dosing cycle (permanent signal)
Low data enable & store data
Net (permanent signal) / tare (slope)
BCD transmission enable
High data enable
Request serial actual value
Tab.7 Arrangement of inputs
A.1.3.2. Arrangement of outputs
Depending on the functions that have been programmed, the outputs will have various different functions or none at all.
Out Pin
put
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
2 - 42
Condition
X3- 2 F81=MUX
F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F81=ST.AUSG
X3- 3 F81=MUX
F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F81=ST.AUSG
X3- 4 F81=MUX
F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F81=ST.AUSG
X3- 5 F81=MUX
F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F81=ST.AUSG
X3- 6 F81=MUX
F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F81=ST.AUSG
X3- 7 F81=MUX
F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F81=ST.AUSG
Function
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
BCD DAT0 (data 20)
Binary data 20 (two's complement)
Binary data 28 (two's complement)
serial control output (!O-Command)
BCD DAT1 (Data 21)
Binary data 21 (two's complement)
Binary data 29 (two's complement)
serial control output (!O-Command)
BCD DAT2 (Data 22)
Binary data 22 (two's complement)
Binary data 210 (two's complement)
serial control output (!O-Command)
BCD DAT3 (Data 23)
Binary data 23 (two's complement)
Binary data 211 (two's complement)
serial control output (!O-Command)
BCD DEK0 (Decade 10(20))
Binary data 24 (two's complement)
Binary data 212 (two's complement)
serial control output (!O-Command)
BCD DEK1 (Decade 10(21))
Binary data 25 (two's complement)
Binary data 213 (two's complement)
serial control output (!O-Command)
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
X3- 8 F81=MUX
F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F81=ST.AUSG
X3- 9 F81=MUX
F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F81=ST.AUSG
X3-14 F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F25≠0
F108=A8
F136≠0
X3-15 F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F91=BRUT↑/↓
F91=NET↑/↓
X3-16 F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F85=+/F85=NUR+
X3-17 F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F84=G/F
F84=D+G
F84=1D
X3-18 F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F84=G/F
F84=D+G
X3-19 F81=2-STP &
F81=2-STP &
F84=G/F
F84=D+G
F84=1D
X3-20 F80=MIT
X3-21 F80=+L +UE
F80=+L -UE
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
E4=1
E6=1
D-71394 Kernen
BCD DEK2 (Decade 10(22))
Binary data 26 (two's complement)
Binary data 214 (two's complement)
serial control output (!O-Command)
BCD STRB (Strobe)
Binary data 27 (two's complement)
Binary data 215 (two's complement)
serial control output (!O-Command)
Low data ready
0 (inactive)
Dosing time exceeded
Printer acknowledge signal
2nd analogue outp. range is active
0 (inactive)
High data ready
Gross limit value
Net limit value
- sign (two's complement)
0 (inactive)
Tolerance underflow /overflow
Tolerance overflow
Odd-parity, low-data (A0-A10)
Odd-parity, high-data (A0-A10)
end of dosing cycle
end of dosing cycle
end of dosing cycle
Net (status report)
Motion (status report)
Fine
Dosing (coarse+fine)
Minimum load
¼d-zero signal
Coarse
Coarse
Dosing
Empty report
Overfill report
inverted overfill report
Tab.8 Arrangement of outputs
Line up and service manual
2 - 43
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
A.1.4. Serial interface and analogue output (X4)
The X4 connector is fitted in the DK800 as a 9-pole male plug, and serves the
purpose of connecting the serial interface. The pins are allocated as shown in
Fig.10.
X4
9-pol. Min. male plug on unit
DK800
24V/3mA
digital control inp. E7
Gnd insulated / Gnd not isul.
Tx+ (RS485) / RxD (RS232)
1
6
2
7
Rx- (RS485) / RTS (RS232)
Tx- (RS485) / TxD (RS232)
Rx+ (RS485) / CTS (RS232)
insulated analog output
-10V ... 0V ... +10V
or 0/4 ... 20mA
0V ext.
3
8
(-)
(+)
4
9
5
Fig.10
A.1.5. Block diagram
Fig.11 on the following page shows the block diagram of the DK800.
2 - 44
Line up and service manual
Line up and service manual
X2
X2
X2
X3
X1
~
~
X3
=
Änderung
T ag Name
a Watch-D. 695 Kr.
T ag
Name
SP94-15
DK800
block diagram
X3
X3
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
01.12.93 Krüger
X4
X4
MESOMATIC
D-71394 Kernen
Fig.11
2 - 45
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
A.2. Dimensions
26
18
6,5
10
26
10
26
10
18
The DK800 is designed and produced in a standard 72x144mm housing for controlpanel mounting.
Fig.12 shows the front view, and Fig.13 the cut-out needed for installation. The
rear view appears Fig.14.
28
61
∼
kg
Min
72
1d
10
MESOMATIC
0
DK800
D-71394 Kernen
+
Net F
-
144
Fig.12
7
16,5
137,5
200mm
16,5
7
Istallation depth, with plugs approx. 250mm
66
Istallation depth, without plugs,
140,5
Fig.13
X4
X2
X1
X3
Netz
S 1 2 3 4
Fig.14
2 - 46
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
A.3. Techn. Data
Display
6 digits / LED dot matrix 5x7
height of figures 18 mm green
(or red, on request)
Keyboard
Foil-covered, 5 keys
Sensor feed
10V for max. 6 units of 350Ω-load cells
Sensitivity
31nV/d = 0,031µV/d
1µV/d where official calibration is obligatory
System accuracy
Linearity faults
Zero-point stability
Range stability
& lt; 0,003%
& lt; 0,2µV/10K
& lt; 0,003%/10K
Analogue output
Resolution
Zero-point stability
Range stability
16000 parts, 0...±10V or 0/4...20mA
& lt; 0,01% above the pre-set temperature range
& lt; 0,01% above the pre-set temperature range
conversion rate
4000 /sec.
Number of parts
100...99999d
100...3000d where official calibration is obligatory
int. resolution
& gt; 106
Temp. range
-15...+55°C
-10...+40°C where official calibration is obligatory
Power supply
230V≈ (-15%/+10%)
50/60Hz (±2%)
or 24V= 20W (Option)
Data security
with NiCd rechargeable battery
battery capacity & gt; 4000 hours (approx. 6 month)
Dimensions
high
wide
deep
Weight
1,3kg (230 Volt version with all options)
Safety category
IP54 (higher safety categories available on request)
EMV-continuity
verified under the EU-regulation (DIN 45501)
0,5kV-pulse (Data line) / 1kV-pulse (mains)
high voltage static discharge: 6kV / 8kV
electromagnetic field: 26MHz...1GHz (6V/m)
Approvals
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
Classes
and
.
28VA
72mm
144mm
200mm / without connectors
Automatic balance for weighing (selbsttätige
Waage zum Abwägen, SWA) in accordance with the
national (german) Construction Type Approval
Automatic balance for individual weighing
(selbsttätige Waage für Einzelwägungen, SWE) in
accordance with the national (german)
Construction Type Approval
Line up and service manual
10.16
99.04
10.26
99.08
2 - 47
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
A.4. Configuration table (german)
65
66
67
68
69
Zero adjust of analog output
Range adjust of analog output
Overload alarm
minimum charge
Zero set range
OHNE 0-10V 0-20mA
4-20mA
2n
BRUTTO NET/B. NET/0
DOSIER D.RAMPE
Analog output mode
2n
kg
64 A N.M O D E
no. of aver.cyc.(analog outp.)
NSW SWA SWE
OHNE ZERO Z.+GAIN
UNIPOL BIPOL
Digit
Digit
63 A.M I T T.W
OHNE MIT
Analog output
OHNE MIT
OHNE MIT
kg
kg
s
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
s
s
s
%
%
%
62 A N.A U S G
Actual
setting
Clear zero point memory
Setting zero facility
Zero continuation facility
Empty, threshold
Empty, hysteresis
Empty, delay time
Limit value for limit switch
Limit switch, hysteresis
Nominal value
Coarse / fine
Afterflow
positive tolerance
negative tolerance
Max. afterflow
Wait time before taring
Dosing time monitoring
Wait time before registration
Dosing speed coarse
Dosing speed fine
Ramp / percental share
Item no. (protocol-printer)
Empty lines afer printing
Printing on/off
Software revision no.
Software revision date
Test of input circuits
Test of output circuits
Test of A/D and D/A-converters
Approval no.
Auto calibration mode
A/D-Converter input range
Display division
Number of digits
Decimal point
no. of average cycles
Calibration weight
Calibrate Zero
Calibrate maximum
Zero shift
Factory
setting
N U L.C L R
N.S T E L L
N.N A C H F
L E E R M.
L E E R M.H
L E E R M.V
G R E N Z W
G R N Z W.H
S O L L
G / F
N L
T O L. +
T O L. M A X.N L
W Z.V.T A R
D O S.Z T.U
W Z.V.R E G
D G.G R O B
D G.F E I N
R A M P E
L F D.N R.
L Z.N.D R U
D R U C K
R E V.N R.
R E V.D A T
E - T E S T
A - T E S T
A / D - W.T
Z U L.N R.
A.-C A L.
A / D - E.B
Z I F.S P R
T E I L E Z
K O M M A
M I T T.- W
J.- G E W.
J U S T. 0
J U S T.M X
0 - V E R S
Dimension or
selection
Description
05
06
07
10
11
12
13
14
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
39
40
41
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
58
59
60
61
Displayed
text
Fct.
no.
T.0
T.M
R L
E R
U S
U S
B E
N.
T.B
2 - 48
A.J
A.J
U E
M I
N.S
kg
kg
%
Line up and service manual
80 L / U E - A
Outputs " empty " and " overload "
81 D A T E N.A
Data output
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
BCD-clock-time
Taring from ext. (via input)
Dosing mode
Tolerance-check
Registration mode
Afterflow correction
mode for " dosing start "
mode for " tolerance quit "
Taring before dosing
Dos.end (outp.) delay
Release zero point
Release zero continuation
External zero setting enable
Measuring transm., act. value
Measuring transm., low. limit
Measuring transm., upper lim.
Brightness variation of display
Keyboard lock mode
8N1 8M1 8S1 8E1
7E1
Bd
Linearity correction of weigher
Correction point 1
Correction point 2
Correction point 3
Correction point 4
Correction point 5
Correction point input enable
Adjust correction point 1
Adjust correction point 2
Adjust correction point 3
110
111
112
113
114
115
120
121
122
123
Printer, printout-image
109 D R.M O D E
Printer, output interlock
Printer, outp. acknowl. signal
107 D.S P E R R
108 D.Q U I T T
Printer, dimension character
106 I.D I M.Z.
Baud-rate
Data transmission mode
Data transmission format
103 B A U D - R
104 I.U.M O D E
105 I.F O R M T
Parity bit / data length
NUR S E1+S
OHNE RS232 RS485
RS422 PROFI.B
Device communication address
102 C O M.M O D
101 C O M.N R.
Serial interface
100 C O M.T Y P
H E L L
T.S P E R R
B C D.C L K
E X T.T A R
D O S I E R
T O L.P F G
R E G.M O D
N L.K O R R
D.S T A R T
T.Q U I T T
T A R.D O S
D.E N D.V Z
N.S T.F G B
N.N F.F G B
E X T.N.S T
M A.I S T W
M A.G R W.↓
M A.G R W.↑
mode for " limit switch "
79 G R N Z W.M
s
d
d/Mittw.Zykl.
NORMAL INVERS
OHNE MIT
OHNE MIT
BRUT.↑ BRUT.↓ NET.↑
NET.↓ OHNE
OHNE +L+UE +L-UE
OHNE MUX 2-STP
2-STP.1 ST.AUSG
ms
OHNE MIT
OHNE G/F D+G 1D
OHNE +/- NUR+
ZEIT STILLS ZT+STS
OHNE NUR NL NL+G/F
NUR S E4+S
NUR S E3+S
OHNE MIT(B) MIT(N)
s
OHNE MIT
OHNE MIT
NUR S E0+S
60/V
60/V
60/V
Standstill monit., timebase
Standstill monit., digits
St.st. monit., dig./av.cycl.
sign in " net " operation
negative weigher
power on reset mode
I T
I L
M.Z
Z.
G.
E T
S S.Z E
S S.T E
S S.T./
N E T.V
N E G.W
E.R E S
D-71394 Kernen
70
71
72
76
77
78
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
MESOMATIC
OHNE g kg t lb l
N kN
OHNE MIN ~ MIN+~
OHNE A8
B/N.1 B+T+N.3
B+T+N.1
OHNE MIT
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
O R R
R.P.1
R.P.2
R.P.3
R.P.4
R.P.5
R G B
T.K.1
T.K.2
T.K.3
Line up and service manual
L - K
K O R
K O R
K O R
K O R
K O R
K.P.F
J U S
J U S
J U S
2 - 49
Adjust correction point 4
Adjust correction point 5
Nominal value source
Zero adjust of analog input
Range adjust of analog input
2nd range of analog output
negative display range
Mode on underload condition
Write configuration data
Read configuration data
Int. zero adjust value, low
Int. zero adjust value, high
Int. full-scale adj. val., low
Int. full-scale adj. val., high
Clear all memory
INTERN AN.EING
NORMAL ERWEIT
UL=UEL OHNE
J U S T.K.4
J U S T.K.5
S O L L W.Q
A.E.J U S.0
A.E.J U S.M
A.A.2.B E R
N E G.B E R
U L A.E R R
K.D A T. S
K.D A T. L
I J K W.0.L
I J K W.0.H
I J K W.M.L
I J K W.M.H
L O E S C H
D-71394 Kernen
124
125
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
143
144
145
146
148
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
MESOMATIC
The function 50 is only available in units based on
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
The functions 69 and 137 are not available in units based on
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
Tab.9 Configuration table (german)
2 - 50
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
A.5. Configuration table (engl.)
05
06
07
10
11
12
13
14
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
39
40
41
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
58
59
60
61
N U L.C L R
Z.S E T
Z.A L I G N
E M P T Y
E M P T Y.H
E M P T Y.D
L I M.S W P
L I M.S P.H
N O M.V A L
C / F
A F
T O L. +
T O L. M A X.A F
D L Y.T A R
D O S.T M.C
D L Y.R E G
D S.C O A R
D S.F I N E
R A M P
I T E M.N O
L F.B.P R I
P R I N T R
R E V.N O.
R E V.D A T
I - T E S T
O - T E S T
A / D - C.T
A P P R.N O.
A.C A L.
A / D - I.R
R E S O L U
N O.O.D I G
D E C.P T.
A V.C Y C L
A D J.W G T
A D J. 0
A D J.M A X
0 - S H F T
Dimension or
Selection
Description
Zero adjust of analog output
Range adjust of analog output
Overload alarm
minimum charge
Zero set range
2n
kg
NONE 0-10V 0-20mA
4-20mA
2n
GROSS NET/G. NET/0
DOSING D.RAMP
65
66
67
68
69
Analog output mode
64 A N.M O D E
no. of aver.cyc.(analog outp.)
NSW SWA SWE
NONE ZERO Z.+GAIN
UNIPOL BIPOL
Digit
Digit
63 A.A V.C Y C
NONE WITH
Analog output
NONE WITH
NONE WITH
kg
kg
s
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
s
s
s
%
%
%
62 A N.O U T P
Actual
setting
Clear zero point memory
Setting zero facility
Zero continuation facility
Empty, threshold
Empty, hysteresis
Empty, delay time
Limit value for limit switch
Limit switch, hysteresis
Nominal value
Coarse / fine
Afterflow
positive tolerance
negative tolerance
Max. afterflow
Wait time before taring
Dosing time monitoring
Wait time before registration
Dosing speed coarse
Dosing speed fine
Ramp / percental share
Item no. (protocol-printer)
Empty lines afer printing
Printing on/off
Software revision no.
Software revision date
Test of input circuits
Test of output circuits
Test of A/D and D/A-converters
Approval no.
Auto calibration mode
A/D-Converter input range
Display division
Number of digits
Decimal point
no. of average cycles
Calibration weight
Calibrate Zero
Calibrate maximum
Zero shift
Factory
setting
Displayed
text
Fct.
no.
0
X
D
E
Line up and service manual
D J.
D J.M
E R L
N.
A N G
A.A
A.A
O V
M I
Z.R
kg
kg
%
2 - 51
MESOMATIC
79 L I M.S P.M
mode for " limit switch "
80 E / O L - O
Outputs " empty " and " overload "
81 D A T A - O
Data output
82
83
84
85
BCD-clock-time
Taring from ext. (via input)
Dosing mode
Tolerance-check
Registration mode
s
d
d/Mittw.Zykl.
NORMAL REVERS
NONE WITH
NONE WITH
BRUT.↑ BRUT.↓ NET.↑
NET.↓ NONE
NONE +E+OL +E-OL
NONE MUX 2-STP
2-STP.1 CTRL-O
ms
NONE WITH
NONE C/F D+C 1D
NONE +/- ONLY+
TIME STND.ST TM+STS
Afterflow correction
NONE ONLY.AF AF+C/F
mode for " dosing start "
mode for " tolerance quit "
Taring before dosing
Dos.end (outp.) delay
Release zero point
Release zero continuation
External zero setting enable
Measuring transm., act. value
Measuring transm., low. limit
Measuring transm., upper lim.
Brightness variation of display
Keyboard lock mode
ONLY S INP.4+S
ONLY S INP.3+S
NONE WITH/G WITH/N
s
NONE WITH
NONE WITH
ONLY S INP.0+S
60/V
60/V
60/V
Linearity correction of weigher
Correction point 1
Correction point 2
Correction point 3
Correction point 4
Correction point 5
Correction point input enable
Adjust correction point 1
8N1 8M1 8S1 8E1
7E1
Bd
110
111
112
113
114
115
120
121
Printer, printout-image
109 P R.M O D E
Printer, output interlock
Printer, outp. acknowl. signal
107 P.I N T L K
108 P.A C K N.
Printer, dimension character
106 D I M.S G N
Baud-rate
Data transmission mode
Data transmission format
103 B A U D - R
104 T R.M O D E
105 T R.F O M T
Parity bit / data length
ONLY S INP.1+S
OHNE RS232 RS485
RS422 PROFI.B
Device communication address
102 C O M.M O D
101 C O M.N O.
Serial interface
100 C O M.T Y P
D.S T A R T
T.Q U I T
T A R.D O S
D.E N D.D L
Z.S E T.E N
Z.A L G.E N
E X.Z.S E T
P U.A C T.V
P U.L I M.↓
P U.L I M.↑
B R I G H T
K B.L O C K
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
87 A F.C O R R
86 R E G.M O D
K
R
G
K
L
A
N
H
D.C
T.T
S I
L.C
C
X
O
O
B
E
D
T
M E
G T
A.C
G N
G.
S T
S.T I
S.D I
S.D./
E T.S
E G.W
W R.R
S
S
S
N
N
P
Standstill monit., timebase
Standstill monit., digits
St.st. monit., dig./av.cycl.
sign in " net " operation
negative weigher
power on reset mode
D-71394 Kernen
70
71
72
76
77
78
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
NONE g kg t lb l
N kN
NONE MIN ~ MIN+~
NONE OUTP.8
G/N.1 G+T+N.3
G+T+N.1
NONE WITH
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
2 - 52
L.- C O R R
C O R R.S.1
C O R R.S.2
C O R R.S.3
C O R R.S.4
C O R R.S.5
C.S.E N A B
A D J.C.S.1
Line up and service manual
Adjust correction point 2
Adjust correction point 3
Adjust correction point 4
Adjust correction point 5
Nominal value source
Zero adjust of analog input
Range adjust of analog input
2nd range of analog output
negative display range
Mode on underload condition
Write configuration data
Read configuration data
Int. zero adjust value, low
Int. zero adjust value, high
Int. full-scale adj. val., low
Int. full-scale adj. val., high
Clear all memory
INTERN AN.INP
NORMAL EXTEND
UL=OL NONE
A D J.C.S.2
A D J.C.S.3
A D J.C.S.4
A D J.C.S.5
N.V.S R C
A.I.A D J.0
A.I.A D J.M
A.O.R N G.2
N E G.R N G
U L D.E R R
C.D T A.W R
C.D T A.R D
I A P V.0.L
I A P V.0.H
I A P V.M.L
I A P V.M.H
D E L.A L L
D-71394 Kernen
122
123
124
125
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
143
144
145
146
148
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
MESOMATIC
The function 50 is only available in units based on
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
The functions 69 and 137 are not available in units based on
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
Tab.10 Configuration table (engl.)
Line up and service manual
2 - 53
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
A.6. Table of settings (Hardware)
Analog module
Closed
jumpers
Description
J28:
J28:
J28:
J28:
J28:
J28:
J28:
J28:
J28:
J26:
J26:
Input range:
10
V
Input range:
1
V
Input range:
100
mV
Input range:
50
mV
Input range:
33,3 mV
Input range:
20
mV
Input range:
16,6 mV
Input range:
14,3 mV
Input range:
12,5 mV
Resistance thermometer supply:
1 mA
Resistance thermometer supply: 100 µA
none
7-8
5-6
1-2
1-2 & 5-6
3-4
3-4 & 5-6
1-2 & 3-4
1-2 & 3-4 & 5-6
1-2
2-3
Factory
setting
actual
setting
Factory
setting
actual
setting
Factory
setting
actual
setting
Interface module
Closed
jumpers
Description
J200: 1-2
J201: 1-3 & 2-4
J200: 2-3
J201: 3-5 & 4-6
J234: 1-2 J235: 1-2
J236: 1-2 J237: 1-2
J238: 1-2 J239: 1-2
J240: 1-2
J234: 2-3 J235: 2-3
J236: 2-3 J237: 2-3
J238: 2-3 J239: 2-3
J240: 2-3
J230: 1-2
J231: 1-2
J232: 1-2 J233: 1-2
Analog output:
0 ... 10 V
Analog output:
0/4 ... 20 mA
Closed
jumpers
Description
Serial interface:
RS 422/485
Serial interface:
RS 232
RS 422/485 transm.:
RS 422/485 receiver:
RS 422/485 receiver:
resistance
resistance
Pull-up resistance
Main board
J52: 1-2
J52: 2-3
J53: none
J53: 1-2
J54: none
J54: 1-2
J120: none
J120: 1-2
J121: none
J121: 1-2
J151: 1-2
J151: 2-3
DK85 is interface module
no interface module or
DK82 is interface module
Watch-Dog monitoring:
none
Watch-Dog monitoring:
with
Data protection battery: off (only for test)
Data protection battery: on
X3-13 with external supply (Gnd)
X3-13 ↔ internal Gnd
X3-1 with external supply (+24V)
X3-1 ↔ internal +24V (max. 100mA)
Tab.11 Table of settings (Hardware)
2 - 54
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Index
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Fig.10
Fig.11
Fig.12
Fig.13
Fig.14
Tab. 1
Tab. 2
Tab. 3
Tab. 4
Tab. 5
Tab. 7
Tab. 8
Tab. 9
Tab.10
Tab.11
Switch block ..................................... 1
Input voltage range (Jumper) ..................... 8
Analogue output (Jumper) ......................... 17
Data output (timing) ............................. 23
2-Step data output (timing) ...................... 24
Connector X2 ..................................... 39
Connector X2 ..................................... 40
Connector X2 ..................................... 40
Connector X3 ..................................... 41
Connector X4 ..................................... 44
Block diagram .................................... 45
Front view ....................................... 46
Cut-out .......................................... 46
Rear view ........................................ 46
Summary of functions(Fct.01-49) .................. 3
Summary of functions(Fct.50-149) ................. 6
Input ranges ..................................... 8
Cycle-times of the display ....................... 11
Cycle times of the analogue output ............... 18
Arrangement of inputs ............................ 42
Arrangement of outputs ........................... 43
Configuration table (german) ..................... 50
Configuration table (engl.) ...................... 53
Table of settings (Hardware) ..................... 54
acknowledgement of error messages ........................ 36
Actual value format, serial .............................. 26
Actual value, registration ............................... 20
Actual value, stored ..................................... 37
Actual-value transfer mode ............................... 26
Adjust the analogue input ................................ 22
Adjustment of the analogue output ........................ 18
Afterflow correction ..................................... 20 37
afterflow correction ..................................... 38
Analogue output .......................................... 17 23
Analogue output (X4) ..................................... 44
Analogue output mode ..................................... 18
Analogue output, calculation of averages ................. 24
Analogue output, range-switching ......................... 19
Approval number display upon activation .................. 9
Arithmetical sign for " net " operation .................... 30
Arrangement of analogue inputs ........................... 41
Auto-Calibration ......................................... 8 9
Auto-Zero ................................................ 9
Automatic Zeroing ........................................ 14
Auxiliary analogue input connection ...................... 39
auxiliary device, calibration ............................ 11 16
Average cycle (display) .................................. 28
Average cycles (display) ................................. 11
Average-value cycle ...................................... 26
battery, charge .......................................... 34
battery, protection from deep discharge .................. 34
Baud rate ................................................ 25
BCD interface ............................................ 23
BCD output ............................................... 23
Binary interface ......................................... 23
bipolar operation mode ................................... 10
Block diagram ............................................ 44
block of switches ........................................ 34
Brightness adjustment .................................... 15
cable shield ............................................. 39
calculation of averages .................................. 23
calculation of averages (analogue output) ................ 24
Calibration .............................................. 11
Calibration data read off ................................ 13
Calibration Negative Weigher ............................. 13
Line up and service manual
16
14
2 - 55
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
Calibration weight ....................................... 11
Calibration, functional test prior to C. ............... 9
charge battery ........................................... 34
Check A/D converter ...................................... 33
Check D/A converter ...................................... 33
Check inputs ............................................. 32
Check outputs ............................................ 32
Clear all memory ......................................... 30
coarse dosing ............................................ 38
Coarse weighers .......................................... 29
coarse/fine reserve ...................................... 38
Coarse/fine Switching Point .............................. 37
communication mode ....................................... 25
configuration ............................................ 13
configuration data ....................................... 34
Configuration table (engl.) .............................. 51
Configuration table (german) ............................. 48
Connectors and plug arrangement .......................... 39
Control output ........................................... 24
Current output ........................................... 17
Cycle-times of the analogue output ....................... 18
Cycle-times of the display ............................... 11
Data entry ............................................... 1
data frame length ........................................ 25
Data Outp., Average Cycl. ................................ 17
Data Output .............................................. 17
Data Output (BCD) ........................................ 23
Data Output (binary) ..................................... 23
Data overrun ............................................. 13
Data protection .......................................... 34
Decimal point ............................................ 10
Delayed dosing-end output disable ........................ 22
Digital inputs (X3) ...................................... 41
Digital outputs (X3) ..................................... 41
Dimensions ............................................... 46
Display division ......................................... 10
display range ............................................ 28
Dosing ................................................... 21
Dosing (mode of operation) ............................... 19
Dosing Coarse ............................................ 37
Dosing cycle ............................................. 37
Dosing Fine .............................................. 37
Dosing Speed Control Output .............................. 18
Dosing time monitoring ................................... 19
33
35
19
2 - 56
20
23
30
37
31
37
Empty output ............................................. 14
empty-message ............................................ 26
Entering Data ............................................ 7
Error .................................................... 2
Error Message ............................................ 2 16
Error message during calibration ......................... 12
EU - Approval ............................................ 10
Explanation of individual parameters ..................... 8 32
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
D-71394 Kernen
35
.................................................... 9 22
" _E/OL-O " ........................................... 14
" 0-SHFT " ............................................ 11
" A.-CAL. " ........................................... 9
" A.0.RNG.2 " ......................................... 19 21
" A.ADJ.0 " ........................................... 18
" A.ADJ.MX " .......................................... 18
" A.AV.CYC " .......................................... 18
" A.I.ADJ.0 " ......................................... 22
" A.I.ADJ.M " ......................................... 22
" A/D-C.T " ........................................... 9 33
" A/D-I.R " ........................................... 10
" ADJ.0 " ............................................. 11
" ADJ.C.1 " ........................................... 16
" ADJ.C.2 " ........................................... 16
" ADJ.C.3 " ........................................... 16
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
" ADJ.C.4 " ........................................... 16
" ADJ.C.5 " ........................................... 16
" ADJ.MX " ............................................ 11
" ADJ.WGT. " .......................................... 11 13
" AF " ................................................ 20
" AF.CORR " ........................................... 20
" AN.AUSG " ........................................... 17
" AN.MODE " ........................................... 18
" AN.OUTP " ........................................... 17
" AV.CYCL " ........................................... 11
" BAUD-R " ............................................ 25
" BCD.CLK " ........................................... 23
" BRIGHT " ............................................ 15
" C.DTA.RD " .......................................... 34
" C.DTA.WR " .......................................... 33
" C.S.ENAB " .......................................... 16
" COM.MOD " ........................................... 25
" COM.NO. " ........................................... 25
" COM.TYP " ........................................... 25
" CORR.P.2 " .......................................... 16
" CORR.P.3 " .......................................... 16
" CORR.P.4 " .......................................... 16
" CORR.P.5 " .......................................... 16
" CORR.S.1 " .......................................... 16
" D.QUITT " ........................................... 27
" D.SPERR " ........................................... 27
" D.START " ........................................... 21
" DATA-O " ............................................ 23
" DEC.PT. " ........................................... 10
" DEL.ALL " ........................................... 30
" DOS.TM.C " .......................................... 19
" DOSING " ............................................ 9 19
" DS.COAR " ........................................... 18
" DS.FINE " ........................................... 18
" EX.Z.SET " .......................................... 29
" EXT.TAR " ........................................... 29
" I.DIM.Z " ........................................... 27
" IAPV.0.H " .......................................... 13
" IAPV.0.L " .......................................... 13
" IAPV.M.H " .......................................... 13
" IAPV.M.L " .......................................... 13
" KB.LOCK " ........................................... 15
" L-CORR " ............................................ 16
" LIM.SP.M " .......................................... 30
" MA.ISTW " ........................................... 15
" MAX.AF " ............................................ 20
" N.V.SRC " ........................................... 21
" NEG.RNG " ........................................... 29
" NEG.WG. " ........................................... 13
" NET.SGN " ........................................... 30
" NO.O.DIG " .......................................... 10
" O-TEST " ............................................ 32
" OVERLD " ............................................ 28
" P.ACKN. " ........................................... 19
" PR.MODE " ........................................... 27
" PU.ACT.V " .......................................... 15
" PU.LIM. " ........................................... 15
" PWR.RST " ........................................... 31
" REG.MOD " ........................................... 20
" RESOLU " ............................................ 10
" REV.DAT " ........................................... 33
" REV.NO. " ........................................... 33
" SS.D./A.C " ......................................... 28
" SS.DIGT " ........................................... 28
" SS.TIME " ........................................... 28
" T.QUIT " ............................................ 21
" TAR.DOS " ........................................... 21
" TOL.CHK " ........................................... 20
" TR.FORMT " .......................................... 26
" TR.MODE " ........................................... 26
" ULD.ERR " ........................................... 28
Line up and service manual
2 - 57
MESOMATIC
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
fine
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
2 - 58
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
" Z.ALG.EN " .......................................... 14
" Z.ALIGN " ........................................... 14
" Z.RANGE " ........................................... 29
" Z.SET " ............................................. 14
" Z.SET.EN " .......................................... 14
dosing .............................................. 38
.................................................... 9 22
" 0-VERS " ............................................ 11
" A-TEST " ............................................ 32
" A.-CAL. " ........................................... 9
" A.A.2.BER " ......................................... 19 21
" A.E.JUS.0 " ......................................... 22
" A.E.JUS.M " ......................................... 22
" A.JUST.0 " .......................................... 18
" A.JUST.M " .......................................... 18
" A.MITT.W " .......................................... 18
" A/D-E.B " ........................................... 10
" A/D-W.T " ........................................... 9 33
" AN.MODE " ........................................... 18
" BAUD-R " ............................................ 25
" BCD.CLK " ........................................... 23
" COM.MOD " ........................................... 25
" COM.NR. " ........................................... 25
" COM.TYP " ........................................... 25
" D.QUITT " ........................................... 19
" D.START " ........................................... 21
" DATEN.A " ........................................... 23
" DG.FEIN " ........................................... 18
" DG.GROB " ........................................... 18
" DOS.ZT.U " .......................................... 19
" DOSIER " ............................................ 9 19
" DR.MODE " ........................................... 27
" E.RESET " ........................................... 31
" EXT.NST " ........................................... 29
" EXT.TAR " ........................................... 29
" GRNZW.M " ........................................... 30
" HELL " .............................................. 15
" I.FORMT " ........................................... 26
" I.U.MODE " .......................................... 26
" IJKW.0.H " .......................................... 13
" IJKW.0.L " .......................................... 13
" IJKW.M.H " .......................................... 13
" IJKW.M.L " .......................................... 13
" J.-GEW. " ........................................... 11 13
" JUST.0 " ............................................ 11
" JUST.K.1 " .......................................... 16
" JUST.K.2 " .......................................... 16
" JUST.K.3 " .......................................... 16
" JUST.K.4 " .......................................... 16
" JUST.K.5 " .......................................... 16
" JUST.MX " ........................................... 11
" K.DAT.L " ........................................... 34
" K.DAT.S " ........................................... 33
" K.P.FRGB " .......................................... 16
" KOMMA " ............................................. 10
" KORR.P.1 " .......................................... 16
" KORR.P.2 " .......................................... 16
" KORR.P.3 " .......................................... 16
" KORR.P.4 " .......................................... 16
" KORR.P.5 " .......................................... 16
" L-KORR " ............................................ 16
" L/UE-A " ............................................ 14
" LOESCH " ............................................ 30
" MA.GRW. " ........................................... 15
" MAX.NL " ............................................ 20
" MITT.-W " ........................................... 11
" N.NACHF " ........................................... 14
" N.NF.FGB " .......................................... 14
" N.ST.BER " .......................................... 29
" N.ST.FGB " .......................................... 14
" N.STELL " ........................................... 14
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Fkt. " NEG.BER " ........................................... 29
Fkt. " NEG.WG. " ........................................... 13
Fkt. " NET.VZ. " ........................................... 30
Fkt. " NL " ................................................ 20
Fkt. " NL.KORR " ........................................... 20
Fkt. " REG.MOD " ........................................... 20
Fkt. " REV.DAT " ........................................... 33
Fkt. " REV.NR. " ........................................... 33
Fkt. " SOLLW.Q " ........................................... 21
Fkt. " SS.T./M.Z " ......................................... 28
Fkt. " SS.TEIL " ........................................... 28
Fkt. " SS.ZEIT " ........................................... 28
Fkt. " T.QUITT " ........................................... 21
Fkt. " T.SPERR " ........................................... 15
Fkt. " TAR.DOS " ........................................... 21
Fkt. " TEILEZ " ............................................ 10
Fkt. " TOL.PFG " ........................................... 20
Fkt. " UEBERL " ............................................ 28
Fkt. " ULA.ERR " ........................................... 28
Fkt. " ZIF.SPR " ........................................... 10
Function Input, leaving .................................. 1
Function leaving ......................................... 16
Functional test prior to calibration ..................... 9
Functions, not allocated Fct. .......................... 7
ground loop .............................................. 39
Hysteresis ............................................... 30
identification address ................................... 25
indicating range ......................................... 10
Initial load ............................................. 12
Input .................................................... 15
Input filter ............................................. 11
Input voltage ............................................ 33
input voltage range ...................................... 8
interface, Profibus-DP ................................... 17
interface, serial ........................................ 25
interference ............................................. 39
intervals ................................................ 24
19
26
29
37
41
25
Keyboard locking ......................................... 15
Keyboard, + key, Data input .............................. 7
Keyboard, + key, data transfer ........................... 26
Keyboard, + Key, Fct. seek ............................... 2
Keyboard, - key, Data input .............................. 7
Keyboard, - Key, Fct. seek ............................... 2
Keyboard, 0 key, Calibration ............................. 12
Keyboard, 0 key, Data input .............................. 7
Keyboard, 0 Key, Fct. seek ............................... 2
Keyboard, 0 key, Negative Weigher ........................ 14
Keyboard, F key, Data input .............................. 7
Keyboard, F Key, Fct. seek ............................... 2
Keyboard, Net key, Data input ............................ 7
Keyboard, Net Key, Fct. seek ............................. 2
Keyboard, o key, zero setting ............................ 29
Leave a Function ......................................... 16
Limit frequency .......................................... 11
Line up .................................................. 8
Linearity-correction ..................................... 12
Linearization Negative Weigher ........................... 13
Load cell connection ..................................... 39
load-cell ................................................ 39
16
malfunction-warning ...................................... 14
Measurement transmitter and analogue inputs (X2) ......... 39
Measuring Amplifier ...................................... 8
Measuring transmitter monitoring ......................... 15
Minimum load ............................................. 29
Mode to acknowledge tolerance ............................ 21
Line up and service manual
2 - 59
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Mode to start dosing ..................................... 21
motion ................................................... 28
negative display-range ................................... 29
Negative weigher ......................................... 13
Net ...................................................... 23
NiCd rechargeable battery ................................ 34
Number of average cycles for analogue output ............. 18
Number of digits ......................................... 10
24
Operation mode for " limit switch " ........................ 30
Option " Di " .............................................. 24
Output ................................................... 1 14
Output current ........................................... 33
Output voltage ........................................... 33
Overload ................................................. 28
Overload-output .......................................... 1 14
overload-output .......................................... 28
Parallel interface ....................................... 23
parity bit ............................................... 24
Payload .................................................. 12
Plug arrangement ......................................... 39
Plug X1 .................................................. 39
Polarity of the input voltage ............................ 10
Power supply (X1) ........................................ 39
print-out acknowledgement ................................ 19
printer cut-out .......................................... 27
Printer interface ........................................ 27
printer, actual value format ............................. 26
printer, actual value, units of measurement .............. 27
Printer, printout-image .................................. 27
printout-image ........................................... 27
PTB ...................................................... 9
2 - 60
32
37
42
25
27
Range-switching for the analogue output .................. 19
Read-out / input of internal adjust values ............... 13
Reading in configuration data from the PC) ............... 34
redosing ................................................. 38
Release setting zero facility ............................ 14
Release zero continuation facility ....................... 14
remote printer ........................................... 27
Reset .................................................... 2 9
Reset, switch on-r. .................................... 31
Resistance thermometer connection ........................ 39
Resolution ............................................... 10
Restart Dosing ........................................... 37
Revision date ............................................ 33
Revision no. ............................................. 33
RS485 interface .......................................... 25
Searching for a function number .......................... 2
Selection of the input voltage range ..................... 8
Sensors .................................................. 10
Serial connection cable .................................. 33
Serial identification address ............................ 25
Serial interface ......................................... 13
Serial interface (X4) .................................... 44
Serial interface, actual value format .................... 26
Serial interface, actual value transfer mode ............. 26
Serial Interface, Baud-rate .............................. 25
Serial interface, printer connection ..................... 27
Service .................................................. 32
Settling Time ............................................ 37
Source of nominal value .................................. 21
standstill ............................................... 26
Standstill monitoring .................................... 28
starting up .............................................. 34
storing of the DK800 ..................................... 34
strip printer ............................................ 27
Summary of functions (01...149) .......................... 3
19
10
25
15
33
31
34
34
38
28
Line up and service manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Summary of functions (01...49) ........................... 3
Switch battery ........................................... 13
Switch Block ............................................. 30
switch field ............................................. 34
Switch on reset .......................................... 31
Switching on ............................................. 36
Table of settings (Hardware) ............................. 54
Tare ..................................................... 12
tare measurement ......................................... 38
Taring ................................................... 29
Taring cycle ............................................. 21
Taring prior to dosing ................................... 21
Techn. Data .............................................. 47
Test stop (during dosing) ................................ 21
test-stop at end of dosing ............................... 38
Tolerance check .......................................... 20
tolerance report ......................................... 38
Trade weighers ........................................... 29
Transferring configuration data to the PC) ............... 33
Type of serial interface ................................. 25
31
37
37
Underload ................................................ 28
unipolar operation mode .................................. 10
units of measurement ..................................... 27
Voltage output ........................................... 17
zero afterflow equipment ................................. 28
Zero Carry-Over .......................................... 14
zero setting equipment ................................... 28
Zero setting range ....................................... 29
Zero shift ............................................... 11
Zero-shift Negative Weigher .............................. 14
Zeroing .................................................. 29
Line up and service manual
2 - 61
DK800
SETUP LIST
Vers. 02.01 Rev. 14 Date 01.03.01
Ser.-Nr.: _______________________________ Inp. Range:
___________________________
Type:
______________________________________________________________________
Remarks:
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Fct.
no. Displayed
text Description Dimension or
Selection Factory
setting Actual
setting
05 N U L.C L R Clear zero point memory
06 Z.S E T Setting zero facility NONE ? WITH
07 Z.A L I G N Zero continuation facility NONE ? WITH
10 E M P T Y Empty, threshold kg
11 E M P T Y.H Empty, hysteresis kg
12 E M P T Y.D Empty, delay time s
13 L I M.S W P Limit value for limit switch kg
14 L I M.S P.H Limit switch, hysteresis kg
17 N O M.V A L Nominal value kg
18 C / F Coarse / fine kg
19 A F Afterflow kg
20 T O L. + positive tolerance kg
21 T O L. - negative tolerance kg
22 M A X.A F Max. afterflow kg
23 D L Y.T A R Wait time before taring s
25 D O S.T M.C Dosing time monitoring s
26 D L Y.R E G Wait time before registration s
30 D A T E Display date
31 T I M E Display Time & clock start/stop
32 S. D A Y Set clock: enter day
33 S. M O N. Set clock: enter month
34 S. Y E A R Set clock: enter year
35 S. H R. Set clock: enter hours
36 S. M I N. Set clock: enter minutes
37 S. S E C. Set clock: enter seconds
39 I T E M.N O Item no. (protocol-printer)
40 L F.B.P R I Empty lines after printing
41 P R I N T R Printing on/off NONE ? WITH
44 R E V.N O. Software revision no.
14
45 R E V.D A T Software revision date
01.03.01
46 M - T E S T memory test
47 I - T E S T Test of input circuits
48 O - T E S T Test of output circuits
49 A / D - C.T Test of A/D and D/A-converters
Fct.
no. Displayed
text Description Dimension or
Selection Factory
setting Actual
? REVERS
77 N E G.W G. negative weigher NONE ? WITH
78 P W R.R S T power on reset mode NONE ? WITH
79 L I M.S P.M mode for " limit switch " BRUT.? ? BRUT.? ? NET.? ? NET.?
? NONE
80 E / O L - O Outputs " empty " and " overload " NONE ? +E+OL ? +E-OL
81 D A T A - O Data output NONE ? MUX ? 2-STP ? 2-STP.1 ? CTRL-O
82 B C D.C L K BCD-clock-time ms
83 E X T.T A R Taring from ext. (via input) NONE ? WITH
84 D O S I N G Dosing mode NONE ? C/F ? D+C ? 1D
85 T O L.C H K Tolerance-check NONE ? +/- ? ONLY+
86 R E G.M O D Registration mode TIME ? STND.ST ? TM+STS
87 A F.C O R R Afterflow correction NONE ? ONLY.AF ? AF+C/F
88 D.S T A R T mode for " dosing start " ONLY S ú INP.4+S
89 T.Q U I T mode for " tolerance quit " ONLY S ú INP.3+S
90 T A R.D O S Taring before dosing NONE ? WITH/G ? WITH/N
91 D.E N D.D L Dos.end (outp.) delay s
92 Z.S E T.E N Release zero point NONE ? WITH
93 Z.A L G.E N Release zero continuation NONE ? WITH
94 E X.Z.S E T External zero setting enable ONLY S ? INP.0+S
95 P U.A C T.V Measuring transm., act. value 60/V
96 P U.L I M. SYMBOL 175 \f " Symbol " Measuring transm., low. limit 60/V
97 P U.L I M. SYMBOL 173 \f " Symbol " Measuring transm., upper lim. 60/V
98 B R I G H T Brightness variation of display
99 K B.L O C K Keyboard lock mode ONLY S ? INP.1+S
Fct.
no. Displayed
text Description Dimension or
Selection Factory
setting Actual
setting
100 C O M.T Y P Serial interface NONE ? RS232 ? RS485 ? RS422 ? PROFI.B
101 C O M.N O. Device communication address
102 C O M.M O D Parity bit / data length 8N1 ? 8M1 ? 8S1 ? 8E1 ? 7E1
103 B A U D - R Baud-rate Bd
104 T R.M O D E Data transmission mode
105 T R.F O M T Data transmission format
110 L.- C O R R Linearity correction of weigher NONE ? WITH
111 C O R R.S.1 Correction point 1 kg
112 C O R R.S.2 Correction point 2 kg
113 C O R R.S.3 Correction point 3 kg
114 C O R R.S.4 Correction point 4 kg
115 C O R R.S.5 Correction point 5 kg
120 C.S.E N A B Correction point input enable
121 A D J.C.S.1 Adjust correction point 1
122 A D J.C.S.2 Adjust correction point 2
123 A D J.C.S.3 Adjust correction point 3
124 A D J.C.S.4 Adjust correction point 4
125 A D J.C.S.5 Adjust correction point 5
133 N.V.S R C Nominal value source INTERN ? AN.INP
134 A.I.A D J.0 Zero adjust of analog input
135 A.I.A D J.M Range adjust of analog input
137 N E G.R N G negative display range NORMAL ? EXTEND
138 U L D.E R R Mode on underload condition UL=OL ? NONE
139 C.D T A.W R Write configuration data
140 C.D T A.R D Read configuration data
143 I A P V.0.L Int. zero adjust value, low
144 I A P V.0.H Int. zero adjust value, high
145 I A P V.M.L Int. full-scale adj. val., low
146 I A P V.M.H Int. full-scale adj. val., high
148 D E L.A L L Clear all memory
150 C O M 2 Type of printer-interface NONE ? RS232
151 C O M 2.B D Baud-Rate f. printer-interface Bd
152 C O M 2.W L Word length f. printer-interface 8 BIT ? 7 BIT
153 C O M 2.P Y Parity f. printer-interface NO PAR ? ODD ? EVEN ? MARK
? SPACE
154 C O M 2.M D Print-Mode
156 D I M.S G N Printer, actual value, dimension NONE ? g ? kg ? t ? lb
? l ? N ? kN
157 P.I N T L K Printer, cut-out NONE ? MIN ? ~ ? MIN+~
158 P.A C K N. Printer, print-out acknowledgement NONE ? OUTP.8
159 P R.M O D E Printer, printout-image G/N.2 ? G+T+N.4 ? G+T+N.1
The function 50 is only available in units based on
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
The functions 69 and 137 are not available in units based on
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
Closed
jumpers Description Factory
setting actual
setting
Analog-Modul DK 84
J28: none Input range: 10 V
J28: 7-8 Input range: 1 V
J28: 5-6 Input range: 100 mV
J28: 1-2 Input range: 50 mV
J28: 1-2 & 5-6 Input range: 33,3 mV
J28: 3-4 Input range: 20 mV
J28: 3-4 & 5-6 Input range: 16,6 mV
J28: 1-2 & 3-4 Input range: 14,3 mV
J28: 1-2 & 3-4 & 5-6 Input range: 12,5 mV
J26: 1-2 Resistance thermometer supply: 1 mA
J26: 2-3 Resistance thermometer supply: 100 µA
interface-module DK 85
- 1. serial interface exists ? yes ? no
J234: 1-2 J235: 1-2
J236: 1-2 J237: 1-2
J238: 1-2 J239: 1-2
J240: 1-2 1. serial interface: RS 422/485
J234: 2-3 J235: 2-3
J236: 2-3 J237: 2-3
J238: 2-3 J239: 2-3
J240: 2-3 1. serial interface: RS 232
J230: 1-2 1. RS 422/485 transm.: termination-resistor
J231: 1-2 1. RS 422/485 receiver: termination-resistor
J232: 1-2 J233: 1-2 1. RS 422/485 receiver: pull-up-resitor
- 2. ser. interface (RS 232) exists ? yes ? no
- Ram exists ? yes ? no
- Clock exists ? yes ? no
J250: 1-2 Ram-/Clock-supply: Uc
J250: 2-3 Ram-/Clock-supply: Ub
J251: 1-2 J252: 1-2 Ram-supply: Uv
J251: 2-3 J252: 2-3 Ram-Versorgung: Vcc
memory-module ? DK 851
? E2PROM ? EPROM
? RAM
J350: 1-2 J351: 1-2 memory-supply: Uv
J350: 2-3 J351: 2-3 memory-supply: Vcc
Main-Board DK 81
J52: 1-2 J151: 1-2 DK85 is interface module X
J52: 2-3 J151: 2-3 no interface module or
DK82 is interface module
J53: none Watch-Dog monitoring: none
J53: 1-2 Watch-Dog monitoring: with
J54: none Data protection battery: off (only for test)
J54: 1-2 Data protection battery: on
J120: none X3-13 with external supply (Gnd)
J120: 1-2 X3-13 SYMBOL 171 \f " Symbol " internal Gnd
J121: none X3-1 with external supply (+24V)
J121: 1-2 X3-1 SYMBOL 171 \f " Symbol " internal +24V (max. 100mA)
MESOMATIC Automation und Messtechnik GmbH D-71394 Kernen
SETUP LIST DK800 - Pg. PAGE 4 of NUMPAGES 4 -
Instruction manual
DK 800
Version
01.01
Part 1 : User manual
Part 2 : Line up and service manual
Part 3 : Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
Siemensstr. 36
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
Tel. (0)7151 / 94902-0
Fax (0)7151 / 43946
Copyright © 1994 - 2001
by
Mesomatic GmbH
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
Table of contents
Preface ....................................................... 1-1
1. Switching on ............................................... 1-1
2. Measuring mode ............................................. 1-2
3. Data entry .................................................
3.1. Searching for a function number ........................
3.2. Summary of functions (01...49) .........................
3.3. Entering Data ..........................................
3.4. Explanation of individual parameters ...................
3.4.1. Clear zero point memory ............................
3.4.2. Setting zero facility ..............................
3.4.3. Zero continuation facility .........................
3.4.4. Empty signal (hysteresis and delay time) ...........
3.4.5. Limit switch .......................................
3.4.6. Dosing parameter ...................................
3.4.7. Auxiliary functions for testing unit ...............
3.4.8. Printer ............................................
3.5. Data protection ........................................
3.6. Control outputs and Watch-dog ..........................
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
4. Error messages ............................................. 1-10
5. Dosing cycle ............................................... 1-12
6. Techn. Data ................................................ 1-14
7. Options and Type Descriptions .............................. 1-15
Index ......................................................... 1-16
Preface ....................................................... 2-1
1. Data entry .................................................
1.1. Searching for a function number. .......................
1.2. Summary of functions(01...149) .........................
1.3. Entering Data ..........................................
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-7
2. Line up ....................................................
2.1. Explanation of individual parameters ...................
2.1.1. Basic adjustment and calibration ...................
2.1.1.1. Selection of the input voltage range...........
2.1.1.2. Functional test prior to calibration...........
2.1.1.3. Approval number display upon activation........
2.1.1.4. Auto-Zero and Auto-Calibration.................
2.1.1.5. Polarity of the input voltage..................
2.1.1.6. Display division, no. of digits, decimal pt....
2.1.1.7. Average cycles.................................
2.1.1.8. Calibration weight and calibration.............
2.1.1.9. Read-out / input of internal adjust values.....
2.1.1.10. Negative weigher..............................
2.1.1.11. Empty / Overload output.......................
2.1.1.12. Release setting zero facility.................
2.1.1.13. Release zero continuation facility............
2.1.1.14. Measuring transmitter monitoring..............
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
- I -
2.1.1.15. Keyboard locking..............................
2.1.1.16. Brightness adjustment.........................
2.1.1.17. Linearity-correction..........................
2.1.2. Functions of analogue output .......................
2.1.2.1. Analogue output................................
2.1.2.2. Number of average cycles for analogue output...
2.1.2.3. Analogue output mode...........................
2.1.2.4. Adjustment of the analogue output..............
2.1.2.5. Range-switching for the analogue output........
2.1.3. Functions for dosing mode ..........................
2.1.3.1. Dosing (mode of operation).....................
2.1.3.2. Tolerance check................................
2.1.3.3. Actual value registration......................
2.1.3.4. Afterflow correction...........................
2.1.3.5. Mode to start dosing and acknowledge tol. .....
2.1.3.6. Taring prior to dosing.........................
2.1.3.7. Source of nominal value........................
2.1.3.8. Test stop (during dosing)......................
2.1.3.9. Adjust the analogue input......................
2.1.3.10. Delayed dosing-end output disable.............
2.1.4. Functions of data transfer .........................
2.1.4.1. Parallel interface.............................
2.1.4.1.1. BCD interface .............................
2.1.4.1.2. Binary interface ..........................
2.1.4.1.3. Control output ............................
2.1.4.2. Serial interface...............................
2.1.4.2.1. Type of serial interface ..................
2.1.4.2.2. Serial identification address .............
2.1.4.2.3. Parity bit and data frame length ..........
2.1.4.2.4. Baud-rate .................................
2.1.4.2.5. Actual value transfer mode ................
2.1.4.2.6. Actual value format .......................
2.1.4.3. Printer interface..............................
2.1.5. Other functions ....................................
2.1.5.1. Overload / Underload...........................
2.1.5.2. Standstill monitoring..........................
2.1.5.3. Minimum load...................................
2.1.5.4. Zero setting range.............................
2.1.5.5. Negative display range.........................
2.1.5.6. External Taring................................
2.1.5.7. External Zeroing...............................
2.1.5.8. Operation mode for " limit switch " ..............
2.1.5.9. Arithmetic sign for " net " operation............
2.1.5.10. Clear all memory..............................
2.1.5.11. Switch on reset...............................
2-15
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-22
2-22
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-30
2-30
2-31
3. Service ....................................................
3.1. Explanation of individual parameters ...................
3.1.1. Check inputs .......................................
3.1.2. Check outputs ......................................
3.1.3. Check A/D and D/A converter ........................
3.1.4. Revision no. and revision date .....................
3.1.5. Transferring configuration data to the PC ..........
3.1.6. Reading in configuration data from the PC ..........
2-32
2-32
2-32
2-32
2-33
2-33
2-33
2-34
4. Data protection ............................................ 2-34
5. Error messages ............................................. 2-35
6. Dosing cycle ............................................... 2-37
Appendix ...................................................... 2-39
A.1. Connectors and plug arrangement ........................ 2-39
A.1.1. Power supply (X1) .................................. 2-39
- II -
A.1.2. Measurement transmitter and analogue inputs (X2) ...
A.1.3. Digital inputs /outputs (X3) .......................
A.1.3.1. Arrangement of inputs..........................
A.1.3.2. Arrangement of outputs.........................
A.1.4. Serial interface and analogue output (X4) ..........
A.1.5. Block diagram ......................................
A.2. Dimensions .............................................
A.3. Techn. Data ............................................
A.4. Configuration table (german) ...........................
A.5. Configuration table (engl.) ............................
A.6. Table of settings (Hardware) ...........................
2-39
2-41
2-41
2-42
2-44
2-44
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-51
2-54
Index ......................................................... 2-55
Preface ....................................................... 3-1
1. Data entry ................................................. 3-1
2. The serial interface ....................................... 3-2
2.1. Selection and configuration of interface ............... 3-2
2.1.1. The RS232 interface ................................ 3-2
2.1.2. The RS485 interface ................................ 3-4
2.1.3. The RS422 interface ................................ 3-6
2.2. Serial communication ................................... 3-7
2.2.1. Commands ........................................... 3-7
2.2.1.1. Setting zero................................... 3-7
2.2.1.2. Net (Taring)................................... 3-8
2.2.1.3. Gross.......................................... 3-8
2.2.1.4. Temporarily increasing resolution.............. 3-8
2.2.1.5. Start of a dosing cycle........................ 3-8
2.2.1.6. Interrupting dosing cycle...................... 3-8
2.2.1.7. Tolerance acknowledgement...................... 3-9
2.2.1.8. Clear dosage actual-value memory............... 3-9
2.2.1.9. Premature end of dosing........................ 3-9
2.2.1.10. Clear displayed text.......................... 3-9
2.2.1.11. Reset......................................... 3-10
2.2.2. Calculation of the check-sum ....................... 3-10
2.2.3. Reading data ....................................... 3-11
2.2.3.1. Actual value and unit status................... 3-11
2.2.3.2. Reading coded actual gross/net value and device status312
2.2.3.3. Actual-gross value and unit status............. 3-12
2.2.3.4. Actual value (quick check)..................... 3-13
2.2.3.5. C/F value...................................... 3-13
2.2.3.6. AF value....................................... 3-14
2.2.3.7. Reading the nominal value...................... 3-14
2.2.3.8. Reading the printout serial number............. 3-14
2.2.3.9. Reading some data together..................... 3-14
2.2.3.10. Reading balance parameters.................... 3-15
2.2.3.11. Transmission of actual value in NOVA DP format 3-16
2.2.4. Writing data ....................................... 3-17
2.2.4.1. Nominal dosage value........................... 3-17
2.2.4.2. C/F value (coarse/fine)........................ 3-17
2.2.4.3. AF value (afterflow)........................... 3-18
2.2.4.4. Nominal-dosing value, C/F value and AF value... 3-18
2.2.4.5. Tolerance threshold............................ 3-18
2.2.4.6. Max. AF value.................................. 3-19
2.2.4.7. + Tolerance, - tolerance and max. AF value..... 3-19
2.2.4.8. Max. dosing time (dosing time monitoring)...... 3-20
2.2.4.9. Waiting time prior to taring................... 3-20
2.2.4.10. Max. dos. tme, wait. tme p. t. tar. & p. t. reg.. 3-20
2.2.4.11. Dosing speed, coarse.......................... 3-21
2.2.4.12. Dosing speed, fine............................ 3-21
2.2.4.13. Dos. speed, coarse a. fine a. perc. share of ramp 3-21
2.2.4.14. Threshold level for limit switch.............. 3-22
- III -
2.2.4.15. Issue to control output....................... 3-22
2.2.4.16. Display text.................................. 3-23
2.2.4.17. Control functions (Keyboard lock / Auto-calibr.). 3-23
2.2.4.18. Unit test..................................... 3-24
2.2.5. Writing / reading unit configuration ............... 3-25
2.2.5.1. Writing the unit configuration................. 3-25
2.2.5.2. Reading unit configuration..................... 3-26
2.2.6. Summary of serial functions ........................ 3-27
3. Communications procedures for the dosage sequence .......... 3-29
Index ......................................................... 3-31
- IV -
Index
Fig. 1 Keyboard ......................................... 1-1
Fig. 1 RS232 interface .................................. 3-2
Fig. 1 Switch block ..................................... 2-1
Fig. 2 Input voltage range (Jumper) ..................... 2-8
Fig. 2 Ramp function .................................... 1-7
Fig. 2a RS232 cable ..................................... 3-3
Fig. 2b printer cable ................................... 3-3
Fig. 3 Analogue output (Jumper) ......................... 2-17
Fig. 3 RS485 interface .................................. 3-4
Fig. 4 Data output (timing) ............................. 2-23
Fig. 4a RS485 interface termination ..................... 3-4
Fig. 4b RS485 interface termination ..................... 3-5
Fig. 5 2-Step data output (timing) ...................... 2-24
Fig. 5a Dosage sequence, communications procedures ...... 3-29
Fig. 5b Dosage sequence, communications procedures ...... 3-30
Fig. 6 Connector X2 ..................................... 2-39
Fig. 7 Connector X2 ..................................... 2-40
Fig. 8 Connector X2 ..................................... 2-40
Fig. 9 Connector X3 ..................................... 2-41
Fig.10 Connector X4 ..................................... 2-44
Fig.11 Block diagram .................................... 2-45
Fig.12 Front view ....................................... 2-46
Fig.13 Cut-out .......................................... 2-46
Fig.14 Rear view ........................................ 2-46
Tab. 1 Character table .................................. 3-23
Tab. 1 Summary of functions (fct.01-49) ................. 1-4
Tab. 1 Summary of functions(Fct.01-49) .................. 2-3
Tab. 2 Summary of functions(Fct.50-149) ................. 2-6
Tab. 2 Summary of serial functions ...................... 3-28
Tab. 3 Input ranges ..................................... 2-8
Tab. 4 Cycle-times of the display ....................... 2-11
Tab. 5 Cycle times of the analogue output ............... 2-18
Tab. 7 Arrangement of inputs ............................ 2-42
Tab. 8 Arrangement of outputs ........................... 2-43
Tab. 9 Configuration table (german) ..................... 2-50
Tab.10 Configuration table (engl.) ...................... 2-53
Tab.11 Table of settings (Hardware) ..................... 2-54
acknowledgement of error messages ........................ 1-11 2-36
Actual dosage weight ..................................... 3-9
Actual value and unit status, reading .................... 3-11
Actual value format, serial .............................. 2-26
Actual value, (quick check) .............................. 3-13
Actual value, registration ............................... 2-20
Actual value, stored ..................................... 1-12 2-37
Actual-gross value and unit status ....................... 3-12
Actual-value transfer mode ............................... 2-26
Adjust the analogue input ................................ 2-22
Adjustment of the analogue output ........................ 2-18
AF value ................................................. 3-18
AF value (afterflow), writing ............................ 3-18
AF value, reading ........................................ 3-14
Afterflow correction ..................................... 1-12 2-20 2-37
afterflow correction ..................................... 1-6 1-13 2-38
analogue auxiliary input ................................. 1-6
Analogue output .......................................... 2-17 2-23 3-13
Analogue output (X4) ..................................... 2-44
Analogue output mode ..................................... 2-18
Analogue output, calculation of averages ................. 2-24 3-13
Analogue output, range-switching ......................... 2-19
analogue output, switching range ......................... 1-6
Approval number display upon activation .................. 2-9
Arithmetical sign ........................................ 3-11 3-13
Arithmetical sign for " net " operation .................... 2-30
Arrangement of analogue inputs ........................... 2-41
Auto-Calibration ......................................... 2-8 2-9
Auto-calibration ......................................... 3-23
Auto-Zero ................................................ 2-9
Automatic Zeroing ........................................ 2-14
Auxiliary analogue input connection ...................... 2-39
- 1 -
3-21
auxiliary device, calibration ............................ 2-11
Auxiliary functions for testing unit ..................... 1-8
Average cycle (display) .................................. 2-28
Average cycles (display) ................................. 2-11
average rate (analogue output) ........................... 3-13
Average-value cycle ...................................... 2-26
2-16
Battery for data protection .............................. 1-9
battery, charge .......................................... 1-9 2-34
battery, protection from deep discharge .................. 1-9 2-34
Baud rate ................................................ 2-25
BCD interface ............................................ 2-23
BCD output ............................................... 2-23
Binary interface ......................................... 2-23
bipolar operation mode ................................... 2-10
Block diagram ............................................ 2-44
block of switches ........................................ 2-34
Brightness adjustment .................................... 2-15
C/F value ................................................ 3-18
C/F value (coarse/fine), writing ......................... 3-17
C/F value, reading ....................................... 3-13
cable shield ............................................. 2-39
calculation of averages .................................. 2-23
calculation of averages (analogue output) ................ 2-24 3-13
Calculation of the check-sum ............................. 3-10
Calibration .............................................. 2-11 2-16
Calibration data read off ................................ 2-13
Calibration Negative Weigher ............................. 2-13 2-14
Calibration weight ....................................... 2-11
Calibration, functional test prior to C. ............... 2-9
Character NUL ............................................ 3-7
charge battery ........................................... 1-9 2-34
Check A/D converter ...................................... 1-8 2-33
Check D/A converter ...................................... 1-8 2-33
Check inputs ............................................. 2-32
Check outputs ............................................ 2-32
Check-sum ................................................ 3-10
Clear all memory ......................................... 2-30
Clear displayed text ..................................... 3-9
Clear dosage actual-value memory ......................... 3-9
Clear zero point memory .................................. 1-5
coarse dosing ............................................ 1-13 2-38
Coarse weighers .......................................... 2-29
coarse/fine reserve ...................................... 1-13 2-38
Coarse/fine Switching Point .............................. 1-12 2-37
Command !0 ............................................... 3-7
Command !A + (data) ...................................... 3-24
Command !B ............................................... 3-8
Command !C ............................................... 3-8
Command !D ............................................... 3-8
Command !E + (data) ...................................... 3-21
Command !F + (data) ...................................... 3-21
Command !G + (data) ...................................... 3-17
Command !H ............................................... 3-8
Command !I ............................................... 3-9
Command !J ............................................... 3-9
Command !K + (data) ...................................... 3-23
Command !L ............................................... 3-9
Command !M + (data) ...................................... 3-19
Command !N ............................................... 3-8
Command !O + (data) ...................................... 3-22
Command !Q ............................................... 3-9
Command !R ............................................... 3-10
Command !S + (data) ...................................... 3-17
Command !T + (data) ...................................... 3-18
Command !U + (data) ...................................... 3-23 3-24
Command !V + (data) ...................................... 3-18
Command !W + (data,...) ................................ 3-22
Command !X + (data) ...................................... 3-26
Command !Y + (data) ...................................... 3-20
Command !Z + (data) ...................................... 3-20
Command *A ............................................... 3-28
Command *B ............................................... 3-12
- 2 -
Command *C ............................................... 3-12
Command *G ............................................... 3-13
Command *H ............................................... 3-13
Command *I ............................................... 3-11
Command *K ............................................... 3-28
Command *L ............................................... 3-14
Command *N ............................................... 3-14
Command *P ............................................... 3-15
Command *S ............................................... 3-14
Command *V ............................................... 3-14
Command *X ............................................... 3-25
Command & gt; S + (data,...) ................................ 3-18
Command & gt; T + (data,...) ................................ 3-19
Command & gt; V + (data,...) ................................ 3-21
Command & gt; Z + (data,...) ................................ 3-20
Command ? ................................................ 3-11
Commands ................................................. 3-7
Communication faults ..................................... 3-10
communication mode ....................................... 2-25
Communications procedures for the dosage sequence ........ 3-29
configuration ............................................ 2-13
configuration data ....................................... 1-10
Configuration table (engl.) .............................. 2-51
Configuration table (german) ............................. 2-48
Connectors and plug arrangement .......................... 2-39
Control functions (Keyboard lock / Auto-calibr.) ......... 3-23
Control output ........................................... 2-24
Control outputs and Watch-dog ............................ 1-9
correction of nominal value .............................. 3-17
Current output ........................................... 2-17
Cycle-times of the analogue output ....................... 2-18
Cycle-times of the display ............................... 2-11
Data
data
Data
Data
entry ............................................... 1-3
frame length ........................................ 2-25
Outp., Average Cycl. ................................ 2-17
Output .............................................. 1-12
2-23
Data Output (BCD) ........................................ 2-23
Data Output (binary) ..................................... 2-23
Data overrun ............................................. 2-13
Data protection .......................................... 1-9
decimal places ........................................... 3-13
Decimal point ............................................ 2-10
Delayed dosing-end output disable ........................ 2-22
Digital inputs (X3) ...................................... 2-41
Digital outputs (X3) ..................................... 2-41
Dimensions ............................................... 2-46
Display division ......................................... 2-10
display range ............................................ 2-28
Display text ............................................. 3-23
Dosage sequence, Communications procedures ............... 3-29
Dosing ................................................... 2-21
Dosing (mode of operation) ............................... 2-19
Dosing Coarse ............................................ 1-7
Dosing cycle ............................................. 1-12
Dosing Fine .............................................. 1-7
Dosing parameter ......................................... 1-6
Dosing Speed Control Output .............................. 2-18
Dosing speed, coarse ..................................... 3-21
Dosing speed, fine ....................................... 3-21
Dosing speed, percental share of ramp .................... 3-21
Dosing time monitoring ................................... 1-6
3-20
2-33
2-34
2-1
3-25
3-1
2-17
2-30
2-19
2-37
2-20
3-22
2-34
2-31
1-12 2-37
2-37 3-8
1-12 2-37
3-9
1-12
2-37
Empty output ............................................. 2-14
Empty signal (hysteresis and delay time) ................. 1-6
empty-message ............................................ 2-26
Entering Data ............................................ 1-5 2-7
Error .................................................... 1-3 1-10
Error Message ............................................ 1-3 1-10
2-35 3-1
Error message during calibration ......................... 2-12
EU - Approval ............................................ 2-10
- 3 -
2-35
2-19
2-2
2-2
3-1
2-16
Explanation of individual parameters ..................... 1-5
2-8
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
2-22
.................................................... 2-9
" _E/OL-O " ........................................... 2-14
" 0-SHFT " ............................................ 2-11
" A.-CAL. " ........................................... 2-9
" A.0.RNG.2 " ......................................... 2-19
" A.ADJ.0 " ........................................... 2-18
" A.ADJ.MX " .......................................... 2-18
" A.AV.CYC " .......................................... 2-18
" A.I.ADJ.0 " ......................................... 2-22
" A.I.ADJ.M " ......................................... 2-22
" A.O.RNG.2 " ......................................... 1-6
" A/D-C.T " ........................................... 1-8
" A/D-I.R " ........................................... 2-10
" ADJ.0 " ............................................. 2-11
" ADJ.C.1 " ........................................... 2-16
" ADJ.C.2 " ........................................... 2-16
" ADJ.C.3 " ........................................... 2-16
" ADJ.C.4 " ........................................... 2-16
" ADJ.C.5 " ........................................... 2-16
" ADJ.MX " ............................................ 2-11
" ADJ.WGT. " .......................................... 2-11
" AF " ................................................ 1-6
" AF.CORR " ........................................... 2-20
" AN.AUSG " ........................................... 2-17
" AN.MODE " ........................................... 2-18
" AN.OUTP " ........................................... 2-17
" AV.CYCL " ........................................... 2-11
" BAUD-R " ............................................ 2-25
" BCD.CLK " ........................................... 2-23
" BRIGHT " ............................................ 2-15
" C.DTA.RD " .......................................... 2-34
" C.DTA.WR " .......................................... 2-33
" C.S.ENAB " .......................................... 2-16
" C/F " ............................................... 1-6
" COM.MOD " ........................................... 2-25
" COM.NO. " ........................................... 2-25
" COM.TYP " ........................................... 2-25
" CORR.P.2 " .......................................... 2-16
" CORR.P.3 " .......................................... 2-16
" CORR.P.4 " .......................................... 2-16
" CORR.P.5 " .......................................... 2-16
" CORR.S.1 " .......................................... 2-16
" D.QUITT " ........................................... 2-27
" D.SPERR " ........................................... 2-27
" D.START " ........................................... 2-21
" DATA-O " ............................................ 2-23
" DATEN.A " ........................................... 3-22
" DEC.PT. " ........................................... 2-10
" DEL.ALL " ........................................... 2-30
" DLY.REG " ........................................... 1-6
" DLY.TAR " ........................................... 1-7
" DOS.TM.C " .......................................... 1-6
" DOSING " ............................................ 2-9
" DS.COAR " ........................................... 1-7
" DS.FINE " ........................................... 1-7
" EMPTY " ............................................. 1-6
" EMPTY.D " ........................................... 1-6
" EMPTY.H " ........................................... 1-6
" EX.Z.SET " .......................................... 2-29
" EXT.TAR " ........................................... 2-29
" I.DIM.Z " ........................................... 2-27
" IAPV.0.H " .......................................... 2-13
" IAPV.0.L " .......................................... 2-13
" IAPV.M.H " .......................................... 2-13
" IAPV.M.L " .......................................... 2-13
" ITEM.NO. " .......................................... 1-8
" KB.LOCK " ........................................... 2-15
" KOMMA " ............................................. 3-17
" L-CORR " ............................................ 2-16
" LF.B.PRI " .......................................... 1-8
" LIM.SP.M " .......................................... 1-6
" LIM.SWP " ........................................... 1-6
- 4 -
2-32
3-12
2-21
2-9
2-33
2-13
2-20
3-21
3-25
3-25
3-7
3-11
3-22
3-17
2-19
2-19
2-18
2-18
2-30
3-18
3-8
3-19
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
fine
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
" MA.ISTW " ........................................... 2-15
" MAX.AF " ............................................ 1-6
" N.V.SRC " ........................................... 2-21
" NEG.RNG " ........................................... 2-29
" NEG.WG. " ........................................... 2-13
" NET.SGN " ........................................... 2-30
" NO.O.DIG " .......................................... 2-10
" NOM.VAL " ........................................... 1-6
" NUL.CLR " ........................................... 1-5
" O-TEST " ............................................ 1-8
" OVERLD " ............................................ 2-28
" P.ACKN. " ........................................... 1-6
" PR.MODE " ........................................... 2-27
" PRINTR " ............................................ 1-8
" PU.ACT.V " .......................................... 2-15
" PU.LIM. " ........................................... 2-15
" PWR.RST " ........................................... 2-31
" RAMPE " ............................................. 1-7
" REG.MOD " ........................................... 2-20
" RESOLU " ............................................ 2-10
" REV.DAT " ........................................... 1-8
" REV.NO. " ........................................... 1-8
" SS.D./A.C " ......................................... 2-28
" SS.DIGT " ........................................... 2-28
" SS.TIME " ........................................... 2-28
" T.QUIT " ............................................ 2-21
" TAR.DOS " ........................................... 2-21
" TOL. " .............................................. 1-6
" TOL.CHK " ........................................... 2-20
" TR.FORMT " .......................................... 2-26
3-14
3-18
3-22
" TR.MODE " ........................................... 2-26
" ULD.ERR " ........................................... 2-28
" Z.ALG.EN " .......................................... 2-14
" Z.ALIGN " ........................................... 1-5
" Z.RANGE " ........................................... 2-29
" Z.SET " ............................................. 1-5
" Z.SET.EN " .......................................... 2-14
dosing .............................................. 1-13
.................................................... 2-9
" 0-VERS " ............................................ 2-11
" A-TEST " ............................................ 1-8
" A.-CAL. " ........................................... 2-9
" A.A.2.BER " ......................................... 1-6
" A.E.JUS.0 " ......................................... 2-22
" A.E.JUS.M " ......................................... 2-22
" A.JUST.0 " .......................................... 2-18
" A.JUST.M " .......................................... 2-18
" A.MITT.W " .......................................... 2-18
" A/D-E.B " ........................................... 2-10
" A/D-W.T " ........................................... 1-8
" AN.MODE " ........................................... 2-18
" BAUD-R " ............................................ 2-25
" BCD.CLK " ........................................... 2-23
" COM.MOD " ........................................... 2-25
" COM.NR. " ........................................... 2-25
" COM.Nr. " ........................................... 3-7
" COM.TYP " ........................................... 2-25
" D.QUITT " ........................................... 1-6
" D.START " ........................................... 2-21
" DATEN.A " ........................................... 2-23
" DG.FEIN " ........................................... 1-7
" DG.GROB " ........................................... 1-7
" DOS.ZT.U " .......................................... 1-6
" DOSIER " ............................................ 2-9
" DR.MODE " ........................................... 2-27
" DRUCK " ............................................. 1-8
" E.RESET " ........................................... 2-31
" EXT.NST " ........................................... 2-29
" EXT.TAR " ........................................... 2-29
" G/F " ............................................... 1-6
" GRENZW " ............................................ 1-6
- 5 -
2-20
2-32
2-19
2-33
2-33
3-11 3-12
3-15 3-16
3-19 3-20
3-23 3-24
3-7 3-11
3-13
3-17
3-21
2-14
2-14
2-38
2-22 3-12
2-32
2-19
2-21
2-9 2-33
3-21
3-11
2-19
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
3-8
3-22
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
" GRNZW.H " ........................................... 1-6
" GRNZW.M " ........................................... 2-30
" HELL " .............................................. 2-15
" I.FORMT " ........................................... 2-26
3-14
3-18
3-22
Fkt. " I.U.MODE " .......................................... 2-26
Fkt. " IJKW.0.H " .......................................... 2-13
Fkt. " IJKW.0.L " .......................................... 2-13
Fkt. " IJKW.M.H " .......................................... 2-13
Fkt. " IJKW.M.L " .......................................... 2-13
Fkt. " J.-GEW. " ........................................... 2-11
Fkt. " JUST.0 " ............................................ 2-11
Fkt. " JUST.K.1 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " JUST.K.2 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " JUST.K.3 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " JUST.K.4 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " JUST.K.5 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " JUST.MX " ........................................... 2-11
Fkt. " K.DAT.L " ........................................... 2-34
Fkt. " K.DAT.S " ........................................... 2-33
Fkt. " K.P.FRGB " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " KOMMA " ............................................. 2-10
Fkt. " KORR.P.1 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " KORR.P.2 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " KORR.P.3 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " KORR.P.4 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " KORR.P.5 " .......................................... 2-16
Fkt. " L-KORR " ............................................ 2-16
Fkt. " L/UE-A " ............................................ 2-14
Fkt. " LEERM. " ............................................ 1-6
Fkt. " LEERM.H " ........................................... 1-6
Fkt. " LEERM.V " ........................................... 1-6
Fkt. " LFD.NR. " ........................................... 1-8
Fkt. " LOESCH " ............................................ 2-30
Fkt. " LZ.N.DRU " .......................................... 1-8
Fkt. " MA.GRW. " ........................................... 2-15
Fkt. " MAX.NL " ............................................ 1-6
Fkt. " MITT.-W " ........................................... 2-11
Fkt. " N.NACHF " ........................................... 1-5
Fkt. " N.NF.FGB " .......................................... 2-14
Fkt. " N.ST.BER " .......................................... 2-29
Fkt. " N.ST.FGB " .......................................... 2-14
Fkt. " N.STELL " ........................................... 1-5
Fkt. " NEG.BER " ........................................... 2-29
Fkt. " NEG.WG. " ........................................... 2-13
Fkt. " NET.VZ. " ........................................... 2-30
Fkt. " NL " ................................................ 1-6
Fkt. " NL.KORR " ........................................... 2-20
Fkt. " NUL.CLR " ........................................... 1-5
Fkt. " REG.MOD " ........................................... 2-20
Fkt. " REV.DAT " ........................................... 1-8
Fkt. " REV.NR. " ........................................... 1-8
Fkt. " SOLL " .............................................. 1-6
Fkt. " SOLLW.Q " ........................................... 2-21
Fkt. " SS.T./M.Z " ......................................... 2-28
Fkt. " SS.TEIL " ........................................... 2-28
Fkt. " SS.ZEIT " ........................................... 2-28
Fkt. " T.QUITT " ........................................... 2-21
Fkt. " T.SPERR " ........................................... 2-15
Fkt. " TAR.DOS " ........................................... 2-21
Fkt. " TEILEZ " ............................................ 2-10
Fkt. " TOL.PFG " ........................................... 2-20
Fkt. " UEBERL " ............................................ 2-28
Fkt. " ULA.ERR " ........................................... 2-28
Fkt. " WZ.V.REG " .......................................... 1-6
Fkt. " WZ.V.TAR " .......................................... 1-7
Fkt. " ZIF.SPR " ........................................... 2-10
Function Input, leaving .................................. 2-1
Function leaving ......................................... 2-16
Functional test prior to calibration ..................... 2-9
Functions, not allocated Fct. .......................... 1-5
- 6 -
3-11 3-12
3-15 3-16
3-19 3-20
3-23 3-24
3-7 3-11
3-13
3-17
3-21
2-13
3-25
3-25
3-17
2-20
2-14
2-14
2-20
2-33
2-33
2-7
3-18
3-19
Gross .................................................... 3-8
ground loop .............................................. 2-39
Hysteresis ............................................... 2-30
identification address ................................... 2-25
Identification code ...................................... 3-7
indicating range ......................................... 2-10
Initial load ............................................. 2-12
Input .................................................... 1-12 2-15
2-29 2-37
Input filter ............................................. 2-11
Input voltage ............................................ 1-8 2-33
input voltage range ...................................... 2-8
interface, Profibus-DP ................................... 2-17 2-25
interface, serial ........................................ 2-25
interference ............................................. 2-39
Interrupting dosing cycle ................................ 3-8
intervals ................................................ 2-24 3-13
Issue to control output .................................. 3-22
Keyboard ................................................. 1-1
Keyboard lock function ................................... 3-23
Keyboard locking ......................................... 2-15
Keyboard, + key, Data input .............................. 1-5
Keyboard, + key, data transfer ........................... 2-26
Keyboard, + Key, Fct. seek ............................... 1-3
Keyboard, + key, Measuring mode .......................... 1-2
Keyboard, - key, Data input .............................. 1-5
Keyboard, - Key, Fct. seek ............................... 1-3
Keyboard, - key, Measuring mode .......................... 1-2
Keyboard, 0 key, Calibration ............................. 2-12
Keyboard, 0 key, Data input .............................. 1-5
Keyboard, 0 Key, Fct. seek ............................... 1-3
Keyboard, 0 key, Measuring mode .......................... 1-2
Keyboard, 0 key, Negative Weigher ........................ 2-14
Keyboard, F key, Data input .............................. 1-5
Keyboard, F Key, Fct. seek ............................... 1-3
Keyboard, F Key, Measuring mode .......................... 1-3
Keyboard, Net key, Data input ............................ 1-5
Keyboard, Net Key, Fct. seek ............................. 1-3
Keyboard, Net key, Measuring mode ........................ 1-2
Keyboard, o key, zero setting ............................ 2-29
Leave a Function ......................................... 2-16
Limit frequency .......................................... 2-11
Limit switch ............................................. 1-6
Line up .................................................. 2-8
Linearity-correction ..................................... 2-12
Linearization Negative Weigher ........................... 2-13
Load cell connection ..................................... 2-39
load-cell ................................................ 2-39
2-19
2-41
2-7
2-2
2-7
2-2
2-7
2-2
2-7
2-2
3-1
2-7
2-2
2-16
malfunction-warning ...................................... 2-14
max. AF value ............................................ 3-19
Max. AF value, writing ................................... 3-19
Max. dosing time ......................................... 3-20
max. dosing time ......................................... 3-20
Measurement transmitter and analogue inputs (X2) ......... 2-39
Measuring Amplifier ...................................... 2-8
Measuring mode ........................................... 1-2
Measuring transmitter monitoring ......................... 2-15
Minimum load ............................................. 2-29
Mode to acknowledge tolerance ............................ 2-21
Mode to start dosing ..................................... 2-21
motion ................................................... 2-28
negative display-range ................................... 2-29
negative value ........................................... 3-13
Negative weigher ......................................... 2-13
Negative weight values ................................... 3-11
Net ...................................................... 2-23 2-24
NiCd rechargeable battery ................................ 1-9 2-34
Nominal dosage value ..................................... 3-17
- 7 -
3-8
2-26
3-11
Nominal dosage value, writing ............................ 3-17
nominal value, reading ................................... 3-14
Nominal-dosing value ..................................... 3-18
NOVA DP Data-format ...................................... 3-16
Number of average cycles for analogue output ............. 2-18
Number of digits ......................................... 2-10
Operation mode for " limit switch " ........................ 2-30
Option " Di " .............................................. 2-24
Options .................................................. 1-15
Output ................................................... 1-8
2-19
3-12
Output current ........................................... 1-8
Output voltage ........................................... 1-8
Overload ................................................. 2-28
Overload-output .......................................... 2-1
overload-output .......................................... 2-28
1-12 2-1 2-14
2-32 2-37 2-42
3-22
2-33
2-33
3-11 3-13
2-14
Parallel interface ....................................... 2-23
parity bit ............................................... 2-24 2-25
Payload .................................................. 2-12
Plug arrangement ......................................... 2-39
Plug X1 .................................................. 2-39
Polarity of the input voltage ............................ 2-10
Power supply (X1) ........................................ 2-39
Premature end of dosing .................................. 3-9
print-out acknowledgement ................................ 1-6 2-19 2-27
Printer .................................................. 1-8
printer cut-out .......................................... 2-27
Printer interface ........................................ 2-27
printer, actual value format ............................. 2-26
printer, actual value, units of measurement .............. 2-27
Printer, printout-image .................................. 2-27
printout-image ........................................... 2-27
Profibus-DP interface .................................... 3-2 3-25 3-27
PTB ...................................................... 2-9 3-12
pull-up-resistor ......................................... 3-4
3-28
Ramp ..................................................... 1-7
Range-switching for the analogue output .................. 1-6 2-19
Read-out / input of internal adjust values ............... 2-13
Reading balance parameters ............................... 3-15
Reading coded actual gross/net value and device status ... 3-12
Reading data ............................................. 3-11
Reading in configuration data from the PC) ............... 2-34
Reading some data together ............................... 3-14
Reading the printout serial number ....................... 3-14
Reading unit configuration data (from the PC) ............ 3-26
redosing ................................................. 1-13 2-38
Release setting zero facility ............................ 2-14
Release zero continuation facility ....................... 2-14
remote printer ........................................... 2-27
Reset .................................................... 1-2 1-3 2-2 2-9 210 2-15 2-31 2-34
3-8 3-10 3-23 3-26
Reset the display to zero ................................ 1-2
Reset, switch on-r. .................................... 2-31
Resistance thermometer connection ........................ 2-39
Resolution ............................................... 2-10
Resolution, 1/10 d Res. ................................ 1-2 3-8
Restart Dosing ........................................... 1-12 2-37
Revision date ............................................ 2-33
Revision no. ............................................. 2-33
RS232 interface .......................................... 3-2
RS422 interface .......................................... 3-2 3-6
RS485 interface .......................................... 2-25 3-2 3-4
Searching for a function number .......................... 1-3 2-2
Selection of interface ................................... 3-2
Selection of the input voltage range ..................... 2-8
Sensors .................................................. 2-10
Serial communication ..................................... 3-7
Serial connection cable .................................. 2-33
- 8 -
Serial identification address ............................ 2-25
Serial interface ......................................... 2-13
3-2
Serial interface (X4) .................................... 2-44
Serial interface, actual value format .................... 2-26
Serial interface, actual value transfer mode ............. 2-26
Serial Interface, Baud-rate .............................. 2-25
Serial interface, printer connection ..................... 2-27
Service .................................................. 2-32
Setting zero ............................................. 3-7
Setting zero facility .................................... 1-5
Settling Time ............................................ 1-12
Source of nominal value .................................. 2-21
standstill ............................................... 2-26
Standstill monitoring .................................... 2-28
Start of a dosing cycle .................................. 3-8
starting up .............................................. 1-9
Status ................................................... 3-11
storing of the DK800 ..................................... 1-9
strip printer ............................................ 2-27
Summary of functions (01...149) .......................... 2-3
Summary of functions (01...49) ........................... 1-4
Summary of serial functions .............................. 3-27
Switch battery ........................................... 2-13
Switch Block ............................................. 2-30
switch field ............................................. 1-9
Switch on reset .......................................... 2-31
Switching on ............................................. 1-1
2-25
2-33
2-34
1-13
2-37
2-38
2-28
2-34
2-34
2-3
3-26
2-34
1-11
2-36
Table of settings (Hardware) ............................. 2-54
Tare ..................................................... 2-12
tare measurement ......................................... 1-7 1-13 2-38
Taring ................................................... 1-2 1-12 2-29 2-31
2-37 3-8 3-11
Taring cycle ............................................. 2-21
Taring prior to dosing ................................... 2-21
Taring, Waiting time prior to t. ....................... 3-20
Techn. Data .............................................. 1-14 2-47
Temporarily increasing resolution ........................ 3-8
termination-resistor ..................................... 3-4
Test stop (during dosing) ................................ 2-21
test-stop at end of dosing ............................... 1-13 2-38
Threshold level for limit switch ......................... 3-22
tolerance + .............................................. 3-19
tolerance - .............................................. 3-19
Tolerance acknowledgement ................................ 3-9
Tolerance check .......................................... 1-12 2-20 2-37
Tolerance limit .......................................... 1-6
tolerance report ......................................... 1-13 2-38
Tolerance threshold, writing ............................. 3-18
Trade weighers ........................................... 2-29
Transferring configuration data to the PC) ............... 2-33
Transmission of actual value in NOVA DP format ........... 3-16
Type Descriptions ........................................ 1-15
Type of serial interface ................................. 2-25
Underload ................................................ 2-28
unipolar operation mode .................................. 2-10
Unit identification code ................................. 3-7
Unit test ................................................ 3-24
units of measurement ..................................... 2-27
Voltage output ........................................... 2-17
waiting time prior to registration ....................... 3-20
waiting time prior to tare measurement ................... 1-7
Waiting time prior to taring ............................. 3-20
waiting time prior to taring ............................. 3-20
Watch-dog ................................................ 1-9
Writing data ............................................. 3-17
Writing the unit configuration (to the PC) ............... 3-25
zero afterflow equipment ................................. 2-28
Zero Carry-Over .......................................... 2-14
- 9 -
Zero continuation facility ............................... 1-5
zero setting equipment ................................... 2-28
Zero setting range ....................................... 2-29
Zero shift ............................................... 2-11
Zero-shift Negative Weigher .............................. 2-14
Zeroing .................................................. 2-29
- 10 -
Addition to the
Instruction manual
DK 800
with a
2nd serial interface
Version 02.01
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
Siemensstr. 36
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
Tel. (0)7151 / 94902-0
Fax (0)7151 / 43946
Copyright © 1996 - 2001
by
Mesomatic GmbH
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
date of issue 15.02.2001
Table of contents
Preface ............................................................. 1
1. Additions to the instruction manual .............................. 1
1.1. Summary of functions (01...49) ............................... 1
1.2. Setting the date and time .................................... 2
2. Additions to the line up and service manual ......................
2.1. Summary of functions (50...199) ..............................
2.2. Actual value - transfer mode (1st interface) .................
2.3. Printer interface ............................................
2.3.1. Printer modes ............................................
2.3.2. Printer-cable ............................................
2.4. Plug arrangement of both ser. interfaces .....................
2.5. Table of settings (Hardware) .................................
3
3
3
4
5
5
6
6
3. Additions to the programmer's manual .............................
3.1. The serial interfaces ........................................
3.1.1. serial Interface 1, used as RS232 Interface ..............
3.1.2. serial Interface 2, used as RS485/422 Interface ..........
3.2. Plug arrangement .............................................
3.3. Serial commands ..............................................
3.3.1. Initiate the print-out (!P-command) ......................
3.3.2. Reading the date (*D-command) ............................
3.3.3. Reading the time (*Z-command) ............................
7
7
7
7
8
9
9
9
9
Index .............................................................. 10
- I -
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Preface
This instruction manual is only valid for units with two serial interfaces or a
unit in which only the second serial interface (printer) is existing. Only the
differences to the basic unit with one serial interface are described here. All
functions, which are not described here, are contained in the instruction manual
for the basic unit:
• Part 1 : User manual
• Part 2 : Line up and service manual
• Part 3 : Programmer's manual
General note: If two function-names are separated by a " / " , the name in front of
the " / " is used in the german unit-version, the name after the " / " is used in the
english unit-version.
In units with a second serial interface no analogue output can be
mounted. Therefore all functions coupled to the analogue output do
not apply.
If two interfaces are existing, the first interface is to be used
for communication with the PC/PLC. The second interface is used to
connect a printer.
1. Additions to the instruction manual
1.1. Summary of functions
Additional to Table 1 in chapter 3.2 of the user manual, there are the following
functions:
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
46
D A
Z E
S.
S.
S.
S.
S.
S.
S -
T
I
T
M
J
S
M
S
T
U
T
A
O
A
T
I
E
E
M / D A T E
/T I M E
G / S. D A Y
N.
H R / S. Y E A R
D. / S. H R.
N.
K. / S. S E C.
S T
Display date
Display Time & clock start/stop
Set clock: enter day
Set clock: enter month
Set clock: enter year
Set clock: enter hours
Set clock: enter minutes
Set clock: enter seconds
Memory check (if an error is occured Err.42
will displayed)
The following functions do not apply in this version:
27
28
29
D G.G R O B / D S.C O A R
D G.F E I N / D S.F I N E
R A M P E / R A M P
Instruction manual (Addition)
Dosing speed " coarse "
Dosing speed " fine "
Percental share of ramp (COARSE-FINE)
DK800 with a 2nd serial interface
-1-
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
1.2. Setting the date and time
The fct. " DATUM " / " DATE " is only used to display and control the date.
The fct. " ZEIT " / " TIME " is used to display and control the time. Further the clock
is started and stopped or the so called " 30-second adjustment " is carried out by
this function.
Stopping the clock = " - " key
Starting the clock = " + " key
30-sec. adjustment. = " 0 " key, if 00...29 is displayed in the seconds
display, the seconds are reset to 00 by pressing the
" 0 " key. The minute display is not changed.
If 30...59 is displayed in the seconds-display, the
seconds are reset to 00 by pressing the " 0 " key. The
minute-display is increased by 1.
The input of date and time is only possible, when the
clock is stopped. !
Date and time are set by entering the single functions " S.TAG " / " S.DAY " , " S.MON " ,
" S.JAHR " / " S.YEAR " , " S.STD " / " S.HR " , " S.MIN " and " S.SEK " / " S.SEC " . After all the
input has been completed, the clock has to be started by means of the fct.
" ZEIT " / " TIME " .
1-2
DK800 with a 2nd serial interface
Instruction manual (Addition)
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2. Additions to the line up and service manual
2.1. Summary of functions
Additional to Table 2 in chapter 1.2. of the line up and service manual, there
are the following functions:
150
151
152
153
154
156
157
158
159
C O M
C O M
C O M
C O M
C O M
I.D I
D.S P
D.Q U
D R.M
2
2.B D
2.W L
2.P Y
2.M D
M.Z. / D I M.S G N
E R R / P.I N T L K
I T T / P.A C K N.
O D E / P R.M O D E
Type of printer-interface
Baud-Rate f. printer-interface
Word length f. printer-interface
Parity f. printer-interface
Print-Mode
Printer, actual value, units of measurement
Printer, cut-out
Printer, print-out acknowledgement
Printer, printout-image
The following functions do not apply in this version:
62
63
64
65
66
106
107
108
136
A N.A U S G / A N.O U T P
A.M I T T.W / A.A V.C Y C
A N.M O D E
A.J U S T.0 / A.A D J.0
A.J U S T.M / A.A D J.M X
I.D I M.Z. / D I M.S G N
D.S P E R R / P.I N T L K
D.Q U I T T / P.A C K N.
A.A.2.B E R / A.O.R N G.2
Analogue output
No. of average cycles f. analogue outp.
Mode analogue output
Analogue outp. zero Adjustment
Analogue outp. scale-end adjustment
Printer, actual value, units of measurement
Printer, cut-out
Printer, print-out acknowledgement
Analogue outp., 2nd range
2.2. Actual value - transfer mode (1st interface)
The modes 16, 32 and 64 in fct. " I.U.MODE " / " TR.MODE " are not adjustable in this
unit-version.
Instruction manual (Addition)
DK800 with a 2nd serial interface
-3-
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.3. Printer interface
If the 2nd serial interface is to be used as a printer interface, it has to be
configured as follows, to drive the printer.
Fct. 150: COM2
Fct. 151: COM2.BD
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
152:
153:
154:
156:
COM2.WL
COM2.PY
COM2.MD
I.DIM.Z/DIM.SGN
Fct. 157: D.SPERR/P.INTLK
Fct. 158: D.QUITT/P.ACKN.
Fct. 159: DR.MODE/PR.MODE
= RS232
= 100 ... 9600, in accordance to printer
setting
= 8 BIT or in accordance to printer setting
= NO PAR or in accordance to printer setting
= Print mode, see. chapter " Printer modes "
= OHNE/NONE / g / kg / t / lb / l / N / kN
(units of measurement)
= OHNE/NONE / MIN / ~ / MIN+~ (cut-out)
= OHNE/NONE / A8 (Print-out acknowledgement)
= B/N.2 / B+T+N.4 / B+T+N.1 (printout-image)
The following printout-images are possible:
1 % # ¥ " ¥
2¢$¥§¦0)§!§
5 % # ¥ " 4 ¥
(¢$¥§¦0)§!§
'¢$¥§¦¤¥!§
& % # ¥ "
¥ ¥ ¥
§¥§§§¥2¤¢¤§©¤¡§¦¤¡¢
¥ ¥ ¥
¨£ ¥£
DR.MODE=B+T+N.1 and DK800 in gross-mode
& # ¥ ¥ " ¥ !
($§¦¤7§§§§2¤¢¤§©¤§¦¤¢
¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¨£ ¡ ¥£ ¡
'¢$¥§¦¤¥!§
& % # ¥ "
¥ ¥ ¥
§¥§§§¥2¤¢¤§©¤¡§¦¤¡¢
¥ ¥ ¥
¨£ ¥£
DR.MODE=B+T+N.4 and DK800 in net-mode
1 # ¥ ¥ ¥
3$§¦ " 0)§!
5 # ¥ ¥ 4 ¥
6$§¦ " 0)§!
& # ¥ ¥ " ¥
($§¦¤!
§§§§2¤¢¤§©¤§¦¤¢
¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¨£ ¡ ¥£ ¡
12¢$¥§¦0)§§
% # ¥ " ¥ !
¥§¥§§¥§¥
¥
¥ ¥ ¥
¤¢¤§©¤¡§¦¤¡¢
¨£ ¥£
DR.MODE=B+T+N.4 and DK800 in gross-mode
& # ¥ ¥ " ¥
($§¦¤!
§§§§2¤¢¤§©¤§¦¤¢
¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¨£ ¡ ¥£ ¡
& % # ¥ " !
'¢$¥§¦¤¥§
¥§¥§§¥§¥
¥
¥ ¥ ¥
¤¢¤§©¤¡§¦¤¡¢
¨£ ¥£
DR.MODE=B/N.2 and DK800 in net-mode
1 # ¥ ¥ ¥
3$§¦ " 0)§!
¥ ¥ ¥ ¥
§§§§¥
¥ ¥ ¥ ¨£ ¡ ¥£ ¡
¤¢¤§©¤§¦¤¢
DR.MODE=B/N.2 and DK800 in gross-mode
for not officially calibrated units
& # ¥ ¥ " ¥
($§¦¤!
¥ ¥ ¥ ¥
§§§§¥
¥ ¥ ¥ ¨£ ¡ ¥£ ¡
¤¢¤§©¤§¦¤¢
for officially calibrated units
& '¢$§¦ " ¤¥§7§¥§§§¥2¤¢¤§©¤¡§¦¤¡¢
% # ¥ ¥
!
¥ ¥ ¥
¥ ¥ ¥
¨£ ¥£
DR.MODE=B+T+N.1 and DK800 in net-mode
§¢$§¦ " 0)§§A@¢$§¦ " 0)§§98¢$§¦ " ¤¥§7§¥§§§¥2¤¢¤§©¤¡§¦¤¡¢
1 % # ¥ ¥ ¥ !
5 % # ¥ ¥ 4 ¥ !
& % # ¥ ¥
!
¥ ¥ ¥
¥ ¥ ¥
¨£ ¥£
1 $§¦ " 0)§A5 $§¦ " 0)§9 & $§¦¤7§§§§2¤¢¤§¨©¤§¦£¤¢
# ¥ ¥ ¥ !
# ¥ ¥ 4 ¥ !
# ¥ ¥ " ¥ !
¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ ¥ £ ¡ ¥ ¡
Both, in the fct. " DR.MODE " / " PR.MODE " and in the printout-image each " B " (Brutto)
is displayed/printed in the german unit-version. In the english unit-version a
" G " (gross) is displayed/printed instead.
If no print-out should be carried out (e.g. because of a printer-breakdown),
" OHNE " has to be entered in fct. " DRUCK " / " PRINTR " .
The two interfaces are implemented as a 15-pol. plug in this version. The plug
arrangement is added in chapter " Plug arrangement of both ser. interfaces " of
this manual.
1-4
DK800 with a 2nd serial interface
Instruction manual (Addition)
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.3.1. Printer modes
The fct. " COM2.MD " determines the way how the print-out is triggered by entering
a mode reference number. The following settings are possible:
1 = Print-out triggered by the 1.serial interface, i.e. the PC/PLC
determines the time of the print-out.. (see chapter " Initiate the
print-out (!P-command) " )
2 = Print-out triggered by input E7, Pl. X4 Pin 11
4 = Print-out triggered automatically. After the " empty " message has been
exceeded, and a following standstill of the weigher the actual value
is printed one time.
16 = By confirmation with the " + " key.
32 = Print-out triggered automatically. After the end of dosing, when
" FERTIG " / " READY " is displayed or when output A11 is activated.
64 = Print-out triggered automatically. After the appearance of a
tolerance message or when output A10 is activated.
A combination of modes is
number 22 (2+4+16) means,
following conditions:
1. (2) by activating input
2. (4) automatically after
standstill, or
3. (16) by pressing the " + "
possible. Therefore the input of e.g. mode serial
that the actual value is transferred under the
E7, or
the empty message has been exceeded combined with a
key.
2.3.2. Printer-cable
If a printer of the series DPN-2235/2335 is connected, a connecting cable has to
be used, as described here:
Terminal flange
TxD
2
4
RxD
RxD
3
5
TxD
RTS
4
13
CTS
12
RTS
Gnd
Printer
7
6
25 pol.
Min.D.
Instruction manual (Addition)
Gnd
DK800 X4
15 pol. Min.D.
DK800 with a 2nd serial interface
-5-
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.4. Plug arrangement of both ser. interfaces
Fig.10 in chapter A.1.4. of line up and service manual is not valid !
Plug X4 is implemented as a 15 pol. plug in this version.
The 15-pol. plug X4 is arranged as follows:
Pin No.
Interface for data exchange with PC/PLC
Version: RS 232
Version: RS 422/485
1
RxD (inp.)
Tx+ (outp.)
2
TxD (outp.)
Tx- (outp.)
3
Gnd
Gnd(isolated)
9
RTS( outp.)
Rx- (inp.)
10
CTS (inp.)
RX+ (inp.)
Pin No.
Printer interface RS 232
4
RxD (inp.)
5
TxD (outp.)
6
Gnd
12
RTS( outp.)
13
CTS (inp.)
Pin No.
Control-inputs (24V DC)
11
Control-inp. E7
Pin No.
Control-outputs (24V DC)
8
Control-outp. OP2
Pin No.
Outp. for remote display
7
Clock
14
Data
15
Strobe (Load)
2.5. Table of settings (Hardware)
Table 11 in chapter A.6. of line up and service manual is not valid, it is to be
replaced by page 4 of the enclosed " Einstellungen für Digitalkompensator DK800
Vers.02.01 Rev.xx " .
1-6
DK800 with a 2nd serial interface
Instruction manual (Addition)
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
3. Additions to the programmer's manual
3.1. The serial interfaces
The DK800 has 2 serial Interfaces.
The 1st serial Interface is to be used for communication with the PC/PLC (Master)
and the DK800 (Slaves). This interface can be used, as required, as an RS232, a
full-duplex RS485, or as an RS422 interface.
The 2nd serial Interface is used to connect a printer and is a RS232-interface.
3.1.1. serial Interface 1, used as RS232 Interface
J231
J230
J232
J233
1 2 3
J237
J235
J234
J236
J238
Fig.1 in chapter 2.1.1. of the programmer's manual is not valid, replace it by
the following figure.
1 2 3
1 2 3
J239
J240
J250
The jumpers J250, J251 and J252 are not used
for the serial Interface. They must remain
in the position which is set by factory !
1 2 3
1 2 3
J252
J251
3.1.2. serial Interface 2, used as RS485/422 Interface
J231
J230
J232
J233
1 2 3
J237
J235
J234
J236
J238
Fig.3 in chapter 2.1.2. of the programmer's manual is not valid, replace it by
the following figure.
1 2 3
1 2 3
J250
J239
J240
The jumpers J250, J251 and J252 are not used
for the serial Interface. They must remain
in the position which is set by factory !
1 2 3
1 2 3
J252
Instruction manual (Addition)
DK800 with a 2nd serial interface
J251
-7-
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Fig.4 in chapter 2.1.2. of the programmer's manual is not valid, replace it by
the following figure.
2
Tx100E
J230
1 Tx+
-U
6k8
J232 9
Rx-
Cable with paired and
shielded wires must be
used for the interface
cable, with an outer
woven shield,
e.g. CYPiCY !
100E
J231
6k8
10
Rx+
X4
15 pol.
J233
Min.D.
+U
3.2. Plug arrangement
Fig.2b in chapter 2.1.1. of the programmer's manual is not valid !
The pin-numbers of plug X4 in Fig.2a, 4a and 4b of the programmer's manual are
not valid, they are to be replaced correspondingly by the upper plug arrangement.
1-8
DK800 with a 2nd serial interface
Instruction manual (Addition)
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
3.3. Serial commands
3.3.1. Initiate the print-out (!P-command)
The !P-command, described as an option in chapter 2.2.6. of the programmer's
manual, is generally available in this version.
If the PC/PLC connected to the 1.interface should initiate a print-out on the 2nd
interface, the following command has to be used:
!P
(21Hex & 50Hex)
Response: ACK = The print-out begins.
NAK = The print-out cannot be started.
3.3.2. Reading the date (*D-command)
If the DK800 is fitted with the hardware option Time/Date, the date of the registration period is stored together with the actual dosage weight (see Part 3,
" Programmer's manual " , chapter " Clear dosage actual-value memory " ). The stored
date-value is cancelled by the !I-command. If no dosing process is active, the
*D-command delivers the actual date.
The date can be read with the following command:
*D
(2AHex & 44Hex)
The DK800 replies
(STX) ddmmyy [pp] (ETB)
3.3.3. Reading the time (*Z-command)
If the DK800 is fitted with the hardware option Time/Date, the time of the registration period is stored together with the actual dosage weight (see Part 3,
" Programmer's manual " , chapter " Clear dosage actual-value memory " ). The stored
time-value is cancelled by the !I-command. If no dosing process is active, the
*Z-command delivers the actual time.
The time can be read with the following command:
*Z
(2AHex & 5AHex)
The DK800 replies
(STX) hhmmss [pp] (ETB)
Instruction manual (Addition)
DK800 with a 2nd serial interface
-9-
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Index
Actual value - transfer mode (1st Interface) ............. 3
Additions to the instruction manual ...................... 1
Additions to the line up and service manual .............. 3
Additions to the programmer's manual ..................... 7
Analogue output .......................................... 1
cable f. printer ......................................... 5
command !P ............................................... 9
Command *D ............................................... 9
Command *Z ............................................... 9
control-input ............................................ 6
control-output ........................................... 6
Dosing End ............................................... 5
empty message ............................................ 5
Initiate the print-out (!P-command) ...................... 9
input .................................................... 5
interface f. data exchange ............................... 6
interface f. printer ..................................... 6
keyboard, + key, print-out ............................... 5
Plug arrangement ser. interfaces ......................... 6
print-out ................................................ 5
Print-out acknowledgement ................................ 4
Printer interface ........................................ 4
printer interface ........................................ 6
Printer modes ............................................ 5
printer, cut-out ......................................... 4
Printer, printout-image .................................. 4
Printer-cable ............................................ 5
printout-image ........................................... 4
8
9
Reading the date (*D-command) ............................ 9
Reading the time (*Z-command) ............................ 9
remote-display ........................................... 6
RS232 interface .......................................... 7
RS422 interface .......................................... 7
RS485 interface .......................................... 7
ser. interfaces, plug arrangement ........................ 6
Serial commands .......................................... 9
serial Interface ......................................... 7
serial Interface 1 (RS232) ............................... 7
serial Interface 2 (RS485/422) ........................... 7
Setting the date and time ................................ 2
Setting the time ......................................... 2
standstill ............................................... 5
Summary of functions (01...49) ........................... 1
Summary of functions (50...199) .......................... 3
8
Table of settings (Hardware) ............................. 6
tolerance message ........................................ 5
triggering off the print-out ............................. 5
units of measurement ..................................... 4
1 - 10
DK800 with a 2nd serial interface
Instruction manual (Addition)
Notes for connection and operation of
printer series DPN2235/2335
These printers contain a rechargeable battery, which has to be protected from
becoming deeply discharged.
Therefore you have to pay attention, that the printer is switched off at its lateral
switch, when the power supply unit does not get power anymore !
Alternatively the power supply unit of the printer can be connected (despite
switching-off the DK800) permanently to the supply voltage (e.g. before the mainswitch of the system).
If the rechargeable battery has been deeply discharged, the printer won't be able
to print for about the next ½ to 1 hour until the rechargeable battery has reached
its minimum load !
Multiply deeply discharging decreases the life of the rechargeable battery !
Instruction manual
DK 800
Version
01.01
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
Siemensstr. 36
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
Tel. (0)7151 / 94902-0
Fax (0)7151 / 43946
Copyright © 1994 - 2001
by
Mesomatic GmbH
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
date of issue 25.11.2002
Table of contents
Preface ............................................................. 1
1. Data entry ....................................................... 1
2. The serial interface ............................................. 2
2.1. Selection and configuration of interface ..................... 2
2.1.1. The RS232 interface ...................................... 2
2.1.2. The RS485 interface ...................................... 4
2.1.3. The RS422 interface ...................................... 6
2.2. Serial communication ......................................... 7
2.2.1. Commands ................................................. 7
2.2.1.1. Setting zero......................................... 7
2.2.1.2. Net (Taring)......................................... 8
2.2.1.3. Gross................................................ 8
2.2.1.4. Temporarily increasing resolution.................... 8
2.2.1.5. Start of a dosing cycle.............................. 8
2.2.1.6. Interrupting dosing cycle............................ 8
2.2.1.7. Tolerance acknowledgement............................ 9
2.2.1.8. Clear dosage actual-value memory..................... 9
2.2.1.9. Premature end of dosing.............................. 9
2.2.1.10. Clear displayed text................................ 9
2.2.1.11. Reset.............................................. 10
2.2.2. Calculation of the check-sum ............................ 10
2.2.3. Reading data ............................................ 11
2.2.3.1. Actual value and unit status........................ 11
2.2.3.2. Reading coded actual gross/net value and device status12
2.2.3.3. Actual-gross value and unit status.................. 12
2.2.3.4. Actual value (quick check).......................... 13
2.2.3.5. C/F value........................................... 13
2.2.3.6. AF value............................................ 14
2.2.3.7. Reading the nominal value........................... 14
2.2.3.8. Reading the printout serial number.................. 14
2.2.3.9. Reading some data together.......................... 14
2.2.3.10. Reading balance parameters......................... 15
2.2.3.11. Transmission of actual value in NOVA DP format..... 16
2.2.4. Writing data ............................................ 17
2.2.4.1. Nominal dosage value................................ 17
2.2.4.2. C/F value (coarse/fine)............................. 17
2.2.4.3. AF value (afterflow)................................ 18
2.2.4.4. Nominal-dosing value, C/F value and AF value........ 18
2.2.4.5. Tolerance threshold................................. 18
2.2.4.6. Max. AF value....................................... 19
2.2.4.7. + Tolerance, - tolerance and max. AF value.......... 19
2.2.4.8. Max. dosing time (dosing time monitoring)........... 20
2.2.4.9. Waiting time prior to taring........................ 20
2.2.4.10. Max. dos. tme, wait. tme p. t. tar. & p. t. reg.... 20
2.2.4.11. Dosing speed, coarse............................... 21
2.2.4.12. Dosing speed, fine................................. 21
2.2.4.13. Dos. speed, coarse a. fine a. perc. share of ramp.. 21
2.2.4.14. Threshold level for limit switch................... 22
2.2.4.15. Issue to control output............................ 22
2.2.4.16. Display text....................................... 23
2.2.4.17. Control functions (Keyboard lock / Auto-calibr.)... 23
- I -
2.2.4.18. Unit test..........................................
2.2.5. Writing / reading unit configuration ....................
2.2.5.1. Writing the unit configuration......................
2.2.5.2. Reading unit configuration..........................
2.2.6. Summary of serial functions .............................
24
25
25
26
27
3. Communications procedures for the dosage sequence ............... 29
Index .............................................................. 31
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Preface
This part of the instruction manual is a guide for programmers. For basic information see part 1 user manual and part 2 line up and service manual.
General note: If two function-names are separated by a " / " , the name in front of
the " / " is used in the german unit-version, the name after the " / " is used in the
english unit-version.
1. Data entry
Pressing the " F " key puts the unit into the " Enter data " mode. According to the
software implemented, up to 149 different parameters can be entered. The parameters (functions) with the numbers 1...49 are accessible by the operator at all
times and are described in part 1 (User manual). The input of sensitive data
(configurations- and calibration function 50...149) are guarded and are described
in part 2 (line-up and service manual).
C a u t i o n !
I m p o r t a n t !
It is only possible to leave the data-entry mode by means of the
" F " -key (and S1)!
If any combination of the keys " 0 " & " + " & " - " (reset) is pressed
while functions are being entered, or if the power supply is cut off
from the unit, the new data will be stored in the unit but the DK800
will not have been able to calculate the check-number. The next time
it is switched on, the data will therefore not tally with the checknumber and the DK800 will report the error " ERR.03 " . If this error
report is acknowledged, all data will be erased and the DK800 will
be back in its basic setting.
Programmer's manual
3-1
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2. The serial interface
Data is exchanged between the master computer and the DK800 (slave(s)) via a
serial interface.
The settings of the type of serial interface, baud rate, parity bit etc. is
described in part 2 (line up and service manual) chapter " Data transfer " .
2.1. Selection and configuration of interface
The unit has one or two serial interfaces.
The 1st ser. interface can be produced, as required, as a RS232, a full-duplex
RS485, a RS422, or a Profibus-DP interface. The RS-interfaces are described in
this manual. The Profibus-DP interface is described in a separate manual, named
" Addition to the Instruction manual, Profibus-DP interface "
The 2nd ser. interface is used to connect printers and includes a accumulatorbuffered real-time clock with calendar. The 2nd ser. interface is described in an
other separate manual, named " Addition to the Instruction manual, DK 800 with a
2nd serial interface " .
The interfaces are not included as standard on the DK800, but are available as
optional extras.
The selection of the required interface is made by means of the keyboard on the
front panel in conjunction with the mounting/demounting of the communication card
and a jumper configuration inside the unit which is set in the factory. The
jumper configuration can be modified by the customer after opening the unit.
Versions of the unit with an RS422/485 interface can later be converted into
RS232 after opening the unit. If the DK800 is fitted with only one RS232
interface, this cannot be converted into an RS422/485 interface.
2.1.1. The RS232 interface
The serial RS232 interface is connected electrically with the potential of the
DK800 main-unit. If jumpers are connected as shown in Fig.1, the RS232 interface
is activated.
J240
1 2 3
J239
J234
J235
J236
J237
J238
J230
J231
J232
J233
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2
Fig.1
3-2
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
If, for instance the DK800 should be operated with a PC, it should be connected
as shown in Fig.2a. The cable should be shielded in industrial surroundings and
if it is longer than 2 meters.
Terminal flange
RxD
2
3
3
TxD
TxD
3
2
2
RxD
RTS
7
4
8
CTS
CTS
8
5
7
RTS
Gnd
5
7
5
Gnd
DCD
1
8
DTR
4
20
DSR
6
6
RI
9
22
PC
COM1/2
9 pol.
Min.D.
DK800 X4
9pol. Min.D.
25 pol.
Min.D.
Fig.2a
The RS232 interface can likewise be used for connecting the DK800 to an
officially calibrated remote printer. The connecting cable for the printer series
DPN-2235/2335 is described in Fig.2b.
Terminal flange
TxD
2
2
RxD
RxD
3
3
TxD
RTS
4
8
CTS
7
RTS
5
Gnd
Gnd
Printer
7
25 pol.
Min.D.
DK800 X4
9 pol. Min.D.
Fig.2b
Programmer's manual
3-3
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.1.2. The RS485 interface
The wires of the serial full duplex RS485 interface are not referred to a potential ( " opto-decoupled " ). If the jumpers are fitted as shown in Fig.3, the RS485interface is activated.
J240
1 2 3
J239
J234
J235
J236
J237
J238
J230
J231
J232
J233
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2
Fig.3
The unit has termination- and pull-up-resistors to terminate the data lines. The
resistors can be switched in, via jumpers as shown in Fig.4a.
3
Tx100E
J230
2 Tx+
-U
6k8
J232 7
Rx-
Cable with paired and
shielded wires must be
used for the interface
cable, with an outer
woven shield,
e.g. CYPiCY !
100E
J231
6k8
8
Rx+
X4
9 pol.
J233
Min.D.
+U
Fig.4a
3-4
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Fig.4b
You have to make a distinction between units at the end of the cable and units,
which lie in between the ends of the cable. In the two units at the end of the
cable, the 100Ω resistors must be connected to the transmitter and receiver with
the jumpers J230 and J231, and the 6.8kΩ pull-up resistors must also be connected
with the jumpers J232 and J233.
If there is no DK800 connected to the end of the cable, but a PC or PLC, you have
to take care, that the PLC / PC is equipped with terminating resistors.
Programmer's manual
3-5
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
In units, which lie in between the ends of the cable (intermediate units), the
100Ω resistors must definitely be disconnected. It will depend on the mode of
operation, whether the pull-up resistors need to be activated on the intermediate
units (length of wires, slope steepness, transmission speed, etc.). Please take
care, that the substitutional resistor of all pull-ups (including those at the
ends of the cable) should not be below 1kΩ.
The connection of the cable-shield and how to assign the pair of wires, is shown
in Fig.4b.
2.1.3. The RS422 interface
The hardware of the RS422 interface is completely identical with the one of the
full-duplex RS485, except for the fact, that the transmitter of the RS422 interface cannot change into high-impedance state, but it is always active and remains
in space state in the idle mode. Therefore the jumpers for selecting the interface have to be fitted as shown in Fig.3 (like for the RS485). Fig.4a also
applies. As there is everytime only 1 unit at the end of cable in RS422
operation, the 100Ω termination resistors have to be connected with the jumpers
J230 and J231. The pull-ups are not absolutely necessary.
3-6
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2. Serial communication
The transmission parameters (Baud rate, parity, etc) are set by means of the keyboard on the front of the unit.
Every unit has a unit identification code, which can be entered in
fct. " COM.NR. " / " COM.NO. " . The identification code is formed of the unit number
(COM.NR./COM.NO.), and is an ASCII character in the range from 61Hex=97Dec='a' to
74Hex=116Dec='t', that is to say a lower case letter. Therefore unit no. 1 has
the identification code 'a', unit no. 2 'b' a.s.o. The identification code 'y'
and 'z' (see chapter " Reset " ) have a special function.
In order to build up a connection to the DK800, the identification code is sent
from the master computer to which the unit replies with its own identification
code. The connection is installed now, and the master sends now either a request
for an actual value or an command.
Entering the unit no. " 0 " , or in fct. " I.U.MODE " / " TR.MODE " an automatic
transmission is chosen, means working without exchange of identification code.
The selection is possible, when only 1 DK800 is connected to the master computer.
If an officially calibrated remote printer is being operated together with the
DK800, the unit number must be set at 0.
The character NUL (00H) will be ignored by serial reception. Thus problems can be
avoided with equipment, which can send the data word-organised and not byteorganised.
2.2.1. Commands
If an identification code & gt; 0 is selected, commanding works as follows:
The command will be transmitted after interchanging of the identification code.
If the identification code no. 0 is selected, the command will be transmitted
immediately, an identification no. transmission is not necessary.
Commands consist of an '!'=21Hex=33Dec, followed by the actual command character.
When the DK800 receives a command, it checks whether it is possible to execute
it. If so, it answers with ACK=06Hex=Ctrl-F (acknowledgement) and executes the
command. If the command cannot be executed, it answers with NAK=15Hex=Ctrl-U
(negative acknowledgement).
After ACK or NAK has been sent back, the DK800 disconnects the communication.
The basic timing is as follows:
1. DK800 receives the command (or data).
2. It checks whether the command is executable.
3. It answers with a ACK- or NAK-character.
4. It starts the execution of the command.
2.2.1.1. Setting zero
The display is set to zero in the range of ±2% of the calibrated display range by
means of the command:
!0
(21Hex & 30Hex)
Reply:
ACK = The actual weight has been set to zero, to an accuracy of 0,25e.
NAK = The display cannot be set to zero, e.g. because the actual
weight is to great, or the weigher is in motion.
Programmer's manual
3-7
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.1.2. Net (Taring)
Taring is carried out to the command:
!N
(21Hex & 4EHex)
Reply:
ACK = The DK800 displays the net weight.
NAK = Taring is not possible, e.g. the weigher is in motion.
Taring can be executed a number of times in sequence without the unit switching
back to " gross " mode.
The command !N is not accepted during a dosing cycle.
2.2.1.3. Gross
The gross command cancels taring (net weight display). The command is:
!B
(21Hex & 42Hex)
Reply:
ACK = The DK800 displays the gross weight.
NAK = The DK800 cannot switch over, e.g. because the 1/10 d resolution
has been activated.
The !B-command is not accepted during the dosing cycle.
2.2.1.4. Temporarily increasing resolution
The resolution of the DK800 can be increased tenfold for 5 seconds at a time. The
command is:
!H
(21Hex & 48Hex)
Reply:
ACK = The DK800 switches over to the higher resolution.
NAK = The DK800 cannot switch over.
2.2.1.5. Start of a dosing cycle
Once the nominal values had been transmitted, the dosing cycle may be started by
means of the command:
!D
(21Hex & 44Hex)
Reply:
ACK = The dosing cycle starts.
NAK = The dosing cycle cannot be started.
The
!D-command
is
fct. " DOSIER " / " DOSING " .
only
accepted,
if
dosing
is
released
with
2.2.1.6. Interrupting dosing cycle
To interrupt the dosing cycle without a reset of the whole unit, the following
command can be used:
!C
(21Hex & 43Hex)
Reply:
ACK = The DK800 interrupts the dosing cycle running at the moment.
NAK = The dosing cycle cannot be interrupted.
If the !C-command is accepted, the dosing cycle is interrupted at once and the
dosing outputs switched off. Taring is cancelled, and the actual value is not
stored into the memory.
3-8
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.1.7. Tolerance acknowledgement
If " + TOL! " or " - TOL! " is shown in the display or signalled to output A10, to
show that a tolerance has been exceeded, this can be acknowledged with the command:
!Q
(21Hex & 51Hex)
Reply:
ACK = The tolerance-exceeded signal has been acknowledged.
NAK = The tolerance-exceeded signal has not been acknowledged.
2.2.1.8. Clear dosage actual-value memory
Once a dosing cycle has been completed, the DK800 will display " FERTIG " / " READY " ,
output A11 will be activated, and the actual dosage weight will be stored into
the memory. If the master computer now requests the actual value, the value
stored in the memory will be transmitted and not the current actual value. The
command:
!I
(21Hex & 49Hex)
must be issued to cancel the " FERTIG " / " READY " message and the actual value in the
memory.
Reply:
ACK = The command will be executed.
NAK = The command will not be executed.
If the DK800 is fitted with the hardware option Time/Date, the time + date
registration period is stored together with the actual dosage weight. The
time- and date-value can be read by the serial interface (see " Addition
Instruction manual, DK 800 with a 2nd serial interface " ) and is cancelled
!I-command.
of the
stored
to the
by the
2.2.1.9. Premature end of dosing
If the actual value does not reach the nominal dosage value, the dosing process
can be terminated by using the !J-command.
If
the
DK800
recognises
the
!J-command,
the
coarse-/fine-dosing
stops
immediately, the tolerance check and the afterflow calculation is skipped and the
" wait-time before registration " is started.
Command:
Reply:
!J
(21Hex & 4AHex)
ACK = The command will be executed.
NAK = The command will not be executed.
2.2.1.10. Clear displayed text
A text displayed with the !K-Command, can be erased with the command:
!L
(21Hex & 4CHex)
after erasing, the gross weight will be displayed.
Reply:
ACK = The displayed text has been erased.
NAK = The displayed text has not been erased.
Programmer's manual
3-9
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.1.11. Reset
To bring an individual unit back to the reset stand, the command
!R
(21Hex & 52Hex)
can be used.
Reply:
ACK = The DK800 carries out a reset.
NAK = A reset is not possible.
There is also the possibility of issuing a reset command to all the units simultaneously (in RS485 operation). This is done by transmitting the identification
signal 'z'=7AHex. This general reset is not acknowledged by ACK or NAK.
If only the serial transmission is to be synchronised or terminated, e.g. as a
result of communication faults, this can be done by sending out the command
'y'=79Hex.
2.2.2. Calculation of the check-sum
The check-sum is formed of the ASCII characters between STX and ETB (excluding
these two characters) being added together byte by byte, without carrying over.
This results in a 1-byte value of xy. Two 1-byte figures (x0, 0y) are formed of
this value. 0x is converted to x0 (shifted four times), and 3x by adding 30h to
it. 30h is added to 0y to obtain 3y.
Example:
(STX) [v] iiiiii n ss [ee aaaa] [pp] (ETB)
02h
+ 002100 2 $$ !! !!!!
8 & gt;
17h
The ASCII characters are now added together.
+
0
0
1
2
3
4
2
$
$
!
!
!
!
!
!
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
2B
30
30
32
31
30
30
32
24
24
21
21
21
21
21
21
(2)8E
→ 8E
⇒
⇒
80
0E
→
08
+30
+30
→
→
38
3E
→
→
'8'
' & gt; '
The check sum is thus '8 & gt; ' (38Hex & 3EHex).
3 - 10
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.3. Reading data
After exchanging the identification code, a command for " data output " can be
sent. The DK800 replies with the STX, data, check-sum and ETB.
After the transmission of data, the DK800 will disconnect the transmission.
If a 21(2) or 22(4) is contained in fct. " I.U.MODE " / " TR.MODE " , no exchange of
identification code takes place, but only the data between (STX) and (ETB) will
be transmitted.
If unit no. 0 is entered in fct. " COM.NR. " / " COM.NO. " , no exchange of identification code takes place, too.
2.2.3.1. Actual value and unit status
The actual-value format described below only applies if one of the format identification numbers 1 ... 7 has been entered in the Function " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " .
Format 8 is provided for the operation of an officially calibrated remote
printer.
Format 16 (NOVA DP) is provided for large-format and remote displays, and is
described in the section on " Actual-value transfer in NOVA DP format " .
To request for the actual value, proceed as follows:
After exchanging the identification code the master must send now
'?'
(3FHex=63Dec) or
*I
(2AHex & 49Hex).
Both commands are equal, and only for compatibility reasons they exist twice.
The DK800 replies with the actual value in the following format:
(STX) [v] iiiiii n ss [ee aaaa] [pp] (ETB)
(STX)
v
iiiiii
n
ss
ee
= Start of text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
= Arithmetic sign ('+'=2BHex or ' '=20Hex or '-'=2DHex)
The arithmetic sign is only sent if a 1 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . If this has not been selected,
negative weight values are transmitted as 000000 (zero).
To comply with DIN/EN 45501, the arithmetical sign has to be
" + " , " - " , or " " , in order to show the status " zero within
0.25e " as a blank. If " ? " is shown as the weight, " ? " will also
be shown as the arithmetical sign.
= weight value, 6 digits
If the unit cannot determine the actual value, e.g. if there is
an overload or when taring, " ?????? " will be transmitted.
= No. of digits behind the decimal point.
n=30Hex → iiiiii
n=31Hex → iiiii.i
n=32Hex →
iiii.ii
etc.
= Unit status
1.Byte: 27 = 0 / 26 = 0 / 25 = 1
24 = overload
23 = empty
22 = 1/10d
21 = motion (∼)
20 = minimum load
2.Byte: 27 = 0 / 26 = 0 / 25 = 1
24 = net (tared)
23 = weight value is actual dosage value
22 = tolerance exceeded (up/down)
21 = internal keyboard is locked by serial command
20 = 0 (currently no function)
= Status of inputs E7...E0
The status of the inputs and outputs is only transmitted if a 2
is contained in fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " .
1.Byte: 27 = 0 / 26 = 0 / 25 = 1 / 24 = 0
23 = Input E7
22 = Input E6
21 = Input E5
Programmer's manual
3 - 11
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
20 = Input E4
27 = 0 / 2 6 = 0 / 2 5 = 1 / 2 4 = 0
23 = Input E3
22 = Input E2
21 = Input E1
20 = Input E0
= Status of outputs A15...A0
The status of the inputs and outputs is only transmitted if a 2
is contained in fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " .
1.Byte: 27 = 0 / 26 = 0 / 25 = 1 / 24 = 0
23 = Output A15
22 = Output A14
21 = Output A13
20 = Output A12
2.Byte: 27 = 0 / 26 = 0 / 25 = 1 / 24 = 0
23 = Output A11
22 = Output A10
21 = Output A9
20 = Output A8
3.Byte: 27 = 0 / 26 = 0 / 25 = 1 / 24 = 0
23 = Output A7
22 = Output A6
21 = Output A5
20 = Output A4
4.Byte: 27 = 0 / 26 = 0 / 25 = 1 / 24 = 0
23 = Output A3
22 = Output A2
21 = Output A1
20 = Output A0
= Check sum
The check sum is only transmitted if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
2.Byte:
aaaa
pp
(ETB)
2.2.3.2. Reading coded actual gross/net value and device status
The actual value method described below serves the purpose of reading the actual
value in an encrypted format for the officially calibrated further processing by
an SPS control, which itself has an official calibration approval.
The encryption method is deposited with the German Federal Institute of Weights
and Measures (Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt, PTB), Braunschweig, and will
only be disclosed on presentation of the SPS control’s approval certificate.
The data format described here can only be requested from master if the format
code number 5 or 7 is entered in function " I.FORMT " .
After exchanging answerback codes, the master sends:
*C
(2AHex & 43Hex)
The DK800 answers with an actual value in the following format:
(STX) [v] cccccccc pp ss [pp] (ETB)
2.2.3.3. Actual-gross value and unit status
The actual value-format, which is described here, is only valid, if in fct.
" I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " , format-no. 1...7 is entered.
To read the actual-gross value, proceed as follows:
After the identification-codes have been exchanged, the master sends:
*B
(2AHex & 42Hex)
The DK800 replies with the actual-gross value in accordance to the following
format:
(STX) [v] iiiiii n ss [ee aaaa] [pp] (ETB)
3 - 12
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
This format is identical to the format described in chapter " Actual-value and
unit-status " , however the gross-weight is always sent, independent on, whether
the unit displays the gross- or net-weight. The 24 bit in the 2.status-byte
indicates, whether the display displays gross- or net-weight.
2.2.3.4. Actual value (quick check)
In order to be able to read off the actual value as brought up to date by the
average rate of the analogue output, proceed as follows:
After the identification signals have been exchanged, the master transmits:
*H
(2AHex & 48Hex)
The DK800 answers with the actual value, without status, in the following format:
(STX) [v] iiiiii n [pp] (ETB).
(STX)
v
iiiiii
n
= Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
= Arithmetical sign ('+'=2BHex or ' '=20Hex or '-' = 2DHex)
The arithmetical sign is only transmitted if a 1 is contained in
the Function " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . If an alternative with no
arithmetical sign is selected, negative values will be transmitted as 000000 (zero).
The arithmetical sign under this command has only " + " and " - " as
possible conditions. If " ? " is shown as the weight, " ? " will
also be shown as the arithmetical sign.
= Weight value, 6-figure. The intervals are always 1.
If the unit is unable to calculate the actual value, e.g. if
there is an overload or during taring, " ?????? " will be transmitted.
= number of decimal places
iiiiii
n=30Hex
iiiii.i
n=31Hex
n=32Hex
iiii.ii
etc.
= check sum
The check sum is only transmitted if a 4 is contained in the
Function " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . The section on " Calculating the
check sum " explains this in detail.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W).
pp
(ETB)
When a quick check is being made of the
absolutely must be activated in the Function
then be issued automatically at intervals of
to date at the same pace as the calculation
(which is quicker).
actual value, the analogue output
" AN.AUSG " / " AN.OUTP. " . The data will
1. The data will now be brought up
of averages at the analogue output
2.2.3.5. C/F value
The coarse-fine point is modified automatically by the afterflow-correction. The
new coarse-fine point can be transmitted with the following command:
*G
(2AHex & 47Hex)
The DK800 replies with the G/F / C/F value in the following format:
(STX) ggggg [pp] (ETB)
(STX)
ggggg
pp
(ETB)
= Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
= G/F / C/F value, 5 digits
No decimal point is expected, and the evaluation of the figures
is identical with the actual value.
= Check-sum
The check-sum is only transmitted if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check-sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
Programmer's manual
3 - 13
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.3.6. AF value
The entered afterflow-correction is also modified by the real afterflow. The new
afterflow-value can be retransmitted with the following command:
*V
(2AHex & 56Hex)
The DK800 replies
(STX) ggggg [pp] (ETB)
(STX)
ggggg
pp
(ETB)
= Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
= NL/AF value, 5 digits
No decimal point is expected, and the evaluation of the figures
is identical with the actual value.
= Check-sum
The check sum is only transmitted if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
2.2.3.7. Reading the nominal value
The nominal value can be read back with the following command:
*N
(2AHex & 4EHex)
The DK800 replies
(STX) nnnnn [pp] (ETB)
(STX)
nnnnn
pp
(ETB)
= Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
= nominal value, 5 digits
No decimal point is expected, and the evaluation of the figures
is identical with the actual value.
= Check-sum
The check sum is only transmitted if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
2.2.3.8. Reading the printout serial number
The
the
no.
The
6-digit serial number which will appear on the print-out can be read by using
*L-command. If the serial number is read after the print event, the readed
is by the value of 1 greater than the printed number.
printout serial no. can be read with the following command:
*L
(2AHex & 4CHex)
The DK800 replies
(STX) nnnnnn [pp] (ETB)
(STX)
nnnnnn
pp
(ETB)
= Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
= serial no., 6 digits
= Check-sum
The check sum is only transmitted if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
2.2.3.9. Reading some data together
The
format,
which
is
described
here,
is
" I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " , format-no. 1...7 is entered.
only
valid,
if
in
fct.
The command to read actual value, unit status, input/output, C/F value and AF
value together, is:
*S
(2AHex & 53Hex)
The DK800 replies:
(STX) [v] iiiiii n ss [ee aaaa] (GS) ggggg (GS) nnnnn (GS) [pp] (ETB)
3 - 14
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
(STX)
v
iiiiii
ss
ee
=
=
=
=
=
aaaa
=
(GS)
ggggg
=
=
(GS)
nnnnn
=
=
(GS)
pp
=
=
(ETB)
=
D-71394 Kernen
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Arithmetical sign (see chapter " Actual value and unit status " )
Actual value (see chapter " Actual value and unit status " )
Unit status (see chapter " Actual value and unit status " )
status of the inputs E7...E0 (see chapter " Actual value and unit
status " )
status of the outputs A15...A0 (see chapter " Actual value and
unit
status " )
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
C/F value, 5 digits
No decimal point is expected, and the evaluation of the figures
is identical with the actual value.
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
AF value, 5 digits
No decimal point is expected, and the evaluation of the figures
is identical with the actual value.
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Check-sum
The check sum is only transmitted if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
2.2.3.10. Reading balance parameters
The command described below serves the purpose of reading certain balance
parameters, so that the master connected to the interface can automatically adapt
to the balance settings.
The command is:
*P
(2AHex & 50Hex)
The DK800 answers in the following format:
(STX) zz (GS) ttttt (GS) mm (GS) aa (GS) ss (GS) ddd (GS) uuu (GS) [pp] (ETB)
(STX)
zzz
(GS)
ttttt
(GS)
mm
=
=
=
=
=
=
(GS)
aa
=
=
(GS)
ss
=
=
(GS)
ddd
=
=
(GS)
uuu
=
=
(GS)
pp
=
=
(ETB)
=
Programmer's manual
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Figure Leap, as set in the " ZIF.SPR " / " RESOLU " function
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Number of Pieces, as set in the " TEILEZ " / " NO.O.DIG " function
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Average
Value
Rate
of
Display,
as
set
in
the
" MITT.-W " / " AV.CYCL " function
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Average Value Rate of the Analogue Output and/or Process Data
Channel, as set in the " A.MITT.W " / " A.AV.CYC " function
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Standstill
Monitoring
Period,
as
set
in
the
" SS.ZEIT " / " SS.TIME " function
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Standstill Monitoring (Number of Pieces), as set in the
" SS.TEIL " / " SS.DIGT " function
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Standstill Monitoring (Number of Pieces per Average Value
Cycle), as set in the " SS.T./M.Z " / " SS.D./A.C " function
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Check-sum
The check sum is only transmitted if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
3 - 15
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.3.11. Transmission of actual value in NOVA DP format
The NOVA DP actual-value format described below is activated by entering the
format identification number 16 in the Function " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . The NOVA DP
format is mainly provided for large-size and remote displays operated from the
serial interface. Data is transferred without any exchange of identification
numbers in the following format:
(STX) m iiiiiii (ETX)
(STX)
m
= Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
= Mode identification letter
1 (31Hex) = gross
2 (32Hex) = net
iiiiiii = Weight with " - " sign and decimal point.
All characters are transferred as printable ASCII characters.
The lower-value figure is transmitted last.
The weight is transmitted as a right-justified figure, the
preceding zeroes being replaced with blanks (20Hex=Space). The
zeroes to the left of the decimal point form an exception here.
The decimal point (2EHex) is transmitted. Dependent zeroes are
transferred at the digit intervals 10, 20, 50, 100, etc.
If values are negative, they will be precede by a minus sign
(2DHex) to the left of the figure with the highest value. No
plus sign is transmitted.
(ETX)
= End of Text (13Hex=Ctrl-C)
3 - 16
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.4. Writing data
Data is transmitted in the same way as commands. After the unit has exchanged
identification code, data is transmitted. A data transmission begins with a
'!'=21Hex=33Dec or ' & gt; '=3EHex=62Dec, followed by a character, which defines the
nature of the data and the data contained between the characters STX and ETB. If
a 4 is contained in fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " , a 2 digit check-sum will be
expected after the data (but before ETB). Chapter " Calculation of the check-sum "
explains how the check sum is calculated.
Once the DK800 data has received the data it will examine the check-sum if this
has been preselected. If the data and the check-sum are correct, it will issue
ACK=06Hex=Ctrl-F for confirmation, and the data will be stored. Otherwise,
NAK=15Hex=Ctrl-U will be issued.
After issuing ACK or NAK, the DK800 will disconnect the transmission.
2.2.4.1. Nominal dosage value
The nominal dosage value is issued in the following format:
!S (STX) ggggg [pp] (ETB)
!
S
(STX)
ggggg
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
21Hex
53Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Nominal value, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " .
= Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
The required dosage value can be transmitted again after the start of dosing,
e.g. in order to make a slight correction to a moisture reading. However, this
can only be done during the time before the coarse / fine dosing becomes active.
2.2.4.2. C/F value (coarse/fine)
The G/F / C/F value is issued in the following format:
!G (STX) ggggg [pp] (ETB)
!
G
(STX)
ggggg
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
21Hex
47Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
G/F / C/F value, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " .
= Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
Programmer's manual
3 - 17
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.4.3. AF value (afterflow)
The NL/AF value is issued in the following format:
!V (STX) ggggg [pp] (ETB)
!
V
(STX)
ggggg
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
21Hex
56Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
NL/AF value, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " .
= Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
2.2.4.4.Nominal-dosing value, C/F value and AF value
The data for nominal value, G/F / C/F value and NL/AF value is issued in the
following format:
& gt; S
(STX) sssss (GS) ggggg (GS) nnnnn (GS) [pp] (ETB)
& gt;
S
(STX)
sssss
=
=
=
=
(GS)
ggggg
=
=
(GS)
nnnnn
=
=
(GS)
pp
=
=
(ETB)
=
3EHex
53Hex
Start of Text
nominal value, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " .
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
G/F / C/F value, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " .
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
NL/AF value, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " .
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
The parameters have to be transmitted before dosing starts. If the nominal-dosing
value should be transmitted again, after dosing has started, e.g. to correct the
amount a little bit after a moisture measurement, use the " !S " -command.
2.2.4.5. Tolerance threshold
The tolerance threshold is issued in the following format:
!T (STX) ggggg [pp] (ETB)
!
T
(STX)
ggggg
pp
(ETB)
3 - 18
=
=
=
=
21Hex
54Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Tolerance threshold, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " .
= Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
The issued value is entered in both, the memory for the + tolerance, and the
memory for the - tolerance. If different values for + and - tolerance should be
issued, use the " & gt; T ... " -command (see chapter " + tolerance, - tolerance and AF
value "
2.2.4.6. Max. AF value
The maximum NL/AF limit value for automatic afterflow correction is issued in the
following format:
!M (STX) ggggg [pp] (ETB)
!
M
(STX)
ggggg
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
21Hex
4DHex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Max. NL/AF limit value, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " .
= Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT "
. Chapter " Calculation of the check-sum " explains how the check
sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
2.2.4.7. + Tolerance, - tolerance and max. AF value
The data for + tolerance, - tolerance and max AF is issued in the following
format:
& gt; T (STX) ppppp (GS) mmmmm (GS) nnnnn (GS) [pp] (ETB)
& gt;
= 3EHex
T
=
54Hex
(STX)
= Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
ppppp
= + tolerance, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " .
(GS)
= Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
mmmmm
= - tolerance, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " .
(GS)
= Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
nnnnn
= max AF, 5 digits
No decimal point is issued; this is inserted in accordance with
the instructions in fct. " KOMMA " / " DEC.PT. " .
(GS)
= Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
pp
= Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT "
. Chapter " Calculation of the check-sum " explains how the check
sum is calculated.
(ETB)
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
With this
tolerance.
command,
Programmer's manual
it
is
possible
to
issue
different
values
for
the
+/-
3 - 19
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.4.8. Max. dosing time (dosing time monitoring)
The time value for dosing time monitoring is issued in the following format:
!Z (STX) 0tttt [pp] (ETB)
!
Z
(STX)
0
tttt
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
=
=
21Hex
5AHex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
30Hex
max. dosing time, 4 digits(in 100ms steps)
Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
The dosing time monitoring will be cancelled by entering 0 into the time-value.
2.2.4.9. Waiting time prior to taring
The transfer of the time value for the waiting time prior to taring is made in
the following format:
!Y (STX) 00ttt [pp] (ETB)
!
Y
(STX)
00
ttt
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
=
21Hex
59Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
2 characters, 30Hex
Waiting time prior to taring, 3-figure (in 100 ms steps, maximum
25.0 seconds)
= Check sum.
The check sum is only expected if a 4 is contained in the
Function " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . The section on " Calculating the
check sum " explains this in detail.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W).
2.2.4.10. Max. dos. time, wait. time prior to taring and wait. time prior to
registration
The transfer of the max. dosing time, the waiting time prior to taring and the
waiting time prior to registration is made in the following format:
& gt; Z (STX) 0mmmm (GS) 00ttt (GS) 00rrr (GS) [pp] (ETB)
& gt;
=
3EHex
Z
=
5AHex
(STX)
= Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
0
= 30Hex
mmmm
= max. dosing time, 4-figure (in 100ms steps)
(GS)
= Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
00
= 2 x 30Hex
ttt
= Waiting time prior to taring, 3-figure (in 100ms steps, maximum
25.0 seconds)
(GS)
= Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
00
= 2 x 30Hex
rrr
= Waiting time prior to taring, 3-figure (in 100ms steps, maximum
25.0 seconds)
(GS)
= Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
pp
= Check sum.
The check sum is only expected if a 4 is contained in the
Function " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . The section on " Calculating the
check sum " explains this in detail.
(ETB)
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W).
3 - 20
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.4.11. Dosing speed, coarse
If " DOSIER " / " DOSING " or " D.RAMPE " / " D.RAMP " has been selected in fct. " AN.MODE " ,
the analogue output is used for dosing speed. The value for dosing speed coarse
can be set with the following command:
!E (STX) 0ssss [pp] (ETB)
!
E
(STX)
0
ssss
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
=
=
21Hex
45Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
30Hex
Dosing speed coarse, 4 digits (in 0,1% steps of 10V or 20mA)
Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
2.2.4.12. Dosing speed, fine
If " DOSIER " / " DOSING " or " D.RAMPE " / " D.RAMP " has been selected in fct. " AN.MODE " ,
the analogue output is used for dosing speed. The value for dosing speed fine can
be set with the following command:
!F (STX) 0ssss [pp] (ETB)
!
F
(STX)
0
ssss
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
=
=
21Hex
46Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
30Hex
Dosing speed fine, 4 digits (in 0,1% steps of 10V or 20mA)
Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
2.2.4.13. Dosing speed, coarse and fine and percental share of ramp
The data for the setting of the analogue dosing speed is issued in the following
format:
& gt; V (STX) 0gggg (GS) 0ffff (GS) 000rr (GS) [pp] (ETP)
& gt;
V
(STX)
0
gggg
(GS)
0
ffff
(GS)
000
rr
(GS)
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
3EHex
56Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
30Hex
Dosing speed coarse, 4 digits (in 0,1% steps of 10V or 20mA)
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
30Hex
Dosing speed fine, 4 digits (in 0,1% steps of 10V or 20mA)
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
3 x 30Hex
percental share of ramp, 2 digits (in 1% steps)
Group Separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
Programmer's manual
3 - 21
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.4.14. Threshold level for limit switch
The threshold level for the limit switch (output A9) is transmitted in the
following format:
!W (STX) ggggg [pp] (ETB)
!
W
(STX)
ggggg
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
21Hex
57Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Threshold Level for Limit Switch, 5 figures
Decimal points are not transmitted, but automatically inserted
in the " KOMMA " function, as instructed.
= Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
2.2.4.15. Issue to control output
If " ST.AUSG " / " CTRL-O " has been selected with fct. " DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " , the status
of the outputs A0...A7 can be set with the following command:
!O (STX) 000hl [pp] (ETB)
!
O
(STX)
000
h
l
pp
(ETB)
3 - 22
=
=
=
=
=
21Hex
4FHex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
'000' (3 characters 30Hex)
Required status for output A7...A4
27 = 0 / 26 = 0 / 25 = 1 / 24 = 1
23 = output A7
22 = output A6
21 = output A5
20 = output A4
= Required status for output A3...A0
27 = 0 / 26 = 0 / 25 = 1 / 24 = 1
23 = output A3
22 = output A2
21 = output A1
20 = output A0
= Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.4.16. Display text
On the DK800 - display 6 digits (letters, figures, special signs)
indicated. All signs marked with
in the table below are not available.
can
be
/
& lt;
=
& gt;
?
6x 7x
=
This characters
can't be
displayed !
↓
(
)
*
+
%
&
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
5x
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#
4x
!
3x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
2x
Space
0x 1x
x0
x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6
x7
x8
x9
xA
xB
xC
xD
xE
xF
↑
_
Tab.1 Character table
The transmission of the text starts with the following command:
!K (STX) dddddd [pp] (ETB)
!
K
(STX)
dddddd
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
21Hex
4BHex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
6 characters of text. To illuminate the decimal point of the
current digit, add a value of 80Hex (Bit 27 is set) to the ASCII
character according to Tab.1.
= Check-sum
The check sum will only be expected if a 4 is contained in
fct. " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . Chapter " Calculation of the checksum " explains how the check sum is calculated.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
Displaying of the text will be finished either by the command !L, or by an internal display-event or by an operation on the front keyboard.
2.2.4.17. Control functions (Keyboard lock / Auto-calibr.)
The !U-command is used for control functions.
The keyboard lock/release of the DK800 can be effected by the following commands:
!U (STX) d [pp] (ETB)
!
U
(STX)
d
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
21Hex
55Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
0 (30Hex) → release keyboard
1 (31Hex) → lock keyboard
= Check sum
The check sum is only expected if a 4 is contained in the
Function " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . The section on " Calculating the
check sum " explains this in detail.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
The keyboard lock function (caused by a serial command) is always cancelled after
the unit has been reset.
Programmer's manual
3 - 23
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
The status of the serial keyboard lock function can be checked in the 2nd Byte of
the unit status, the status of the lock-input (E1) in the 2nd Byte of the input
status.
Controlling of the auto-calibration timing can be done by the following command:
!U (STX) d [pp] (ETB)
!
U
(STX)
d
21Hex
55Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
2 (32Hex) → force zero- or gain-calibration, set tCalIntervall=100s
3 (33Hex) → force zero- and gain-calibration, set tCalIntervall=300s
= Check sum
The check sum is only expected if a 4 is contained in the
Function " I.FORMT " / " TR.FORMT " . The section on " Calculating the
check sum " explains this in detail.
= End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
pp
=
=
=
=
(ETB)
The timing of the auto-calibration can be influenced externally.
By sending the command " !U(STX)3[pp](ETB) " Zero- and Gain-Cal. is initiated and
tCalIntervall is set to 300s. After tCalIntervall is over, Zero- and Gain-Cal.
is initiated again. While falling under the empty output (falling weights,
emptying the weigher) Zero- and Gain-Cal. are initiated, too and
tCalIntervall is set to 300s.
By sending the command " !U(STX)2[pp](ETB) " Zero-Cal. will be initiated and
tCalIntervall will be set back to 100s.
The timing of the auto-calibration can also be affected by E3 input (see part 2,
" line up and service manual " , chapter " Auto-Zero and Auto-Calibration " ).
2.2.4.18. Unit test
The command:
!A (STX) m abcd [pp] (ETB)
is reserved for the unit test in the manufacturer's works.
If m=1 (31Hex), the digital outputs (A0 ... A15) can be set.
Pre-condition:
" DATEN.A " / " DATA-O " = " ST.AUSG " / " CTRL-O "
and all other outputs (e.g. empty / over-full) = Off.
A15 ... 12, b
A11... 8, c
A7...4, d
A3...0 (as with the command !0).
a
If m=2 (32Hex), a voltage (or current) can be issued on the D/A converter without
any dosing cycle.
Pre-conditions:
AN.AUSG/AN.OUTP = 0-10V or 0/4-20 mA
AN.MODE/AN.MODE = DOSIER/DOSING
abcd = 1000
100.0% = 10V / 20 mA (identical with the command !E / !F).
If m=3, (33Hex), individual Bits of the outputs A0...A15 can be set separately or
reset. However, it should be noted that during setting / resetting conflicts can
arise with the normal operating programmes of the DK800.
Pre-conditions:
None.
a = 0 (30Hex) → reset individual bit
a = 1 (31Hex) → set individual bit
b = always 0 (30Hex)
c = Bit no. 101
d = Bit no. 100
3 - 24
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.5. Writing / reading unit configuration
If an MS-DOS compatible PC is available, the whole configuration data can be
transferred to the PC by means of the Function " K.DAT.S " / " C.DTA.WR " or to the
DK800 by means of the Function " K.DAT.L " / " C.DTA.RD " .
The PC programme runs under MS-DOS and requires a PC with:
MS-DOS, version 4.0 or higher
386 CPU or higher
serial (COM2) standard interface (RS232 or RS422/485).
A 3½ " Diskette with the write/read programme " DKCONF " can be supplied free of
charge on request. The serial connecting cable required is shown in Fig. 2a.
The functions " writing / reading unit configuration " are not available in the
Profibus-DP-version !
2.2.5.1. Writing the unit configuration
After the Function " K.DAT.S " / " C.DTA.WR " has been selected, the " Net " key must be
pressed. " START? " will then appear in the display and the " + " and " - " keys will
flash. It is now possible either to break off by means of the " 0 " key or else to
press the " + " and " - " keys simultaneously. " WARTEN " / " WAIT " will appear in the
display, and the PC programme " DKCONF " will start (in " Read " mode). When the PC
programme has finished running, " K.DAT.S " / " C.DTA.WR " will appear again in the
DK800 display.
Instead of using the " DKCONF " PC programme, it is possible to communicate
directly with the DK800. When " WARTEN " / " WAIT " has appeared in the display, the
master gives the following commands:
*X
(2AHex & 58Hex)
The DK800 replies in the following format:
(STX) vv..v rr..r tt (GS) 00 (STX) xx..x (GS) pp (STX) yy..y (GS) pp (ETB)
(STX)
vv..v
rr..r
tt
(GS)
00
(STX)
xx..x
(GS)
pp
(STX)
yy...y
(GS)
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Version string, 2 to 11 printable ASCII characters
Revision string, 2 to 11 printable ASCII characters
Type-string, 2 to 5 printable ASCII-characters
Group separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
2 character, 30Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Configuration data, Part 1, 2 to 251 printable ASCII characters
Group separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Check sum for Part 1, this check sum cannot be switched off
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Configuration data, Part 2, 2 to 251 printable ASCII characters
Group separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Check sum for Part 2, this check sum cannot be switched off
End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W)
Data xx...x and yy...y contain a memory illustration of the configuration data in
the internal format of the 87C196KD processor and are not always compatible
within the various versions and revisions of the unit. For this reason, the
version and revision strings must also be sent in order to allow the master to
identify the data.
Programmer's manual
3 - 25
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.5.2. Reading unit configuration
For the data to be read into the DK800, Switch 2 in the switch block on the rear
of the unit must be in the downward position as well as Switch 1.
After the Function " K.DAT.L " / " C.DTA.RD " has been selected, the " Net " key must be
pressed. " START? " will then appear in the display and the " + " and " - " keys will
flash. It is now possible either to break off by means of the " 0 " key or else to
press the " + " and " - " keys simultaneously. " WARTEN " / " WAIT " will appear in the
display, and the PC programme " DKCONF " will start (in " Write " mode). When the PC
programme has finished running, the DK800 will carry out a reset cycle in order
to adapt itself to the new configuration.
Instead of using the " DKCONF " PC programme, it is possible to communicate
directly with the DK800. When " WARTEN " / " WAIT " has appeared in the display, the
master gives the following commands:
!X (STX) vv..v rr..r tt (GS) 00 (STX) xx..x (GS) pp (STX) yy..y (GS) pp
(ETB)
!
X
vv..v
rr..r
tt
(GS)
00
(STX)
xx...x
(GS)
pp
(STX)
yy...y
(GS)
pp
(ETB)
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
21Hex
58Hex
Version string, 2 to 11 printable ASCII characters
Revision string, 2 to 11 printable ASCII characters
Type-string, 2 to 5 printable ASCII-characters
Group separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
2 characters, 30Hex
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Configuration data, Part 1, 2 to 251 printable ASCII characters
Group separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Check sum for Part 1, this check sum cannot be switched off
Start of Text (02Hex=Ctrl-B)
Configuration data, Part 2, 2 to 251 printable ASCII characters
Group separator (1DHex=Ctrl-])
Check sum for Part 2, this check sum cannot be switched off
End of Transmission Block (17Hex=Ctrl-W).
If the version and revision string does not tally with the software version and
revision installed in the DK800, it will refuse to read the subsequent data and
will issue the message NAK.
Data xx...x and yy...y container a memory illustration of the configuration data
in the internal format of the 87C196KD processor.
After the ETB characters have been received, the DK800 will carry out a reset
cycle to adapt itself to the new configuration.
3 - 26
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2.2.6. Summary of serial functions
This summary does not include the exchange of unit identification code.
Commands and data → DK800
Master
DK800 (Slave)
?
(STX)[v]iiiiiinss[eeaa Request actual value
aa][pp](ETB)
(identical with *I)
!0
!A
!B
!C
!D
!E
!F
!G
!H
!I
!J
!K
!L
!M
!N
!O
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(STX)mabcd[cc](ETB)
(STX)0ssss[pp](ETB)
(STX)0ssss[pp](ETB)
(STX)ggggg[pp](ETB)
(STX)dddddd[pp](ETB)
(STX)ggggg[pp](ETB)
(STX)000hl[pp](ETB)
!P
(ACK/NAK)
!Q
!R
!S (STX)ggggg[pp](ETB)
!T (STX)ggggg[pp](ETB)
!U (STX)d[cc](ETB)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
!W (STX)ggggg[pp](ETB)
(ACK/NAK)
!V (STX)ggggg[pp](ETB)
(ACK/NAK)
!X (STX)xx..x[pp](ETB)
(ACK/NAK)
!Y (STX)00ttt[pp](ETB)
!Z (STX)0tttt[pp](ETB)
& gt; S(STX)sssss(GS)ggggg(GS)
nnnnn(GS)[pp](ETB)
& gt; T(STX)ppppp(GS)mmmmm(GS)
nnnnn(GS)[pp](ETB)
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
Description
Setting zero
check I/O lines
Gross
Interrupt dosing cycle
Start dosing cycle
Dosing speed coarse
Dosing speed fine
write G/F / C/F value
high resolution
clear dosage actual value
premature end of dosing
Display 6 char's of text
Clear displayed text
Max. NL/AF (afterflow)
Net (taring)
write to control output
Initiate print-out on 2nd
serial interface (optional)
Tolerance acknowledgement
Reset
Nominal value
Tolerance
control functions
Schaltschwelle für
Grenzkontakt schreiben
write NL/AF value (afterfl.)
config.-data (Master→DK)
not available with Profibus-DP
interface
(ACK/NAK)
(ACK/NAK)
& gt; V(STX)0gggg(GS)0ffff(GS)
000rr(GS)[pp](ETB)
(ACK/NAK)
& gt; Z(STX)0mmmm(GS)00ttt(GS)
00rrr(GS)[pp](ETB)
(ACK/NAK)
Programmer's manual
delay before taring
Max. dosing time
Nominal value, G/F / C/F
value and NL/AF value
+ tolerance, -tolerance and
max. NL/AF
Dosing speed, coarse/fine
and percental share of ramp
Max. dosing speed, waiting
times prior to dosing and
prior to registration
3 - 27
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Data ← DK800
Master
DK800 (Slave)
*A
(STX)01aaa[pp](ETB)
Description
only for internal data-exchange with
Profibus-DP interface
*B
*C
*G
*H
*I
*K
*L
*N
*P
*S
*V
*X
(STX)[v]iiiiiinss
[eeaaaa][pp](ETB)
(STX)cccccccc ppss
[pp](ETB)
Request actual-gross value
codierten Istwert
(Brutto/Netto) anfordern
Read G/F / C/F value (coarse
(STX)rrrrr[pp](ETB)
/ fine)
(STX)[v]iiiiiin
High-speed request for
[pp](ETB)
actual value
(STX)[v]iiiiiinss[eeaa Request actual value
aa][pp](ETB)
(identical with ?)
(CAN) or
only for internal data-exchange with
(STX)[v]iiiiiin
Profibus-DP interface
ssssssss[pp](ETB)
(STX)nnnnnn[pp](ETB)
Read printout serial no.
(STX)sssss[pp](ETB)
Read nominal value
(STX)zzz(GS)ttttt(GS)
mm(GS)aa(GS)ss(GS)ddd
Waagen Parameter lesen
(GS)uuu(GS)[pp](ETB)
(STX)[v]iiiiiinss
Read actual value, G/F / C/F
[eeaaaa](GS)ggggg(GS)
value and NL/AF value
nnnnn(GS)[pp](ETB)
(STX)rrrrr[pp](ETB)
Read NL/AF value
Config.-data (DK→Master)
(STX)xx..x[pp](ETB)
not available with Profibus-DP
interface
Tab.2 Summary of serial functions
3 - 28
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
3. Communications procedures for the dosage sequence
The communications procedures described below are only an example. Individual
blocks can be left out, but the sequence should be maintained if at all possible,
especially in reading / erasing the actual value.
Start
ready to dose ?
(e.g. weigher
closed )
no
yes
DK800: !S + nominal value
DK800: !V + afterflow reserve
DK800: !M + max. afterflow
DK800: !G + coarse/fine reserve
DK800: !T + tolerance
DK800: !E + dos. speed (coarse)
DK800: !F + dos. speed (fine)
DK800: !Y + wait.time prior to taring
DK800: !Z + max. dosing time
set component output
DK800: !D (start dosing)
a
Fig.5a
Programmer's manual
3 - 29
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
a
DK800: *I... (read act. val. / status)
visualise act. val. / status
tol.-report
from DK800 ?
no
yes
operator request: tol. ok ?
tol. accepted ?
no
yes
scrap batch
DK800: !Q (acknowledge tol.)
no
ready-report
from DK800 ?
yes
DK800: *I... (read act. val. / status)
display act. value
DK800: !I (clear act. val. memory)
DK800: *V... (read back afterflow)
DK800: *G... (read back coarse/fine)
store act.val, afterfl., c/f
End (next comp. or end
of dos., open weigher)
Fig.5b
3 - 30
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Index
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Tab.
Tab.
1 RS232 interface .................................. 2
2a RS232 cable ..................................... 3
2b printer cable ................................... 3
3 RS485 interface .................................. 4
4a RS485 interface termination ..................... 4
4b RS485 interface termination ..................... 5
5a Dosage sequence, communications procedures ...... 29
5b Dosage sequence, communications procedures ...... 30
1 Character table .................................. 23
2 Summary of serial functions ...................... 28
Actual dosage weight ..................................... 9
Actual value and unit status, reading .................... 11
Actual value, (quick check) .............................. 13
Actual-gross value and unit status ....................... 12
AF value ................................................. 18
AF value (afterflow), writing ............................ 18
AF value, reading ........................................ 14
Analogue output .......................................... 13
Analogue output, calculation of averages ................. 13
Arithmetical sign ........................................ 11
Auto-calibration ......................................... 23
average rate (analogue output) ........................... 13
C/F value ................................................ 18
C/F value (coarse/fine), writing ......................... 17
C/F value, reading ....................................... 13
calculation of averages (analogue output) ................ 13
Calculation of the check-sum ............................. 10
Character NUL ............................................ 7
Check-sum ................................................ 10
Clear displayed text ..................................... 9
Clear dosage actual-value memory ......................... 9
Command !0 ............................................... 7
Command !A + (data) ...................................... 24
Command !B ............................................... 8
Command !C ............................................... 8
Command !D ............................................... 8
Command !E + (data) ...................................... 21
Command !F + (data) ...................................... 21
Command !G + (data) ...................................... 17
Command !H ............................................... 8
Command !I ............................................... 9
Command !J ............................................... 9
Command !K + (data) ...................................... 23
Command !L ............................................... 9
Command !M + (data) ...................................... 19
Command !N ............................................... 8
Command !O + (data) ...................................... 22
Command !Q ............................................... 9
Command !R ............................................... 10
Command !S + (data) ...................................... 17
Command !T + (data) ...................................... 18
Command !U + (data) ...................................... 23
Command !V + (data) ...................................... 18
Command !W + (data,...) ................................ 22
Command !X + (data) ...................................... 26
Command !Y + (data) ...................................... 20
Command !Z + (data) ...................................... 20
Command *A ............................................... 28
Command *B ............................................... 12
Command *C ............................................... 12
Command *G ............................................... 13
Command *H ............................................... 13
Command *I ............................................... 11
Command *K ............................................... 28
Command *L ............................................... 14
Programmer's manual
21
13
24
3 - 31
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Command *N ............................................... 14
Command *P ............................................... 15
Command *S ............................................... 14
Command *V ............................................... 14
Command *X ............................................... 25
Command & gt; S + (data,...) ................................ 18
Command & gt; T + (data,...) ................................ 19
Command & gt; V + (data,...) ................................ 21
Command & gt; Z + (data,...) ................................ 20
Command ? ................................................ 11
Commands ................................................. 7
Communication faults ..................................... 10
Communications procedures for the dosage sequence ........ 29
configuration data ....................................... 25
Control functions (Keyboard lock / Auto-calibr.) ......... 23
correction of nominal value .............................. 17
Data entry ............................................... 1
Data Output .............................................. 22
decimal places ........................................... 13
Display text ............................................. 23
Dosage sequence, Communications procedures ............... 29
Dosing cycle ............................................. 8 9
Dosing speed, coarse ..................................... 21
Dosing speed, fine ....................................... 21
Dosing speed, percental share of ramp .................... 21
Dosing time monitoring ................................... 20
Error .................................................... 1
Error Message ............................................ 1
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
Fkt.
.................................................... 12
" AN.MODE " ........................................... 21
" C.DTA.RD " .......................................... 25
" C.DTA.WR " .......................................... 25
" COM.NO. " ........................................... 7 11
" DATA-O " ............................................ 22
" DATEN.A " ........................................... 22
" DEC.PT. " ........................................... 17 18
" DOSING " ............................................ 8
" KOMMA " ............................................. 17
" TR.FORMT " .......................................... 11 12
17 18
23 24
" TR.MODE " ........................................... 7 11
.................................................... 12 22
" AN.MODE " ........................................... 21
" COM.NR. " ........................................... 11
" COM.Nr. " ........................................... 7
" DOSIER " ............................................ 8
" I.FORMT " ........................................... 11 12
17 18
23 24
" I.U.MODE " .......................................... 7 11
" K.DAT.L " ........................................... 25
" K.DAT.S " ........................................... 25
" KOMMA " ............................................. 17 18
19
13
19
14
20
15
21
16
22
13
19
14
20
15
21
16
22
19
Gross .................................................... 8
Identification code ...................................... 7
Input .................................................... 11
Interrupting dosing cycle ................................ 8
intervals ................................................ 13
Issue to control output .................................. 22
Keyboard lock function ................................... 23
Keyboard, F Key, Measuring mode .......................... 1
max. AF value ............................................ 19
3 - 32
Programmer's manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Max. AF value, writing ................................... 19
Max. dosing time ......................................... 20
max. dosing time ......................................... 20
negative value ........................................... 13
Negative weight values ................................... 11
Net ...................................................... 8
Nominal dosage value ..................................... 17
Nominal dosage value, writing ............................ 17
nominal value, reading ................................... 14
Nominal-dosing value ..................................... 18
NOVA DP Data-format ...................................... 16
Output ................................................... 12
Overload ................................................. 11
22
13
Premature end of dosing .................................. 9
Profibus-DP interface .................................... 2 25
PTB ...................................................... 12
pull-up-resistor ......................................... 4
Reading balance parameters ............................... 15
Reading coded actual gross/net value and device status ... 12
Reading data ............................................. 11
Reading some data together ............................... 14
Reading the printout serial number ....................... 14
Reading unit configuration data (from the PC) ............ 26
Reset .................................................... 8 10
Resolution, 1/10 d Res. ................................ 8
RS232 interface .......................................... 2
RS422 interface .......................................... 2 6
RS485 interface .......................................... 2 4
27
28
23
26
Selection of interface ................................... 2
Serial communication ..................................... 7
Serial interface ......................................... 2
Setting zero ............................................. 7
Start of a dosing cycle .................................. 8
Status ................................................... 11
Summary of serial functions .............................. 27
Switch Block ............................................. 26
Taring ................................................... 8 11
Taring, Waiting time prior to t. ....................... 20
Temporarily increasing resolution ........................ 8
termination-resistor ..................................... 4
Threshold level for limit switch ......................... 22
tolerance + .............................................. 19
tolerance - .............................................. 19
Tolerance acknowledgement ................................ 9
Tolerance threshold, writing ............................. 18
Transmission of actual value in NOVA DP format ........... 16
Unit identification code ................................. 7
Unit test ................................................ 24
waiting
Waiting
waiting
Writing
Writing
time prior to registration ....................... 20
time prior to taring ............................. 20
time prior to taring ............................. 20
data ............................................. 17
the unit configuration (to the PC) ............... 25
Programmer's manual
3 - 33
DK800
SETUP LIST
Vers. 01.01 Rev. 48 Date 01.03.01
Ser.-Nr.: _______________________________ Inp. Range:
___________________________
Type:
______________________________________________________________________
Remarks:
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Fct.
no. Displayed
text Description Dimension or
Selection Factory
setting Actual
setting
05 N U L.C L R Clear zero point memory
06 Z.S E T Setting zero facility NONE ? WITH
07 Z.A L I G N Zero continuation facility NONE ? WITH
10 E M P T Y Empty, threshold kg
11 E M P T Y.H Empty, hysteresis kg
12 E M P T Y.D Empty, delay time s
13 L I M.S W P Limit value for limit switch kg
14 L I M.S P.H Limit switch, hysteresis kg
17 N O M.V A L Nominal value kg
18 C / F Coarse / fine kg
19 A F Afterflow kg
20 T O L. + positive tolerance kg
21 T O L. - negative tolerance kg
22 M A X.A F Max. afterflow kg
23 D L Y.T A R Wait time before taring s
25 D O S.T M.C Dosing time monitoring s
26 D L Y.R E G Wait time before registration s
27 D S.C O A R Dosing speed coarse %
28 D S.F I N E Dosing speed fine %
29 R A M P Ramp / percental share %
39 I T E M.N O Item no. (protocol-printer)
40 L F.B.P R I Empty lines after printing
41 P R I N T R Printing on/off NONE ? WITH
44 R E V.N O. Software revision no.
48
45 R E V.D A T Software revision date
01.03.01
47 I - T E S T Test of input circuits
48 O - T E S T Test of output circuits
49 A / D - C.T Test of A/D and D/A-converters
50 A P P R.N O Approval no. NAW ? SWA ? SWE
51 A.C A L. Auto calibration mode NONE ? ZERO ? Z.+GAIN
52 A / D - I.R A/D-Converter input range UNIPOL ? BIPOL
53 R E S O L U Display division Digit
54 N O.O.D I G Number of digits Digit
55 D E C.P T. Decimal point
56 A V.C Y C L no. of average cycles 2n
58 A D J.W G T Calibration weight kg
59 A D J. 0 Calibrate Zero
60 A D J.M A X Calibrate maximum
61 0 - S H F T Zero shift
Fct.
no. Displayed
text Description Dimension or
Selection Factory
setting Actual
? REVERS
77 N E G.W G. negative weigher NONE ? WITH
78 P W R.R S T power on reset mode NONE ? WITH
79 L I M.S P.M mode for " limit switch " GROS.? ? GROS.? ? NET.? ? NET.?
? NONE
80 E / O L - O Outputs " empty " and " overload " NONE ? +E+OL ? +E-OL
81 D A T A - O Data output NONE ? MUX ? 2-STP ? 2-STP.1 ? CTRL-O
82 B C D.C L K BCD-clock-time ms
83 E X T.T A R Taring from ext. (via input) NONE ? WITH
84 D O S I N G Dosing mode NONE ? C/F ? D+C ? 1D
85 T O L.C H K Tolerance-check NONE ? +/- ? ONLY+
86 R E G.M O D Registration mode TIME ? STND.ST ? TM+STS
87 A F.C O R R Afterflow correction NONE ? ONLY.AF ? AF+C/F
88 D.S T A R T mode for " dosing start " ONLY S ú INP.4+S
89 T.Q U I T mode for " tolerance quit " ONLY S ? INP.3+S
90 T A R.D O S Taring before dosing NONE ? WITH/G ? WITH/N
91 D.E N D.D L Dos.end (outp.) delay s
92 Z.S E T.E N Release zero point NONE ? WITH
93 Z.A L G.E N Release zero continuation NONE ? WITH
94 E X.Z.S E T External zero setting enable ONLY S ? INP.0+S
95 P U.A C T.V Measuring transm., act. value 60/V
96 P U.L I M. SYMBOL 175 \f " Symbol " Measuring transm., low. limit 60/V
97 P U.L I M. SYMBOL 173 \f " Symbol " Measuring transm., upper lim. 60/V
98 B R I G H T Brightness variation of display
99 K B.L O C K Keyboard lock mode ONLY S ? INP.1+S
100 C O M.T Y P Serial interface NONE ? RS232 ? RS485 ? RS422 ? PROFI.B
101 C O M.N O. Device communication address
102 C O M.M O D Parity bit / data length 8N1 ? 8M1 ? 8S1 ? 8E1 ? 7E1
103 B A U D - R Baud-rate Bd
104 T R.M O D E Data transmission mode
105 T R.F O M T Data transmission format
106 D I M.S G N Printer, dimension character NONE ? g ? kg ? t ? lb ? l
? N ? kN
107 P.I N T L K Printer, output interlock NONE ? MIN ? ~ ? MIN+~
108 P.A C K N. Printer, outp. acknowl. signal NONE ? OUTP.8
109 P R.M O D E Printer, printout-image G/N.1 ? G+T+N.3 ? G+T+N.1
Fct.
no. Displayed
text Description Dimension or
Selection Factory
setting Actual
setting
110 L.- C O R R Linearity correction of weigher NONE ? WITH
111 C O R R.S.1 Correction point 1 kg
112 C O R R.S.2 Correction point 2 kg
113 C O R R.S.3 Correction point 3 kg
114 C O R R.S.4 Correction point 4 kg
115 C O R R.S.5 Correction point 5 kg
120 C.S.E N A B Correction point input enable
121 A D J.C.S.1 Adjust correction point 1
122 A D J.C.S.2 Adjust correction point 2
123 A D J.C.S.3 Adjust correction point 3
124 A D J.C.S.4 Adjust correction point 4
125 A D J.C.S.5 Adjust correction point 5
133 N.V.S R C Nominal value source INTERN ? AN.INP
134 A.I.A D J.0 Zero adjust of analog input
135 A.I.A D J.M Range adjust of analog input
136 A.O.R N G.2 2nd range of analog output
137 N E G.R N G negative display range NORMAL ? EXTEND
138 U L D.E R R Mode on underload condition UL=OL ? NONE
139 C.D T A.W R Write configuration data
140 C.D T A.R D Read configuration data
143 I A P V.0.L Int. zero adjust value, low
144 I A P V.0.H Int. zero adjust value, high
145 I A P V.M.L Int. full-scale adj. val., low
146 I A P V.M.H Int. full-scale adj. val., high
148 D E L.A L L Clear all memory
The function 50 is only available in units based on
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
The functions 69 and 137 are not available in units based on
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
Analog module
Closed
jumpers Description Factory
setting actual
setting
J28: none Input range: 10 V
J28: 7-8 Input range: 1 V
J28: 5-6 Input range: 100 mV
J28: 1-2 Input range: 50 mV
J28: 1-2 & 5-6 Input range: 33,3 mV
J28: 3-4 Input range: 20 mV
J28: 3-4 & 5-6 Input range: 16,6 mV
J28: 1-2 & 3-4 Input range: 14,3 mV
J28: 1-2 & 3-4 & 5-6 Input range: 12,5 mV
J26: 1-2 Resistance thermometer supply: 1 mA
J26: 2-3 Resistance thermometer supply: 100 µA
Interface module
Closed
jumpers Description Factory
setting actual
setting
J200: 1-2
J201: 1-3 & 2-4 Analog output: 0 ... 10 V
J200: 2-3
J201: 3-5 & 4-6 Analog output: 0/4 ... 20 mA
J234: 1-2 J235: 1-2
J236: 1-2 J237: 1-2
J238: 1-2 J239: 1-2
J240: 1-2 Serial interface: RS 422/485
J234: 2-3 J235: 2-3
J236: 2-3 J237: 2-3
J238: 2-3 J239: 2-3
J240: 2-3 Serial interface: RS 232
J230: 1-2 RS 422/485 transm.: resistance
J231: 1-2 RS 422/485 receiver: resistance
J232: 1-2 J233: 1-2 RS 422/485 receiver: Pull-up resistance
Main board
Closed
jumpers Description Factory
setting actual
setting
J52: 1-2 J151: 1-2 DK85 is interface module
J52: 2-3 J151: 2-3 no interface module or
DK82 is interface module
J53: none Watch-Dog monitoring: none
J53: 1-2 Watch-Dog monitoring: with
J54: none Data protection battery: off (only for test)
J54: 1-2 Data protection battery: on
J120: none X3-13 with external supply (Gnd)
J120: 1-2 X3-13 SYMBOL 171 \f " Symbol " internal Gnd
J121: none X3-1 with external supply (+24V)
J121: 1-2 X3-1 SYMBOL 171 \f " Symbol " internal +24V (max. 100mA)
MESOMATIC Automation und Messtechnik GmbH D-71394 Kernen
SETUP LIST DK800 - Pg. PAGE 4 of NUMPAGES 4 -
Addition to the
Instruction manual
DK 800
with
Profibus-DP interface
Version 01.01
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
Siemensstr. 36
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
Tel. (0)7151 / 94902-0
Fax (0)7151 / 43946
Copyright © 1999 - 2001
by
Mesomatic GmbH
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
date of issue 15.02.2001
Table of contents
Preface ............................................................. 1
1. The Profibus-DP Interface ........................................ 1
1.1. Hardware requirements ........................................ 1
1.2. Connection ................................................... 1
2. Parameterisation of the DK800 .................................... 2
2.1. Profibus Parameter ........................................... 2
2.2. Device Parameters ............................................ 2
3. Parameterisation of the Profibus-DP-Master .......................
3.1. Planning .....................................................
3.2. GSD-File .....................................................
3.3. Consistent reading and writing ...............................
2
2
2
2
4. The
4.1.
4.2.
4.3.
2
3
5
6
data channels ................................................
Process data channel for inputs (identification 0x98) ........
Bi-directional channel (identification 0xFF) .................
Shortened bi-directional channel (identification 0xBF) .......
5. Slave diagnosis .................................................. 7
6. The expanded identification (0xC0, 0xFF, 0xFF) ................... 7
Index ............................................................... 8
- I -
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Preface
This operating instruction is valid for appliances of the type DK800 with
Profibus-DP interface. Only the differences to the base appliance with a serial
RS interface are described here. All functions not described here should be taken
from the 3 part instructions for the base appliance:
• Part 1: User handbook
• Part 2: Set up and service handbook
• Part 3: Programmer's handbook
General note: If two function-names are separated by a " / " , the name in front of
the " / " is used in the german unit-version, the name after the " / " is used in the
english unit-version.
1. The Profibus-DP Interface
1.1. Hardware requirements
To operate the DK800 with the Profibus-DP interface the optional DK800-ProfibusController card (DK821) must be fitted instead of the standard RS232/485-interface card (DK82/DK85).
1.2. Connection
The bus connection of the Profibus interface is designed in accordance with the
Profibus-Norm DIN EN 50170 as a 9-pole SUB-D plug. The plug is built into the
rear wall of the DK800 and marked with an X6.
A bus connector connects the bus cable to the DK800. Error free switch-off and
switch-on of the DK800 in constant operation is guaranteed due to the construction of the bus connector (internal through-wiring of the data signals), without
having any impairing effects on other bus participants. Bus connectors come in
varying protection systems, designs and with or without terminating resistors.
The cable sided bus connector is not included in the delivery of the DK800!
In accordance with DIN EN 50170, the 9 pole SUB-D plug is allocated as follows:
X6-Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signal
Shield
M24
RxD/TxD-P
CNTR-P
DGND
VP
P24
RxD/TxD-N
CNTR-N
Description
Shield / signal ground (identical with connector flange)
open, not allocated
Receive-/Send-data Plus
Control signal for repeater
Reference ground
+5V supply for the terminating resistors
open, not allocated
Receive-/Send-data Minus
open, not allocated
For devices which are operated with baud rates exceeding 1.5 MBaud, due to the
capacitive load of the participant and with that the generated line reflection,
it should be noted that the cable sided attachment connector is fitted with
integrated series inductances.
For baud rates exceeding 1.5 MBaud, no stub cables may be used to the DK800! The
line between the attachment connector and the field device (DK800) is designated
as a stub line. Experience has shown that stub cables are only admissible for
very low baud-rates (to 93,75kBaud). For example; the total stub cable length,
created by adding all the single length stub cables together, must not exceed 6
metres at 93,75kBaud when using a category A cable (30pF/m). In cases where the
use of stub cables cannot be avoided, you may not use a bus terminator.
Bus terminator resistors terminates the bus cable at both ends with the wave
impedance of the cable. Through the wiring - prescribed in DIN EN 50170 - of 3
single resistors it is ensured that
• a defined static no-operation potential is set to the bus lines,
• Line reflection is minimised and
• an almost constant load response is set on the bus.
Operating instruction (Supplement)
DK800 with Profibus-DP interface
-1-
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2. Parameterisation of the DK800
2.1. Profibus Parameter
Enter " PROFI.B " into the function " COM.TYP " of the DK800. Several of the
RS232/485 functions (e.g. COM.MOD, BAUD-R etc.) are then not available.
The 3 character Profibus address is entered using the " COM.NR " / " COM.NO " function;
it can not be altered via the Master. The address is passed to the DK800Profibus-Controller through the internal serial interface of the DK800. After the
new Profibus address has been entered, the DK800 logs off from the Profibus and
attempts to contact the Profibus Master using the new Profibus address.
Profibus communication is only possible when the DK800 has started, that means
data is shown on the display.
The DK800-Profibus-Controller can automatically recognise the baud rates and supports baud rates from 9.6kBaud up to 12MBaud.
2.2. Device Parameters
Actualisation of the process data channel data contents is carried out using the
average parameter value rate for the analogue output of the DK800. This also applies if the analogue output is not on hand as hardware. Therefore, the analogue
output must also be activated in the function
" AN.AUSG " / " AN.OUTP. "
when no
analogue output is fitted.
3. Parameterisation of the Profibus-DP-Master
3.1. Planning
To plan a Profibus-DP net, all device data subscription files (GSD-files) of all
bus participants must be read into the Profibus master configuration program. Depending on the Master software used, it is possible that a command " read/save "
and/or " translate " must subsequently be entered.
3.2. GSD-File
The device data subscription files
(GSD-files) for the DK800 form part of the
delivery for the DK800 and are supplied on 3½“ disks.
The name of the GSD-file is: DK800502.GSD
The parameters which are required by the DK800 are provided wholly by the device
data subscription files. However, the data channels to be used must be selected.
3.3. Consistent reading and writing
A data stream which contents belong together and may not be separated are known
as consistent data. For instance, the actual value of the DK800 and the status
always go together and may not be distorted by being read at two different points
in time.
A Siemens-S7-PLC for instance, can read a maximum of 4 connected bytes using load
commands which access peripherals and / or the process map of the inputs. If one
wishes to ensure data consistency over all bytes of the data record, one must use
the following system functions for the S7:
• SFC 13
Read the slave diagnosis
• SFC 14
Read the data consistency of DP standard slave
• SFC 15
Write the data consistency to a DP standard slave
The above mentioned system functions are included in the delivery of Step7
(Version V5.0), can be found in the standard library and are described in the
reference handbook to Step7.
The same process should also be used for other PLC products and computers.
4. The data channels
The following logical data channels are offered by the DK800:
• Process data channel for inputs (identification 0x98)
1-2
DK800 with Profibus-DP interface
Operating instruction (Supplement)
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
• bi-directional channel (identification 0xFF)
• shortened bi-directional channel (identification 0xBF)
• Slave diagnosis
The following combinations are possible:
• only process data channel: 98
• only bi-directional channel: FF
• only short bi-directional channel: BF
• process data channel + bi-directional channel: 98 + FF or FF + 98
• process data channel + short bi-directional channel: 98 + BF or BF + 98
4.1. Process data channel for inputs (identification 0x98)
The process data channel includes the data shown on the display of the DK800 at
any time. No commands or data can be transferred to the DK800.
The data are constantly transferred to the Master using the maximum speed set in
the parameters of the Profibus. An update of the data contents is carried out
with the DK800 parametered average value of the analogue output. This also applies if the analogue output is not physically present as hardware. Through this
a very fast data transfer (up to circa 10 milliseconds) with a simultaneously
calm indicator can be achieved. The data are always shown (differing from the
DK800 indicator) with a single digit jump.
The transfer is carried out as a standard input identification with 9 byte
consistency.
Operating instruction (Supplement)
DK800 with Profibus-DP interface
-3-
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Illustration of the data on the Profibus:
Byte
Description
0 The 6 decimal digits of the indicator, together with the sign are
completely converted to a 32-Bit 2's-complement display. If the DK800
shows ?????? as an indicated value or the serial connection to the DK800
is interrupted, the maximum positive value (7FFFFFFFhex) is transferred.
Byte 0 includes Bit 7..0 (LSB) of the actual value
Bit 15..8 of the actual value
Bit 23..16 of the actual value
Bit 31..24 of the actual value (MSB)
Status and analysis of Bytes 0..3
Bit 7
No valid actual value available (e.g. DK indicator =??????) or
there is a serial fault
Bit 6
No internal serial connection to the DK800 Main board
Bit 5
Watch-Dog-Bit (changes its state every 200ms)
Bit 4,3
Currently always 0 (free for expansions)
Bit 2
Number of digits behind decimal point Bit 22
Bit 1
Number of digits behind decimal point Bit 21
Bit 0
Number of digits behind decimal point Bit 20
5 Bit 7
Net (tare)
Bit 6
1/10d (high resolution, Note that digits behind decimal point)
Bit 5
Motion (~)
Bit 4
Minimum load
Bit 3
Dosage current value (for *I) is stored
Bit 2,1
Currently always 0 (free for expansions)
Bit 0
Dosage started
6 Bit 0..7 Currently always 0 (free for expansions)
7 Bit 7
Status Output A15 (Overload, if necessary inverse)
Bit 6
Status Output A14 (Empty)
Bit 5
Status Output A13 (Coarse dosing)
Bit 4
Status Output A12 (Fine dosing)
Bit 3
Status Output A11 (End of dosing)
Bit 2
Status Output A10 (Tolerance)
Bit 1
Status Output A9 (limit value)
Bit 0
Status Output A8 (Dosing time exceeded/ Printer acknowledge
signal)
8 Bit 0..7 Currently always 0 (free for expansions)
The Watch-Dog-Bit (Bit 5 in Byte 4) will not change its state, if the DK800
executes internal processes (e.g. calibration of the DK800 with the internal
keyboard)!
1
2
3
4
1-4
DK800 with Profibus-DP interface
Operating instruction (Supplement)
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
4.2. Bi-directional channel (identification 0xFF)
The bi-directional (acyclic) channel enables the sending and receiving of
commands or data to and from the DK800 via the Profibus.
The telegrams described in part 3 of the " Programmer's handbook " (without STX,
checksum and ETB) are also sent via the Profibus to the DK800. Similarly, the
answer does not contain STX, checksum and ETB. In order to keep the answers
separate, a toggle bit exists: A new transfer is started as soon as the toggle
bit changes. The answer contains the same toggle bit as the query. The master
must therefore wait for the DK800 to answer before it can send a new command to
the DK800. Acknowledge is set if the answer to a telegram was answerd with ACK
(in a telegram without data) or was answerd with the correct data. The commands
" !X " and " *X " are not supported.
The answer time to the commands which read or write data amounts, to around 10
milliseconds.
Commands which call up a reaction of the DK800 (e.g. Tare), have an execution
time of 0.3 up to a maximum of 2 seconds (depending upon the parameter average,
among other things). Therefore, the answer to these commands can only appear on
the Profibus after this time.
Telegram from Profibus Master to DK800 (order, command):
Byte
0
1
2..31
Description
Control byte
Bit 7
Toggle bit, after DK800 switch-on the Toggle bit = 0.
Bit 6
0, no meaning
Bit 5
0, no meaning
Bit 4..0
Number of characters from Byte 1
1. character to send (without (STX), [PP] and (ETB) )
Following characters
Telegram from DK800 to Profibus Master (Answer):
Byte
0
1
2..31
Description
Control byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Toggle bit
1=ACK, 0=NAK
1= • no valid answer from internal serial interface
received
• or the command is not supported, e.g. " *X... "
• otherwise 0.
Bit 4..0
Number of characters from Byte 1
1. character to send (without (STX), [PP] and (ETB) )
Following characters
Operating instruction (Supplement)
DK800 with Profibus-DP interface
-5-
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
4.3. Shortened bi-directional channel (identification 0xBF)
This channel should only be used if there are problems with the bi-directional
32-byte-channel with the identification 0xFF, for instance; if a consistency of
more than 16 bytes on the PLC is not possible. The shortened 16-byte-channel
(identification 0xBF) is the same as the 32-byte-channel (identification 0xFF),
only it is limited to a length of 16 bytes. Answers from the serial interface of
the DK800 are limited to a length of 15 bytes.
Telegram from Profibus Master to DK800 (order, command):
Byte
0
1
2..15
Description
Control byte
Bit 7
Toggle bit, after DK800 switch-on the Toggle bit = 0.
Bit 6
0, no meaning
Bit 5
0, no meaning
Bit 4
0, no meaning
Bit 3..0
Number of characters from Byte 1
1. character to send (without (STX), [PP] and (ETB) )
Following characters
Telegram from DK800 to Profibus Master (Answer):
Byte
0
1
2..15
1-6
Description
Control byte
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Toggle bit
1=ACK, 0=NAK
1= • no valid answer from internal serial interface
received
• or the command is not supported, e.g. " *X... "
• otherwise 0.
Bit 4
The answer of the DK800 was length-limited.
Bit 3..0
Number of characters from Byte 1
1. character to send (without (STX), [PP] and (ETB) )
Following characters
DK800 with Profibus-DP interface
Operating instruction (Supplement)
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
5. Slave diagnosis
" DK800_V1.0 " is indicated by the standard diagnosis.
In case the DK800 Profibus Controller cannot make contact to the DK800 or the
communication with the DK800 is interrupted, a diagnosis with set EXT_DIAG Bit is
displayed.
Diagnosis via the Profibus:
Byte
0
1..10
11
12
13
14
Description
Number of bytes for the diagnosis (0x0F hex)
Text " DK800_V1.0 "
fatal ERROR, the EXT_DIAG Bit will be set
Bit 7
Subsequent serial data errors
Bit 6
Subsequent serial Timeout errors
Bit 5
ROM error (Gateway)
Bit 4
RAM error (Gateway)
Bit 0
reserved, this bit does not cause any diagnosis.
Last error code
Bit 5
No valid Profibus address received from EEPROM.
Bit 4
No valid Profibus address received via serial interface.
Bit 3
Serial data error
Bit 2
Serial Timeout
Bit 1
Hardware error
Counter (revolving) the present error
Bit 0
reserved (1)
6. The expanded identification (0xC0, 0xFF, 0xFF)
The expanded identification serves only to base configure the DK800 or for
reading in and out of the configuration parameters of the DK800 through a special
PC-Program (under construction). It can only be configured alone, not with other
identifications.
The channel of the expanded identification enables the sending of serial commands
up to a length of 125 bytes to the DK800 via the Profibus.
Caution ! Not all Profibus Masters support expanded identifications.
Caution ! The configuration parameters of the DK800 encompass around 1 kilobyte
of data (circa 10 Blocks each with 100 byte), which then must be saved
and managed by the Master.
Reading in / out of configuration parameters is not yet implemented
(under construction) and will be published with the corresponding
GSD-File in a separate description.
Operating instruction (Supplement)
DK800 with Profibus-DP interface
-7-
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Index
Analogue output .......................................... 2
Average cycles ........................................... 2
3
5
Baudrate ................................................. 2
Bi-directional channel (identification 0xFF) ............. 5
Bus cable ................................................ 1
Bus connector ............................................ 1
BUS termination .......................................... 1
Bus terminator ........................................... 1
Bus-connection ........................................... 1
Connection ............................................... 1
Consistence of data ...................................... 2
Consistent reading and writing ........................... 2
6
Data channels ............................................ 2
Device data subscription file (GSD-File) ................. 2
Device Parameters ........................................ 2
Diagnosis ................................................ 2
3
7
Error code ............................................... 7
Expanded identification (0xC0, 0xFF, 0xFF) ............... 7
EXT_DIAG Bit ............................................. 7
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fkt.
Fkt.
" AN.AUSG " ........................................... 2
" AN.OUTP " ........................................... 2
" COM.NO " ............................................ 2
" COM.TYP " ........................................... 2
" COM.NR " ............................................ 2
" COM.TYP " ........................................... 2
GSD-File ................................................. 2
7
Hardware requirements .................................... 1
Identification
Identification
Identification
Identification
0x98,
0xBF,
0xC0,
0xFF,
process data channel for inputs ..... 3
Shortened bi-directional channel .... 6
0xFF, 0xFF, expanded identification . 7
Bi-directional channel .............. 5
Parameterisation of the DK800 ............................ 2
Parameterisation of the Profibus-DP-Master ............... 2
Planning ................................................. 2
PLC ...................................................... 2
Plug arrangement ......................................... 1
Process data channel for inputs (identification 0x98) .... 3
Profibus master .......................................... 2
Profibus Parameter ....................................... 2
Profibus-DP Interface .................................... 1
Shortened bi-directional channel (identification 0xBF) ... 6
Slave addr. ............................................. 2
Slave diagnosis .......................................... 2
Stub cables .............................................. 1
3
7
Toggle bit ............................................... 5
1-8
DK800 with Profibus-DP interface
Operating instruction (Supplement)
Instruction manual
DK 800
Version
01.01
User manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
Siemensstr. 36
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
Tel. (0)7151 / 94902-0
Fax (0)7151 / 43946
Copyright © 1994 - 2001
by
Mesomatic GmbH
D-71394 Kernen i.R.
date of issue 15.02.2001
Table of contents
Preface ............................................................. 1
1. Switching on ..................................................... 1
2. Measuring mode ................................................... 2
3. Data entry .......................................................
3.1. Searching for a function number ..............................
3.2. Summary of functions (01...49) ...............................
3.3. Entering Data ................................................
3.4. Explanation of individual parameters .........................
3.4.1. Clear zero point memory ..................................
3.4.2. Setting zero facility ....................................
3.4.3. Zero continuation facility ...............................
3.4.4. Empty signal (hysteresis and delay time) .................
3.4.5. Limit switch .............................................
3.4.6. Dosing parameter .........................................
3.4.7. Auxiliary functions for testing unit .....................
3.4.8. Printer ..................................................
3.5. Data protection ..............................................
3.6. Control outputs and Watch-dog ................................
3
3
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
9
9
4. Error messages .................................................. 10
5. Dosing cycle .................................................... 12
6. Techn. Data ..................................................... 14
7. Options and Type Descriptions ................................... 15
Index .............................................................. 16
- I -
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Preface
This part of the operating instructions (the User's Handbook) is intended for the
final user and describes the operation of the unit as well as minor adaptation
which the user can carry out. More detailed information on starting up can be
found in Part 2 of the Commissioning and Service Handbook.
Part 3, the Programmer's Handbook, describes how the DK800 can be coupled to a
master computer and how the two can exchange data.
General note: If two function-names are separated by a " / " , the name in front of
the " / " is used in the german unit-version, the name after the " / " is used in the
english unit-version.
1. Switching on
The first 8 seconds all indicating elements are in the active state the next
8 seconds the display is dark. Afterwards the type of the unit and the identification of the version are displayed. On units which can be officially calibrated,
the EU Construction Type Approval is indicated. On units which cannot be
officially calibrated, " IN.AUSF " / " IN.VRSN " (Industrial Version) is indicated.
After that the weight is displayed.
If the display says " --- & gt; 0! " instead of the weight, the whole of the memory has
been erased by the user and the DK800 must be parameterised all over again.
Max
Min
e =
95
D94-09-020
kg
kg
kg
S.Nr. ...........
∼
kg
Min
1
d
10
DK800
0
Net F
-
+
Fig.1
The keyboard on the front contains 5 keys with integrated LED's. The keys are
labelled:
" 0 "
" Net "
" F "
" + "
" - "
The operation of the keyboard
" measuring " and " data input " .
is
described
below
under
the
operating
modus
The LED's on the left next to the display have the following meaning:
∼
Motion (no standstill)
Min Minimum charge not loaded
1
d higher resolution is displayed for 5 seconds
10
Weigher over-full
Weigher empty
User manual
1-1
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
2. Measuring mode
The measuring mode starts up automatically when the unit is switched on to main
voltage and the display has shown the version number. The keys in the front panel
have the following functions now:
" 0 "
⇒ Zeroing the display within the pre-programmed zero-setting range. The
permissible zero range is defined in the Function " N.ST.BER " / " Z.RANGE "
and, on those units which can be officially calibrated, represents ±2
percent of the calibrated display range. This function replaces the
effect of a conventional zero adjust potentiometer. The key touch is
only effective if the " motion " LED is off and the " gross " mode is
active! The zero memory can be cleared by using the fct. " NUL.CLR " (see
3.4.1.).
" Net " ⇒ digital taring of the display, effective over the entire calibrated display range. This key also has an On / Off function, i.e. the first time
it is pressed it activates the taring function (it shows the net weight)
and switches the LED on. The next time it is pressed it switches the
taring and the LED off (and shows the gross weight). The key touch is
only effective if the " motion " LED is off!
" + " and " - " simultaneously ⇒ Switch over the display to fine calibration, with a
resolution of 1/10 d. This display disappears after 5 seconds, but can
be re-activated by pressing the keys again.
" 0 " , " + " and " - " simultaneously ⇒ Reset the unit (identical effect as when the
power is switched on).
1-2
User manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
3. Data entry
Pressing the " F " key puts the unit into the " Enter data " mode. According to the
software implemented, up to 149 different parameters can be entered. The parameters (functions) with the numbers 1...49 are accessible by the operator at all
times and are described in this part of the instruction manual. The input of
sensitive data (configurations- and calibration function 50...149) are guarded
and are described in part 2 (line-up and service manual).
3.1. Searching for a function number.
When the " F " key is pressed, either " FKT.xxx " / " FCN.xxx " will be displayed or, if
the function is allocated, the text as shown in tab.1. However the text
" WARTEN " / " WAIT " is indicated, a serial communication takes place. After the
communication is completed " FKT.xxx " / " FCN.xxx " or the function text is displayed.
During the parameter input the LED in the " F " key will light up and the LED's
arranged vertically on the front panel will keep flashing. Also, the " empty " report output will be deactivated for the whole of the time during which
parameters are being entered in order to be able to prevent dosing being started
by the release of any external mechanisms.
The keys have the following functions now:
" + "
⇒ Increases the function number in steps of 1.
If this key is held down, the function number is displayed.
ton is not pressed the text appears.
⇒ Increases the function number in steps of 10.
" 0 "
If this key is held down, the function number is displayed.
ton is not pressed the text appears.
" - "
⇒ Decreases the function number in steps of 1.
If this key is held down, the function number is displayed.
ton is not pressed the text appears.
" + " and " - " simultaneously
⇒ Reset the function number to 0.
" F "
⇒ Exit from the data-entry mode
" Net " ⇒ Displays the contents of the function selected.
" 0 " , " + " and " - " simultaneously ⇒ Reset the unit (identical effect
power is switched on).
C a u t i o n !
If the but-
If the but-
If the but-
as when the
I m p o r t a n t !
It is only possible to leave the data-entry mode by means of the
" F " -key!
If any combination of the keys " 0 " & " + " & " - " (reset) is pressed
while functions are being entered, or if the power supply is cut off
from the unit, the new data will be stored in the unit but the DK800
will not have been able to calculate the check-number. The next time
it is switched on, the data will therefore not tally with the checknumber and the DK800 will report the error " ERR.03 " . If this error
report is acknowledged, all data will be erased and the DK800 will
be back in its basic setting.
User manual
1-3
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
3.2. Summary of functions
The functions (1...49) are allocated as follows in the version described here:
Fct displayed
Description
DimenSection
no. text
sion
N U L.C L R
05 N U L.C L R Clear zero point memory
3.4.1
N.S T E L L
06 Z.S E T
Setting zero facility
3.4.2
N.N A C H F
07 Z.A L I G N Zero continuation facility
3.4.3
L E E R M.
10 E M P T Y
Empty, threshold
kg
3.4.4
L E E R M.H
11 E M P T Y.H Empty, hysteresis
kg
3.4.4
L E E R M.V
12 E M P T Y.D Empty, delay time
s
3.4.4
G R E N Z W
13 L I M.D W P Limit value for limit switch
kg
3.4.5
G R N Z W.H
14 L I M.S P.H Limit switch, hysteresis
kg
3.4.5
S O L L
17 N O M.V A L Nominal value
kg
3.4.6
G / F
18 C / F
Coarse / fine
kg
3.4.6
N L
19 A F
Afterflow
kg
3.4.6
T O L. +
20 T O L. +
Positive tolerance
kg
3.4.6
T O L. 21 T O L. Negative tolerance
kg
3.4.6
M A X.N L
22 M A X.A F
Max. afterflow
kg
3.4.6
W Z.V.T A R
23 D L Y.T A R Wait time before taring
s
3.4.6
D O S.Z T.U
25 D O S.T M.C Dosing time monitoring
s
3.4.6
W Z.V.R E G
26 D L Y.R E G Wait time before registration
s
3.4.6
D G.G R O B
27 D S.C O A R Dosing speed coarse
%
3.4.6
D G.F E I N
28 D S.F I N E Dosing speed fine
%
3.4.6
R A M P E
29 R A M P
Ramp / percental share
%
3.4.6
L F D.N R.
39 I T E M.N O Item no. (protocol-printer)
3.4.8
L Z.N.D R U
40 L F.B.P R I Empty lines after printing
3.4.8
D R U C K
41 P R I N T R Printing on/off
3.4.8
R E V.N R.
44 R E V.N O.
Software revision no.
3.4.7
R E V.D A T
45 R E V.D A T Software revision date
3.4.7
E - T E S T
47 I - T E S T Test of input circuits
3.4.7
A - T E S T
48 O - T E S R Test of output circuits
3.4.7
A / D - W.T
49 A / D - C.T Test of A/D- and D/A-converters
3.4.7
Tab. 1 Summary of functions
1-4
User manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
3.3. Entering Data
After the required parameter number has been found, the " Net " key should now be
pressed. If the selected parameter contains a figure value, it will be displayed
with the last digit flashing. Otherwise, a text will be displayed (e.g.
" OHNE " / " NONE " , or " MIT " / " WITH " ), which can be changed by means of the " + " or the
" - " key.
Is the function not allocated, " = ?? = " will be displayed. Is the function locked
or temporarily unavailable, " = N.V. = " / " = N.A. = " will be displayed.
The keys
" 0 "
⇒
⇒
" + "
" - "
⇒
" F "
⇒
" Net " ⇒
have the following functions now:
sets the flashing digit to 0.
increases the value of the flashing digit by 1 or shows the next text.
decreases the value of the flashing digit by 1 or shows the last text.
moves the flashing digit one position to the left.
stores the indicated parameter value and returns to the parameter
selection.
3.4. Explanation of individual parameters
3.4.1. Clear zero point memory
The function " NUL.CLR " permits the zero point correction of all the zeroing
facilities to be cleared. After the text NUL.CLR has been located, the " Net " key
should be pressed; the text " CLEAR? " will appear and the " + " and " - " key LED's
will start flashing. Pressing the " + " and " - " keys simultaneously will cause the
zero point correction memory to be cleared.
3.4.2. Setting zero facility
The automatic setting zero facility " N.STELL " / " Z.SET " can only be activated by
the
operator,
if
this
has
been
released
in
the
configurationfct. " N.ST.FGB " / " Z.SET.EN " . The automatic setting zero facility will then be
activated by entering " MIT " / " WITH " in fct. " N.STELL " / " Z.SET " .
The automatic setting zero facility is only active if:
• the gross weight is displayed,
• the balance is in standstill (motion LED is off ),
• the display was stable and below zero for at least 5 seconds and
• the sum of all compensated partial zero amounts so far lies within the
zero point area (±2% of the measuring range).
If all these conditions are met, the display will be automatically set to zero.
3.4.3. Zero continuation facility
The zero continuation ( " N.NACHF " / " Z.ALIGN " ) can only be activated by the operator, if this has been released in the configuration-fct. " N.NF.FGB " / " Z.ALG.EN " .
The zero continuation facility will be activated by entering " MIT " / " WITH " in
fct. " N.NACHF " / " Z.ALIGN " then.
The zero continuation is only active if:
• the gross weight is displayed,
• the display is at zero,
• the balance is in standstill (motion LED is off ),
• the change in weight amount to no more than 0.5 display units per second
and
• the sum of all compensated partial zero amounts so far lies within the
zero point area (±2% of the measuring range).
If all these conditions are met, the display will be automatically set to zero.
This facility compensates very slow changes in the zero point.
User manual
1-5
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
3.4.4. Empty signal (hysteresis and delay time)
Example:
" LEERM. " / " EMPTY " = 100
" LEERM.H " / " EMPTY.H " = 20
The " empty " signal disappears as soon as 120 is reached and reappears when the
weigher has been emptied to below 100.
The delay time " LEERM.V " / " EMPTY.D " (which covers a range from 0,1...25 seconds)
only operates through the external output, if this has been released by the
configuration-fct. " L/UE-A " , and not on the " empty " display on the front panel.
3.4.5. Limit switch
The DK800 has a limit switch which can be freely defined. If the limit switch is
activated by entering a mode operation in configuration fct. " GRNZW.M " / " LIM.SP.M "
(limit mode), the switch-point of the limit switch can be entered in
fct. " GRENZW " / " LIM.SWP " .
The limit value can lie anywhere within the measurement range of the balance. The
configuration fct. " GRNZW.M " / " LIM.SP.M " can be used to define whether the limit
switch is derived from the gross or the net weight and in which direction it is
to operate.
3.4.6. Dosing parameter
In this section of the user functions the parameters required for dosing are
entered and displayed. If the dosing parameters have been preset via the serial
interface, they can be displayed with these functions and altered manually.
The nominal value is entered with fct. " SOLL " / " NOM.VAL " . If the function
" AN.EING " / " AN.INP. " has been set in configuration fct. " SOLLW.Q " / " N.V.SRC " , no
entry need to be made; the programme calculates the voltage in the analogue
auxiliary input (X2 pin 9) onto the measuring range, displays it, and uses it as
the nominal value.
The coarse / fine value is entered with fct. " G/F " / " C/F " . If only one dosing
speed is selected (see configurations fct. " DOSIER " / " DOSING " ), 0 should be
entered as this parameter.
The afterflow value is entered with fct " NL " / " AF " .
The tolerance limit for the tolerance check after the dosing is completed, is
entered in fct. " TOL. " . If the setting " OHNE " / " NONE " is selected in configuration
fct. " TOL.PFG " / " TOL.CHK " , 0 should be entered for this parameter.
Fct. " MAX.NL " / " MAX.AF " is only used if the setting " MIT " / " WITH " has been selected
in configuration fct. " NL.KORR " / " AF.CORR " . if the unit is working without any
automatic afterflow correction, 0 should be entered for this parameter.
Entering 12,0 seconds with function " DOS.ZT.U " / " DOS.TM.C " means that up from the
beginning of dosage until the final registration (end of dosing) 12 seconds can
pass.
After this time output A8 will be activated if dosage will not get finished.
If dosing time monitoring is not required, 0 has to be entered in function
" DOS.ZT.U " / " DOS.TM.C "
As
dosing-time
monitoring
uses
the
same
output
(A8)
as
the
" A.A.2.BER " / " A.O.RNG.2 " function (the 2nd analogue measurement range) and as
" D.QUITT " /P.ACKN. " (print-out acknowledgement), these functions cannot all be
activated at the same time. If the print-out acknowledgement is activated, " =
N.V. = " ( " not available " ) will be displayed for the dosing-time monitoring
function, and this function will be switched off. If the 2nd analogue measurement
range function is activated, the dosing-time monitoring function must be de-activated by entering " 0.0 " .
The waiting period prior to the tolerance inspection or the actual value registration procedure is entered with fct. " WZ.V.REG " / " DLY.REG " (see configuration
fct. " REG.MOD " ). The permissible range of values lies between 0.1 and 25 seconds.
1-6
User manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
The
waiting
time
for
tare
measurement
is
entered
with
the
function
" WZ.V.TAR " / " DLY.TAR " . This, for instance, allows the unit to wait for the air to
settle out after the weigher has been closed. The function can be de-activated by
entering 0.
The analogue output can be configured as shown in the diagram fig. 2 This
operation mode has to be selected by entering " DOSIER " / " DOSING " (waveform
) or
" D.RAMPE " (waveform ) in the function " AN.MODE " .
The ramp characteristic is suitable in those dosing-units using motor speed
control.
¡
The nominal values of motor speed for dosage coarse and dosage fine must be
entered in the functions " DG.GROB " / " DS.COAR " and " DG.FEIN " / " DS.FINE " . Both values
are between 0...10 Volt (o...20 mA) and have to be entered as % of the whole
range.
Output
voltage
coarse
dosingspeed
G/F-switching point
C/F-switching point
£
NL-switch off point
AF-switch off point
nominal value
¢
fine
dosingspeed
weight
Ra
G/F-NL
C/F-AF
G/F
C/F
NL
AF
Fig.2
" RAMPE " / " RAMP " function will be explained by the following example:
-
coarse-fine switching point:
(fct. " G/F " / " C/F " )
afterflow:
(fct. " NL " / " AF " )
motor speed coarse:
(fct. " DG.GROB " / " DS.COAR " )
motor speed fine:
(fct. " DG.FEIN " / " DS.FINE " )
ramp:
(fct. " RAMPE " / " RAMP "
function " AN.MODE " has been set to " DOSIER " / " DOSING "
nominal value is 1000 kg
= 100 kg
=
5 kg
= 80 %
= 20 %
= 70 %
Dosage coarse will start at 80%, i.e. 8 volts
At 1000 - 100 kg = 900 kg fine dosage will begin with a speed of 20%, i.e. 2
volts.
At 1000 kg - 5 kg = 995 kg dosing will be finished.
If instead of " DOSIER " / " DOSING " " D.RAMPE " has been set, coarse dosage will start
at 8 volts, too. But up from the first switching point (900 kg) the output
voltage will follow the ramp.
User manual
1-7
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
The decreasing rate of the ramp is given by " Ra " , in our example
Ra = (100 kg - 5 kg) x 80% = 76 kg
that means:
up from 900 kg (start of the ramp) until 976 kg (end of the ramp) output voltage
will decrease as shown in fig. 2, waveform .
¡
Up from 976 kg until (1000 kg - 5 kg) = 995 kg dosing will be continued and
finished with a constant voltage of 20% (= 2 volts)
3.4.7 Auxiliary functions for testing the unit
The functions " REV.NR. " / " REV.NO. " and " REV.DAT " can be used to see the revision
number of the software implemented in the unit.
The functions " E-TEST " / " I-TEST " , " A-TEST " / " O-TEST " and " A/D-W.T " / " A/D-C.T " were
implemented in order to make it possible to test the unit quickly under operating
conditions. They test the control input and output and the A/D and D/A converter
for proper function.
The control inputs can be tested with fct. " E-TEST " / " I-TEST " . The display shows a
4-figure value. The two right-most digits indicating the status of 8 external
optocoupler inputs, the second-most left one the status of the internal switch
block and the left-most one the status of the serial CTS input. For basic
information see part 2 line up and service manual.
The control outputs can be checked with fct. " A-TEST " / " O-TEST " . The display then
shows a 2-figure value. Once this function has taken effect, all available
outputs will be switched in. The display value can then be raised by 1 at a time
by means of the " + " key, which switches through all the control outputs in turn.
The " 0 " key returns to " ** " -display. With exiting this function the unit will be
reset. For basic information's see part 2 line up and service manual.
The A/D and D/A converter can be checked with fct. " A/D-W.T " / " A/D-C.T " The
display shows the input voltage as a percentage of the reading range. If 0 is
displayed, this shows there is no weight on the load cell (0mV = 0%). If 100
displayed, this shows there is max. weight on the load cell (20mV = 100%). If 110
is displayed, this shows that the end of the reading range has been reached for
the A/D converter.
When the function occurs, 0V or 0/4mA is shown on the D/A converter. Each time
the " + " key is pressed, the output voltage (output current) is raised by
1V(2/1,6mA) until 10V (20mA) is reached. As the next step, -10V (-20mA) will be
given. Pressing the " 0 " key will return the output voltage (output current) to
0V(0/4mA). For basic information's see part 2 line up and service manual.
3.4.8. Printer
The " LFD.NR " / " ITEM.NO. " function is required only if a printer is connected to
the DK800. In this function, a 6-digit serial number can be entered which will
appear on the print-out.
The number of linefeeds behind
" LZ.N.DRU " / " LF.B.PRI " .
the
print-out
are
entered
into
the
function
Fct. " DRUCK " / " PRINTR " switches the print-out on/off.
1-8
User manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
3.5. Data protection
If Switch 4 of the 4-position switch field on the rear of the unit is in the
downward position, the NiCd rechargeable battery located inside the unit is
switched on and the data entered will remain unchanged even if the power is cut
off. They can be held for about 4,000 hours if the battery is fully charged.
When the DK800 leaves the works its battery is about 50 percent fully charged,
but storage and despatch can add up to a considerable length of time. It is
therefore not possible to state the level of charge to be expected when the unit
reaches its final user, so the DK800 should be provided with mains power for 100
to 150 hours as soon as it has been started up in order to ensure that the
battery is recharged to its full capacity.
C a u t i o n !
When the unit is
position in order
deeply discharged.
reduce its storage
I m p o r t a n t !
being stored, Switch 4 must be in the upward
to protect the built-in battery from becoming
Deeply discharging the battery can permanently
capacity or even destroy it.
If S4 is switched off (in the upward position) the data in the
memory will no longer be stored and must be re-entered when the unit
is started up again.
3.6. Control outputs and Watch-dog
A " Watch-dog " monitoring circuit is built into the DK800 which monitors the unit
for any malfunction. If any should occur, all the control inputs are deactivated, in order (e.g.) to prevent the weigher from being overfilled during
dosing.
If the over-fill report is programmed for inverted operation, de-activation of
the over-full signal will result in the Watch-dog monitoring circuit being set
off.
User manual
1-9
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
4. Error messages
The following error messages are possible:
Fatal errors
ERR. 01
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
ERR.
→
ROM-test error.
The contents of the internal programme memory are faulty.
02 → RAM-test error.
The internal variable memory is faulty.
03 → The contents of the configuration memory have been altered.
When this error message has been acknowledged, the configuration
memory will be in its basic conditions. The data for function
0...149 must be entered all over again, starting with Fct.50.
04 → An error has occurred during the programming of the unit via the
serial interface and the contents of the configuration memory
have been changed.
The error should be acknowledged. The configuration memory will
then be in its basic position, and Functions 0 ... 149 will have
to be entered again, starting the Function 50.
05 → The internal A/D converter of the 87C196 is not ready.
10..27 → internal interrupt error.
30 → internal data I/O error.
MA/ERR.PU →
The load cell monitor has responded. See part 2,
Fct. " MA.GRW.↓ " / " PU.LIM.↓ " or " MA.GRW.↑ " / " PU.LIM.↑ "
MA/ERR.LPT →
The data transfer to the printer is out of order, or
the printer is switched off.
Warnings and other errors
JG & lt; MIN/AW & lt; MIN→ The calibration weight (Fct. " J.GEW. " / " ADJ.WGT " ) is too
small.
JG & gt; MAX/AW & gt; MAX→ The calibration weight (Fct. " J.GEW. " / " ADJ.WGT " ) is too
large.
VL & lt; MIN/PL & lt; MIN→ The initial load (tare) is too small. (see part 2, section
" calibration " )
VL & gt; MAX/PL & gt; MAX→ The initial load (tare) is too large. (see part 2, section
" calibration " )
ML & lt; MIN
→ The max. load = end of range(calibration) is too small. (see
part 2, section " calibration " )
ML & gt; MAX
→ The max. load = end of range(calibration) is too small. (see
part 2, section " calibration " )
0 & gt; MAX
→ The setting zero is not possible, The actual weight is larger
than ±2% of the range.
SW & lt; MIN/NV & lt; MIN→ The analogue nominal value(calibration of analogue input) is
too small. (see part 2, section " adjustment of the analogue
input " )
SW & gt; MAX/NV & gt; MAX→ The analogue nominal value(calibration of analogue input) is
too large. (see part 2, section " adjustment of analogue input " )
K.P. & gt; J.GW/C.S. & gt; AD.W
→
The entered
linearity
correction
point
is
greater than the calibration weight.
K.P.VORH/C.S.EXST→
The entered linearity correction point is existing.
K.P.RR/C.S.ERR → One or more linearity correction point(s) are not calibrated.
-- & gt; 0!
→ The configuration memory is in its basic position, e.g. as a
result of ERR.03/04 having been acknowledged or the " Erase all "
function having been carried out. The Functions 0...149 will
have to be entered again, starting the Function 50.
S1!
→ If the input function is left with switch 1 still in the lower
position, the display will flash " S1 " , and the overload output
will be activated. Switching Switch 1 to the upward position
will acknowledge this report.
WARTEN/WAIT → After pressing the " F " key (for fct. input) either
" FKT.xxx " / " FCN.xxx " or, in case the function is allocated, the
function text is displayed. But if the text " WARTEN " / " WAIT " is
displayed, a serial communication takes place. When the
1 - 10
User manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
communication is completed " FKT.xxx " / " FCN.xxx " or the function
text is displayed.
These errors are shown in flashing text, and the " + " and " - " keys keep flashing.
the error signal can be acknowledged by pressing the " + " and " - " keys simultaneously.
If any change to the user configuration functions are necessary after the error
has been acknowledged as rectified, the F-key has to be pressed down and held
down during the switching process until it becomes possible to enter the data.
User manual
1 - 11
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
5. Dosing cycle
A dosing cycle can be started and controlled either via the serial interface or
via the control-inputs.
The following settings are necessary for the dosing cycle described in this
example:
User-parameters
SOLL/NOM.VAL
G/F / C/F
NL/AF
TOL. +
TOL. MAX.NL/MAX.AF
DOS.ZT.U/DOS.TM.C
WZ.V.REG/DLY.REG
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1200
200
40
20
10
100
80,0
5,0
Configuration-parameters
SS.ZEIT/SS.TIME
=
SS.TEIL/SS.DIGT
=
SS.T./M.Z / SS.D./A.C
=
DOSIER/DOSING
TOL.PFG/TOL.CHK
=
=
REG.MOD
=
NL.KORR/AF.CORR
=
SOLLW.Q/N.V.SRC
=
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
Nominal value 1200kg
coarse / fine-correction 200kg
afterflow correction 40kg
Positive tolerance threshold 20kg
Negative tolerance threshold 10kg
Max. afterflow correction 100kg
Max. dosing time 80 seconds
Waiting
time
for
tolerance
tion / registration 5 seconds
inspec-
⇒ Stand-still monitoring. The time during
which the stand-still weight value must not
be exceeded = 2 seconds.
1,0 ⇒ Stand-still
monitoring.
Maximum
weight
change
(parts
number)
per
unit
of
time = 1d.
1,0 ⇒ Stand-still monitoring. Parts number per
average cycle) = 1d/ average cycle.
G/F / C/F⇒ Operating modus: Coarse / fine correction.
NUR +/ONLY + ⇒
Operating
modus:
if
the
upper
tolerance
tolerance limit is exceeded,
report in display and if relevant activate
an output signal.
If the value falls below the lower tolerance
limit,
recalculate
afterflow
switch-off point and add topping-up dose.
ZT+STS/TM+STS⇒
Operating
modus:
waiting
time
before tolerance check/registration, then
waiting for standstill.
NUR NL/ONLY AF ⇒
Operating modus: with automatical
afterflow-correction
(note:
coarse-fine
will not be corrected)
INTERN
⇒ Operating modus: the nominal value entered
in function " SOLL " is used for dosing.
2,0
The DK800 now calculates the following values with the aid to the above-mentioned
user-parameters:
coarse-fine-point
= nominal value - coarse-fine-value
= 1200kg - 200kg
= 1000kg
afterflow-correction
= nominal value - afterflow correction
= 1200kg - 40kg
= 1160kg
lower tolerance limit
= nominal value - tolerance threshold
= 1200kg - 10kg
= 1190kg
upper tolerance limit
= nominal value + tolerance threshold
= 1200kg + 10kg
= 1210kg
The dosing cycle can now be started with the serial !D -command or via input E4
(take note of the " D.START " configuration function). Input E4 must be supplied
with a continuous signal current (until the " ready " report) because dosing is
broken off immediately
current ceases on the input (see. part 3. chapter
" Breaking off Dosing " , !C-command) and the DK800 reverts to normal monitoring
mode. Throughout the dosing cycle, the key pad on the front of the unit is locked
1 - 12
User manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
out, with the exception of the combination of keys for re-setting the unit (see
chapter " Monitoring function " . " Selecting a function number " ).
The DK800 will now wait for the length of time entered in " WZ.V.TAR " / " DLY.REG " in
order, for instance, for pressure fluctuations to even out which are caused by
the closing of the weigher. It then carries out a tare measurement, and during
this time the message " D.START " will appear in the display. When the tare
measurement is complete, the net weight (zero) will be displayed and the " Net "
LED will light up. Output A13 (Coarse) is then switched on, i.e. the coarse flow
will be dosed in. When the coarse / fine switchover point (1000 kg) is reached,
the coarse-output is switched off and the fine-output A12 switched on. Once the
afterflow switch-off point (1160 kg) has been reached, A12 is switched off and
the time programmed in " WZ.V.REG " / " DLY.REG " starts to run. Whilst this waiting
time is running, (e.g.) 32 kg are still in the weigher, so a total weight of 1192
kg will finally be reached.
At the end of this settling time, the unit waits for the conditions to be met
that mark the end of the weigher waiting time. Once this has been reached, the
actual weight (1192 kg) is compared with the upper tolerance limit and any excess
reported in the DK800 display and on output A10. The tolerance report / display
can now be acknowledged either with input E3 (note configuration function
" T.QUITT " / " T.QUIT " ), via the serial interface, or with the " + " or the " - " key on
the front keyboard.
The actual weight is then compared with the lower tolerance level. If it is too
low, a new (corrected) afterflow switch-off point is calculated and dosing starts
again. In the present example, the actual weight is within the permissible
tolerance limits.
The difference between actual and required weights is now calculated as 1200 1192 = 8 kg. This difference is halved, and subtracted from the afterflow reserve
(40 kg) held in the memory. At the next dosing cycle it will be switched off
earlier in order to bring the actual value closer to the required value.
If " NL+G/F " / " AF+C/F " is selected in the Function " NL.KORR " / " AF.CORR " , the
coarse/fine reserve will likewise be postponed by 4 kilos
In order to prevent excessively large discrepancies in the dosed quantities,
which could arise (e.g.) if a dosing unit does not switch off at exactly the
right point because (e.g.) of a mechanical defect, the range of the automatic
top-up correction will be automatically restricted. This restriction will be laid
down under the " MAX.NL " / " MAX.AF " function. If, for instance, 100 is laid down,
this means that the content of the memory for the top-up reserve ( " NL " / " AF " -function) cannot exceed 100 kg.
Once the calculation of the topping-up correction has been completed, the actual
weight is stored to memory in the DK800, the display shows " FERTIG " / " END " , and
output A11 (dosing end) is switched on.
If test-stop input E2 is activated (see part 2, chapter " Test-stop " ), instead of
" FERTIG " / " END " the text " P.STOP " / " T.-STOP " is displayed alternately with the netweight until the test-stop input is deactivated. Afterwards " FERTIG " / " END " is
displayed, too.
If the actual weight is now called for via the serial interface, the value is
transmitted that is stored in the memory and not the actual weight at that
moment. The data output in the " MUX " operational mode continues to show the net
weight. If the dosing cycle had been started via the serial interface, the !Icommand must now be given in order to delete the " ready " report and the actual
value stored in the memory.
If the dosing cycle had been started with input E4, this must now be switched off
in order to delete the " ready " report and the actual value stored in the memory.
The dosing cycle is now complete.
If any value deviating from zero has been entered in the " DOS.ZT.U " / " DOS.TM.C "
function, the dosing-time monitoring cycle will now be activated. The measurement
of the time for the dosing-time monitoring will be started with the start of
dosing. If the 80 seconds that have been entered are exceeded, output A8 will be
activated. The output cannot be acknowledged, and is automatically set back to
zero, when the actual-value is being registered.
User manual
1 - 13
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
6. Techn. Data
Display
6 digits / LED dot matrix 5x7
height of figures 18 mm green
(or red, on request)
Keyboard
Foil-covered, 5 keys
Sensor feed
10V for max. 6 units of 350Ω-load cells
Sensitivity
31nV/d = 0,031µV/d
1µV/d where official calibration is obligatory
System accuracy
Linearity faults
Zero-point stability
Range stability
& lt; 0,003%
& lt; 0,2µV/10K
& lt; 0,003%/10K
Analogue output
Resolution
Zero-point stability
Range stability
16000 parts, 0...±10V or 0/4...20mA
& lt; 0,01% above the pre-set temperature range
& lt; 0,01% above the pre-set temperature range
conversion rate
4000 /sec.
Number of parts
100...99999d
100...3000d where official calibration is obligatory
int. resolution
& gt; 106
Temp. range
-15...+55°C
-10...+40°C where official calibration is obligatory
Power supply
230V≈ (-15%/+10%)
50/60Hz (±2%)
or 24V= 20W (Option)
Data security
with NiCd rechargeable battery
battery capacity & gt; 4000 hours (approx. 6 month)
Dimensions
high
wide
deep
Weight
1,3kg (230 Volt version with all options)
Safety category
IP54 (higher safety categories available on request)
EMV-continuity
verified under the EU-regulation (DIN 45501)
0,5kV-pulse (Data line) / 1kV-pulse (mains)
high voltage static discharge: 6kV / 8kV
electromagnetic field: 26MHz...1GHz (6V/m)
Approvals
EU Construction Type Approval No. D 94-09.020
Classes
and
.
28VA
72mm
144mm
200mm / without connectors
Automatic balance for weighing (selbsttätige
Waage zum Abwägen, SWA) in accordance with the
national (german) Construction Type Approval
Automatic balance for individual weighing
(selbsttätige Waage für Einzelwägungen, SWE) in
accordance with the national (german)
Construction Type Approval
1 - 14
10.16
99.04
10.26
99.08
User manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
7. Options and Type Descriptions
The type description of the standard unit is DK800. This version contains the
standard software and the standard option " 2A " with the outputs " Empty " and
" Over-full " . The operating voltage is 230V∼.
The table below shows the options available.
Type des- Options
Comments
cription
2A
2 outputs
4E4A
4 inputs + 4 outputs
8E8A
8E16A
12VDC
24VDC
8 inputs + 8 outputs
8 inputs + 16 outputs
8 inputs + 16 outputs +
decoupling diode
serial RS232 interface.
serial RS485 full-duplex
interface
Profibus-DP
interface
2nd ser. PrinterInterface
Driver-Interface for
Remote-Display DK801
analog voltage output
0..±10V
analog current output
0/4..±20mA
Industrial standard, not
suitable for official
calibration
suitable for official
calibration, Class
/
under DIN-EN 45501
operating level 12V =
operating level 24V =
WAS..
special weigher software
DK801
Remote-Display
DK802
Remote-Display
8E16ADi
RS232
RS485
PDP
2RS232/C
TA
U
I
IN
EN
A14=empty, A15=overfull
special version (E4..7 + A12..15), only
possible with large unit quantities
E0..7 + A8..15
E0..7 + A0..15
E0..7 + A0..15 + diodes.
Ioutput max=50mA
not separated in conductivity
can be converted to RS232 by means of
jumpers
Installation of a seperated interface
module in the DK800
not possible if option U or I is
included
Installation of a seperated interface
module in the DK800
can be converted to current output by
means of jumpers
can be converted to voltage output by
means of jumpers
with
-approval
with EU type approval no. D 94-09-020
max. 4 load-cells, each of 350 Ω
max. 4 load-cells, each of 350 Ω
on request or to customer's
specification
6-digit LED-dotmatrix-display (Option TA
in DK800 is required)
6-digit LED-7-segment-display (Option
8E16A in DK800 is required)
Numerous other special versions are available on request, as is a wide range of
accessories.
• strip printer
• Additional mains adapter for supplying more than 6 measurement sockets
• Decimal required-value transmitter as 3-digit or 4-digit digital
potentiometer
• Opto-decoupled analogue actual-value input (0...10V or 0/4...20mA)
• Special supply voltages
• Software to meet customer's specification
• Additional housing and special safety categories
• Lightning barrier, explosion-risk barriers.
Special units:
DK810 Impulse counter for PNP-, NPN- and NAMUR-pulse transmitter
DK820 Differential weigher
DK830 volumetric dosage control
DK840 belt weigher
DK845 dosing belt weigher
Special usage instructions are available for the special units, as are
supplementary pages for this set of instructions.
User manual
1 - 15
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Index
Fig. 1 Keyboard ......................................... 1
Fig. 2 Ramp function .................................... 7
Tab. 1 Summary of functions (fct.01-49) ................. 4
acknowledgement of error messages ........................ 11
Actual value, stored ..................................... 12
Afterflow correction ..................................... 12
afterflow correction ..................................... 6 13
analogue auxiliary input ................................. 6
analogue output, switching range ......................... 6
Auxiliary functions for testing unit ..................... 8
Battery for data protection .............................. 9
battery, charge .......................................... 9
battery, protection from deep discharge .................. 9
charge battery ........................................... 9
Check A/D converter ...................................... 8
Check D/A converter ...................................... 8
Clear zero point memory .................................. 5
coarse dosing ............................................ 13
coarse/fine reserve ...................................... 13
Coarse/fine Switching Point .............................. 12
configuration data ....................................... 10
Control outputs and Watch-dog ............................ 9
Data entry ............................................... 3
Data Output .............................................. 12
Data protection .......................................... 9
Dosing Coarse ............................................ 7 12
Dosing cycle ............................................. 12
Dosing Fine .............................................. 7 12
Dosing parameter ......................................... 6
Dosing time monitoring ................................... 6 12
Empty signal (hysteresis and delay time) ................. 6
Entering Data ............................................ 5
Error .................................................... 3
Error Message ............................................ 3
Explanation of individual parameters ..................... 5
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
Fct.
1 - 16
10
10
" A.O.RNG.2 " ......................................... 6
" A/D-C.T " ........................................... 8
" AF " ................................................ 6
" C/F " ............................................... 6
" DLY.REG " ........................................... 6
" DLY.TAR " ........................................... 7
" DOS.TM.C " .......................................... 6
" DS.COAR " ........................................... 7
" DS.FINE " ........................................... 7
" EMPTY " ............................................. 6
" EMPTY.D " ........................................... 6
" EMPTY.H " ........................................... 6
" ITEM.NO. " .......................................... 8
" LF.B.PRI " .......................................... 8
" LIM.SP.M " .......................................... 6
" LIM.SWP " ........................................... 6
" MAX.AF " ............................................ 6
" NOM.VAL " ........................................... 6
" NUL.CLR " ........................................... 5
" O-TEST " ............................................ 8
" P.ACKN. " ........................................... 6
" PRINTR " ............................................ 8
" RAMPE " ............................................. 7
" REV.DAT " ........................................... 8
" REV.NO. " ........................................... 8
" TOL. " .............................................. 6
" Z.ALIGN " ........................................... 5
User manual
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Fct. " Z.SET " ............................................. 5
fine dosing .............................................. 13
Fkt. " A-TEST " ............................................ 8
Fkt. " A.A.2.BER " ......................................... 6
Fkt. " A/D-W.T " ........................................... 8
Fkt. " D.QUITT " ........................................... 6
Fkt. " DG.FEIN " ........................................... 7
Fkt. " DG.GROB " ........................................... 7
Fkt. " DOS.ZT.U " .......................................... 6
Fkt. " DRUCK " ............................................. 8
Fkt. " G/F " ............................................... 6
Fkt. " GRENZW " ............................................ 6
Fkt. " GRNZW.H " ........................................... 6
Fkt. " LEERM. " ............................................ 6
Fkt. " LEERM.H " ........................................... 6
Fkt. " LEERM.V " ........................................... 6
Fkt. " LFD.NR. " ........................................... 8
Fkt. " LZ.N.DRU " .......................................... 8
Fkt. " MAX.NL " ............................................ 6
Fkt. " N.NACHF " ........................................... 5
Fkt. " N.STELL " ........................................... 5
Fkt. " NL " ................................................ 6
Fkt. " NUL.CLR " ........................................... 5
Fkt. " REV.DAT " ........................................... 8
Fkt. " REV.NR. " ........................................... 8
Fkt. " SOLL " .............................................. 6
Fkt. " WZ.V.REG " .......................................... 6
Fkt. " WZ.V.TAR " .......................................... 7
Functions, not allocated Fct. .......................... 5
Input .................................................... 12
Input voltage ............................................ 8
Keyboard ................................................. 1
Keyboard, + key, Data input .............................. 5
Keyboard, + Key, Fct. seek ............................... 3
Keyboard, + key, Measuring mode .......................... 2
Keyboard, - key, Data input .............................. 5
Keyboard, - Key, Fct. seek ............................... 3
Keyboard, - key, Measuring mode .......................... 2
Keyboard, 0 key, Data input .............................. 5
Keyboard, 0 Key, Fct. seek ............................... 3
Keyboard, 0 key, Measuring mode .......................... 2
Keyboard, F key, Data input .............................. 5
Keyboard, F Key, Fct. seek ............................... 3
Keyboard, F Key, Measuring mode .......................... 3
Keyboard, Net key, Data input ............................ 5
Keyboard, Net Key, Fct. seek ............................. 3
Keyboard, Net key, Measuring mode ........................ 2
Limit switch ............................................. 6
Measuring mode ........................................... 2
NiCd rechargeable battery ................................ 9
Options .................................................. 15
Output ................................................... 8 12
Output current ........................................... 8
Output voltage ........................................... 8
print-out acknowledgement ................................ 6
Printer .................................................. 8
Ramp ..................................................... 7
Range-switching for the analogue output .................. 6
redosing ................................................. 13
Reset .................................................... 2 3
Reset the display to zero ................................ 2
Resolution, 1/10 d Res. ................................ 2
Restart Dosing ........................................... 12
User manual
1 - 17
MESOMATIC
Automation und Messtechnik GmbH
D-71394 Kernen
Searching for a function number .......................... 3
Setting zero facility .................................... 5
Settling Time ............................................ 12 13
starting up .............................................. 9
storing of the DK800 ..................................... 9
Summary of functions (01...49) ........................... 4
switch field ............................................. 9
Switching on ............................................. 1 11
tare measurement ......................................... 7 13
Taring ................................................... 2 12
Techn. Data .............................................. 14
test-stop at end of dosing ............................... 13
Tolerance check .......................................... 12
Tolerance limit .......................................... 6
tolerance report ......................................... 13
Type Descriptions ........................................ 15
waiting time prior to tare measurement ................... 7
Watch-dog ................................................ 9
Zero continuation facility ............................... 5
1 - 18
User manual